NDA-24282
ISSUE 1
STOCK # 200874
®
CallCenterWorX-Enterprise
ACD System Manual
SEPTEMBER, 2000
NEC America, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
i
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
ii
iii
iv
v
vi
vii
viii
ix
x
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
SEPTEMBER, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
ISSUE 7
DATE
DATE
NEAX2400 IMX
CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System Manual
Revision Sheet 1/7
NDA-24282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
SEPTEMBER, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
ISSUE 7
NEAX2400 IMX
CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System Manual
Revision Sheet 2/7
NDA-24282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
SEPTEMBER, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
ISSUE 7
NEAX2400 IMX
CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System Manual
Revision Sheet 3/7
NDA-24282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
SEPTEMBER, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
ISSUE 7
NEAX2400 IMX
CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System Manual
Revision Sheet 4/7
NDA-24282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
SEPTEMBER, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
ISSUE 7
NEAX2400 IMX
CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System Manual
Revision Sheet 5/7
NDA-24282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
SEPTEMBER, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
ISSUE 7
NEAX2400 IMX
CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System Manual
Revision Sheet 6/7
NDA-24282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 7
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
SEPTEMBER, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
NEAX2400 IMX
CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System Manual
Revision Sheet 7/7
NDA-24282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NDA-24282
ISSUE 1
SEPTEMBER, 2000
NEAX2400 IMX
CallCenterWorX-Enterprise
ACD System Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
LIST OF FIGURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vii
LIST OF TABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Related Reference Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Functional Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 System Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
MIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Interface Between ACD and MIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Equipment Related to ACD System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.6.1 Agent Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.6.2 Supervisory Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2. Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3. Installation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.1 Peripheral Equipment Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Essential/Critical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
NAP-200-101 Installation of ACD Agent Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
NAP-200-102 Installation of ACD Supervisory Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
NAP-200-103 Installation of MIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
NAP-200-104 Installation of Emergency Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
NAP-200-105 Installation of Announcement Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
NDA-24282
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page i
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
NAP-200-106 Installation of IVR/Host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4. System Start-Up Procedure for Adding ACD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
ACD Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Basic Data Assignment for Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5. Upgrading ACD System from NEAX2400 ICS to NEAX2400 IMX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Hardware and Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Upgrading Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Switch Setting of ACD Circuit Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2. Explanation of ACD Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
PA-CP53 (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
PH-PC22 (EAPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
PH-PC27 (EAPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
PA-AL16 (ALMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
PH-PC21 (APINT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
PA-PC56-A (COPY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
PA-CP54 (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
PA-ME34 (CRAM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
PA-IO02-A (IOC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
PH-BS16 (PBI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
PA-GT17 (SPGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
PA-16ELCDD (ELC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
PA-16ELCH (16ELC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
PA-16ELCJ (16ELC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
PA-4DATA (4DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
PA-4DATB (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
PA-4DTLA (4DTL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
PA-CC98 (ETHER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
PA-GT16 (MBB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Office Data Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
2. Basic Office Data Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Back-Up UCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
ACD In a Fusion Network Data Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
2.2.1 ACD Trunk In a Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
2.2.2 Multiple ACDPs In a FuSion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
3. ACD Service Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
A-31A Abandoned Call Search - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
A-34A Assistance - ACD Agent - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
A-35A Automatic Answer - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
A-37A Availability - ACD Position - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
A-80A Announcements - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
A-85A Agent Personal Queue - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
A-86A Auto Work Mode for PBX Calls - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
A-91A Analog ACD Position - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page ii
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
A-93A Alternate Night CCV - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
A-133A Agent Anywhere - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
B-20A Break Mode - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
B-21A Bad Call Notifications - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
C-35A Call Distribution to Agents - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
C-67A Call Transfer to Split Queue - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
C-68A Call Waiting Indication - LCD Display/CW Lamp - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
C-70A Calling Party Identification - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
C-108A Call Control Vector - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
C-110A Call Waiting Lamp with Chime - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
C-127A Call Forwarding - Split - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
C-191A Call Recover - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
C-199A Connection Displays - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
D-133A Do Not Disturb - Split - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Emergency/Recorder - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
F-10A Function Groups (Splits) - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
F-25A Flexible ID Codes - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
H-20A Holiday Scheduling - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
H-31A Hot Split - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Infolink Data Messages - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
L-19A Logon/Logoff Position - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
L-48A Language Default - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
L-92A Logoff Warning - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
M-28A Monitoring - ACD Supervisor - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
M-29A Multiple Customer Groups - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
M-79A Multiple Supervisor Groups (Splits) - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
M-88A MIS Operator Selection - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
M-89A Monitor Me - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
M-90A Multi-Split Agent - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
N-12A Night Service - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
N-14A Non-ACD Call - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
O-10A Overflow - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
O-19A Overflow Outside - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
P-21A Priority Queuing - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
P-40A Pilot Numbers - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
P-45A Personal Emergency and Assist - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Queuing - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
R-19A Release - ACD Position - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
R-145A Ring Delay - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
S-91A Splits - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
S-97A Split Display - ACD Position - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
S-98A Split Selection - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
S-108A Stranded Call Routing - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
T-24A Trunk Trouble Report - MIS - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
T-49A Tally Count - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
T-50A Time of Day/Week Routing - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
T-51A Tally-Oh Codes - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
T-85A Tally Required - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
NDA-24282
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page iii
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
VARIABLE QUEUEING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Work Mode - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Work Mode Time Limit - ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Zip Tone - ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
ACD Service Features Functional Test Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
NAP-215-101 ACD Incoming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
NAP-215-102 Call Distribution to Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
NAP-215-103 Priority Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
NAP-215-104 Automatic Call Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
NAP-215-105 Delay Announcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
NAP-215-106 Center Closed Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
NAP-215-107 Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
NAP-215-108 Emergency Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
NAP-215-109 After Call Work (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
NAP-215-110 After Call Work (Automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
NAP-215-111 Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
NAP-215-112 Auxiliary Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
NAP-215-113 Monitoring–ACD Supervisor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
NAP-215-114 Night Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
NAP-215-115 Abandoned Call Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
NAP-215-116 Trunk Trouble Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
PBX and ACD Command Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
2. Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
NEAX2400 IMX Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
ASYD Assignment of System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
ASYDL Assignment of System Data into Local DM (LDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
ASYDN Assignment of System Data in NDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Assignment of OAI Key Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Assignment of Station Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Assignment of Service Feature Restriction Class Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Assignment of Key Data for Dterm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
AMNO Assignment of Monitored Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
AMNOL Assignment of Monitored Number for LDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
AMNON Assignment of Monitored Number for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
ACNO Assignment of Conversion Number Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
ACNOL Assignment of Conversion Number Data for LDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
ACNON Assignment of Conversion Number Data for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Assignment of Announcement/Dictation Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
AADTN Assignment of Announcement/Dictation Trunks for NDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
ALGNN Assignment of Telephone Number Data for NDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
ALGSN Assignment of Telephone Station Data for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
ACD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
2.2.1 Command Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Setting Up the ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
ACDTN Assignment of ACD Tenant Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page iv
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
ACDSPL Assignment of ACD Split Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
ACDLOG Assignment of ACD Receiver ID Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
ACDPSN Assignment of ACD Position Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
ACDCCV Assignment of ACD CCV Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
ACDPLT Assignment of ACD Monitor Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
ACDTG Assignment of ACD Trunk Group Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
ACDANA Assignment of ACD Analog Split Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
ACDIVR Assignment of ACD IVR Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
ACDHS Assignment of ACD Holiday Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
ACDHC Assignment of ACD Holiday Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
ACDWS Assignment of ACD Week Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
ACDCOM ACD Communications Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
ACD Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
System Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
2. Operation of Dterm Agent Position/Supervisory Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Log On/Log Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Answer Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Work Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Break Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Tally Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Trunk Trouble Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Night Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
2.10 Emergency/Recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
2.11 Monitoring/Supervisory Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
3. ACD System Restart Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
2. Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Daily Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
3. System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
System Messages and Their Meanings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Message Detail Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
3.2.1 Message Detail Data of System Message “4-R” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
3.2.2 Message Detail Data of System Message “5-Q” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
3.2.3 Message Detail Data of System Message “6-H” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
3.2.4 Message Detail Data of System Message “26-V” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
4. Fault Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Fault Information and Fault Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Diagnostics from System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
NDA-24282
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page v
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
4.2.1 TCP/IP Link Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
4.2.2 Bad Call Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
5. Fault Recovery Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Before Starting Fault Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
ACD SYSTEM FAULT RECOVERY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
MIS Fault Recovery Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Field Values for ACD Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
ACD Service in Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page vi
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure
Title
Page
Outer View of Dterm Series III Agent Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Over View of Dterm Series E Agent Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Supervisory Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
ACD Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Concept of Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Peripheral Equipment Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Connection of ACD Agent Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Key Pads on ACD Agent Position Keyboard (Dterm Series III) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connection of ACD Supervisory Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Key Pads on Supervisory Position Keyboard (Dterm Series E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 3-10 Cable Connection between MIS and PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 3-12 Connection of Emergency Recorder (When Emergency Recorder Does Not Have
Starting Terminal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 3-13 Connection of Announcement Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 3-14 System Configuration (when IVR/Host is installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 3-15 Connection of Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 3-16 Connection of IVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 3-17 Hardware and Software Upgrading Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
RS Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Position in IMGdxh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ELC Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
ELC Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Figure 4-10 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 4-10 LT Connector Lead Accommodation of PIMU-A (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 4-10 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 4-11 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMK (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 4-11 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMK (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
NDA-24282
LIST OF FIGURES
Page vii
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure
Title
Page
Figure 4-11 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMK (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 4-11 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 4-12 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 4-13 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 4-14 Location of PA-4DATB (DAT) card within the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 4-15 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIMU-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Figure 4-16 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIME) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 4-17 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 4-17 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 4-18 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Figure 4-18 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fusion Network with Single ACDP (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fusion Network with Multiple ACDPs (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Network Configuration of ACD systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Assigning and Removing Tenant Data Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Assigning and Removing ACD Split Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Assigning and Removing ACD Agent Logon ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Assigning and Removing ACD Position Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Assigning and Removing Call Control Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Assigning and Removing ACD Trunk Group Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Assigning and Removing Holiday Schedule Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Figure 7-10 Assigning and Removing Week Schedule Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Flow of Maintenance Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Flow of Diagnostics from System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Flow of Fault Recovery Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
LIST OF FIGURES
Page viii
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIST OF TABLES
Table
Title
Page
Configuration of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Reference Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CallCenterWorX-Enterprise (I) ACD Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Interface Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Hardware and Software Upgrading Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
List of ACD Circuit Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
CCV for ACD Calls Transfer (in case of Traffic Congestion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
ACD SERVICE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Call Distribution Algorithm - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Call Distribution Algorithm - II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Valid Logon ID/Position Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
NEAX2400 IMX Command List in Alphabetical Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
ACD Command List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Related Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
COND (Conditional Thresholds) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Programming Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
CCV Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
System Messages and Lamp Indications on the TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
System Messages for MIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Repairing Procedure for TCP/IP Link Failure (Message “4-R”) (1/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Repairing Procedure for TCP/IP Link Failure (Message “4-R”) (2/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Repairing Procedure for TCP/IP Link Failure (Message “26-V”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Table B-1 Field Values for ACD Screens (1/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Table C-1 ACD Service List in Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
NDA-24282
LIST OF TABLES
Page ix
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is for your notes.
LIST OF TABLES
Page x
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 1
1. GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
This manual describes the system outline and procedures for installation/installation tests, operations, mainte-
nance and data assignment of Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) in the IMX System.
1.1 CONFIGURATION OF THIS MANUAL
Table 1-1 Configuration of this Manual
CHAPTER
TITLE
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION This chapter explains the concept, function and configuration of
the NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System.
2
INSTALLATION
This chapter explains the procedures of installation and or
installation tests of the NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise
ACD System.
3
CIRCUIT CARDS
This chapter explains the circuit cards and switch settings for
External ACD in the IMX System.
4
5
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
This chapter explains office data assignment applicable to the
NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES
FUNCTIONAL TEST
PROCEDURES
This chapter explains the test procedure of each ACD service
feature.
6
7
PBX AND ACD COMMAND This chapter explains the commands used in the NEAX2400
PROGRAMMING
CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System. Sample
programming sheets that may be copied and used to help
configure a system are included.
SYSTEM OPERATIONS
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
This chapter explains the operating methods of Agent/
Supervisory Position. And explains the restart processing of the
NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System.
8
9
This chapter explains the maintenance, diagnoses (according to
system messages), and fault repair of the NEAX2400
CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System.
APPENDIX A GLOSSARY
FIELD VALUES FOR ACD
APPENDIX B SCREENS
This appendix gives explanations of ACD-related terms.
This appendix gives descriptions of all data values entered into
MAT command screens when configuring and managing an
ACD system.
ACD SERVICE IN FUSION
NETWORK
This appendix gives descriptions of the ACD service activated
between two fusion nodes through Fusion link.
APPENDIX C
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 1
Page 1
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
1.2 RELATED REFERENCE MANUALS
For maintenance to be performed on the NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System, there are
operations pertaining to ACD functions and those pertaining to the NEAX2400 IMX itself. Because this manual
explains only the operations pertaining to ACD functions, related reference manuals explaining the procedures
of the NEAX2400 IMX must be used with this manual when performing maintenance on the NEAX2400
CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System as a whole.
Table 1-2 Related Reference Manuals
MANUAL NAME
Installation Manual
RELATION TO THIS MANUAL
When performing installation/installation tests, use the manuals named
located in this manual
Circuit Card Manual
System Operations and Maintenance
Manual
Maintenance operations can be performed by referring to the manual
“System Maintenance” in this manual.
Office Data Specification
Refer to the manual listed when programming office data other than for
some information for commands used with the ACD System.
1.3 PRECAUTION ON USING THE ACD FEATURES
CAUTION: The use of a monitoring, recording or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor or record telephone
conversations or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with its transmission, may be illegal
in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any
practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require some form
of notification to all parties to the telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other notification
methods or require the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording a
telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
CHAPTER 1
NDA-24282
Page 2
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 2
1. GENERAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter provides the user with a basic working knowledge of the NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise
(ACD) System. It also explains how to use documents furnished with the NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-
Enterprise (ACD) System.
The contents of this chapter and how to follow the information are as follows:
1.1 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
The System Specifications section describes the NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise (ACD) System
equipment configuration, functions and specifications, interface conditions for external equipment, and other
related subjects.
Persons having little or no basic working knowledge of the NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise (ACD)
System (equipment configuration, component functions, etc.) should read and thoroughly understand this
chapter before proceeding.
1.2 GLOSSARY OF TERMS
The terms used throughout the manual are listed and described in Section 3, “Glossary of Terms” of this chapter.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 2
Page 3
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
2. SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 GENERAL
This section describes the concept, functions and configuration of the ACD in the IMX System.
This chapter includes the following information:
•
•
•
•
Functional Outline: Describes the outline of the ACD.
System Configuration: Describes the configuration of the ACD.
MIS: Describes the MIS functions.
Interface between ACD and MIS: Describes the interface condition to be used with the ACD in the IMX
System and MIS.
•
Equipment related to ACD: Describes the related equipment used with the ACD in the IMX System.
NEAX2400 IMX
CallCenterWorX - Enterprise
ACD System
Announcement
Machine
Supervisory
position
Figure 2-1 Functional Outline of NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System
CHAPTER 2
Page 4
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
2.2 FUNCTIONAL OUTLINE
Presently, telephone reception services are provided to a wide variety of businesses including mail orders and
travel reservations. However, as the number of customers increase, these services are often subjected to com-
plaints such as telephone calls not answered for long periods of time, or the telephones being busy.
The agent positions receiving these calls also have problems which make their operators busy, such as calls be-
ing concentrated on specific positions.
To solve the problems of customers and telephone operators, the CallCenterWorX-Enterprise (ACD) system
provides a range of service features. The addition of the Management Information System (MIS) to the ACD
system saves excessive personnel expenses and communications costs based on calculations of the optimum
number of operators and trunks.
The NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise (ACD) System can connect large amount of incoming calls auto-
matically to the groups composed of ACD agent positions. These calls are processed in the order of their arrival,
and distributed evenly among the ACD agent positions.
When all agent positions handling incoming calls are busy or their splits have already finished the service, the
ACD can transmit various announcements to the calling customers.
The supervisor is able to supervise the agent positions. The supervisor can monitor the performance of each
agent and change the system administration style to optimize the personnel arrangement.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 2
Page 5
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
2.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The ACD system can be implemented in the internal Type configuration, with which the ACDP is built in the
CPU of the NEAX2400 IMX.
The configuration of the NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise (ACD) System is defined as follows.
Single CPU configuration (Figure 2-2)
External Type
Dual CPU configuration (Figure 2-3)
Built-in CPU
ACDP
Internal Type
MIS Interface Circuit
Provided with External LAN
cable connected from the PBX
Ether: TCP/IP
CHAPTER 2
Page 6
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
NEAX2400
IMX
Single Configuration
TSW
ELC
Dterm
CPU
MIS
ETHER (External LAN)
CPR
LPM
Externally installed equipment
CIRCUIT CARD
SYMBOL
FUNCTION
REMARKS
NAME
CPU
ELC
Central Processing Unit (ACDP)
Electronic Line Circuit
RAM: Built-in Data Memory
PA-16ELCJ
term
D
Digital Multifunction Telephone
Management Information System
Ethernet Controller
MIS
Ethernet + TCP/IP protocol
management
ETHER
Figure 2-2 Block Diagram of ACD System (Single CPU Configuration)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 2
Page 7
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
NEAX2400
Dual Configuration
IMX
TSW
ELC
Dterm
CPU
CPR
ETHER (External LAN)
MIS
LPM
Externally installed equipment
CIRCUIT CARD
SYMBOL
FUNCTION
REMARKS
NAME
CPU
ELC
Central Processing Unit (ACDP)
Electronic Line Circuit
RAM: Built-in Data Memory
PA-16ELCJ
term
D
Digital Multifunction Telephone
Management Information System
Ethernet Controller
MIS
Ethernet + TCP/IP protocol
management
ETHER
Figure 2-3 Block Diagram of ACD System (Dual CPU Configuration)
CHAPTER 2
NDA-24282
Page 8
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
2.3.1 SYSTEM CAPACITY
CallCenterWorX-Enterprise (ACD) system capacity can be upgraded by installing the ACD Option Service
Software (standard) for extending ACD capacity.
For the procedure to link with the Optional Service Software, refer to Chapter 4 “System Startup” in the
Installation Manual.
Table 2-1 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise (I) ACD Capacities
25-1,000 Seats
System Components
Version (I4.01.00.000)
Analog Agent Access Codes
4,000 *
58
Announcement Routes
Call Active (simultaneous calls)
6,000
1,200
3
Call Control Vectors (20 steps each)
Holiday Schedules per Tenant
IVR Ports
400
Logon IDs (9 digits maximum)
7,000
4,000 *
4,000 *
250
Personal Pilot Numbers
Pilot Numbers
Priority Level
Splits
900
Splits per Agent
16
Station Calls
500
TCP/IP Clients
8
Tenants
10
Transfer to PBX Numbers
1,200
255
Trunk Groups
* Note: Personal Pilots, Pilots, and Analog Access Codes cannot exceed 4,000.
Note: Due to the amount of memory allocated to the ACD database, use consecutive numbering when possible to
gain the maximum number of pilot numbers, ACD myline, ACD line, IVR parts, and analog access codes
available.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 2
Page 9
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
2.4 MIS
The Management Information System (MIS) expands the benefits of the telephone reception services of the
ACD system by providing efficient administration.
The number of handled ACD calls, system capacity and functions of the MIS vary depending on whether it is
based on a Navigator MIS. The MIS calculates the traffic related to the ACD calls and issues reports. The basic
purpose of MIS is to provide statistical data to be used in calculations of the number of agents required and the
amount of C.O. trunk traffic.
System administration can be optimized by the supervisor, by setting the average delay time response of the
trunk group or split between 20 and 40 seconds. If the delay time is less than 20 seconds, agents become idle,
thus the number of agents can be reduced. When delay time is more than 40 seconds, the number of agents
should be increased. (Note the number of agents is dependent on the customers.)
From the MIS, the supervisor can change the office data related to the ACD, including the C.O. call destination,
overflow condition and the number of agents.
[Precautions for Use of Navigator MIS]
When using the Navigator MIS, please note the following points:
•
If the customer uses the Navigator MIS on a 24-hour basis, be sure to install the Navigator MIS in an
air-conditioned room to ensure normal operation and preventing the hard disk from overheating.
•
Be sure to perform shutdown procedure before powering off the MIS personal computer. If the power
is turned off without running the procedure, statistical data on the hard disk will be corrupted or
destroyed.
2.5 INTERFACE BETWEEN ACD AND MIS
Table 2-2 shows the interface condition between the ACD in the IMX System and MIS.
Table 2-2 Interface Condition
CIRCUIT CARD
INTERFACE CONDITION
Physical Interface
ETHER
TCP/IP
10 Mbps
ETHER
Communication protocol
Data Transmission Speed
2.6 EQUIPMENT RELATED TO ACD SYSTEM
2.6.1 AGENT POSITION
1. Function
This type of agent position is comprised of a telephone, jack set and a headset. It is equipped with the ACD
functions as well as the multifunction telephone functions including the single-key speed dialing. It
operates off the 16ELCJ card.
CHAPTER 2
NDA-24282
Page 10
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
2. Specifications
term
term
105 (H) mm × 205 (W) mm × 225 (D) mm
98.1 (H) mm × 177.0 (W) mm × 223.7 (D) mm
D
D
Series III
Series E
Dimensions
Cable Conductors
2-conductor (1 Pair)
Distance from PBX Less than 850m (2787 ft.)
3. Outer View
term
Figure 2-4 shows the outer view of D
Series III Agent Position.
term
D
Series III
term
Figure 2-4 Outer View of D
Series III Agent Position
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 2
Page 11
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Figure 2-5 shows the outer view of D
term
term
Series E Agent Position.
D
Series E
term
Figure 2-5 Over View of D
Series E Agent Position
CHAPTER 2
Page 12
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
2.6.2 SUPERVISORY POSITION
1. Function
The supervisory position is equipped with the agent position functions and the display terminal. It is used
as the supervisor of splits to manage the ACD operations by overriding calls to agent positions, call moni-
toring, agent position status display, etc.
The supervisor position consists of an ACD agent position and a display with keyboard (MIS terminal).
Some supervisor positions are not equipped with the MIS terminal.
ACD Supervisory Position (Dterm
)
Personal Computer/Data
Terminal Equipment
Note
Note: Distance between ACD Agent position and MIS terminal: Max.15m (49 feet)
Figure 2-6 Supervisory Positions
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 2
Page 13
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
3. GLOSSARY OF TERMS
This section defines ACD-related terms.
NEAX2400 IMX ACD System
ACD Agent
Position
ELC
COT
ACD Agent
Position
Queue
ELC
ELC
Trunk Group
COT
COT
Split
Group
Supervisory
Position
ACD Agent
Position
ELC
COT
COT
Queue
Trunk Group
ACD Agent
Position
ELC
ELC
Group
Supervisory
Position
Split
System
Supervisory
Position
ELC
ACDP
ETHER
CPR
MIS
Printer
Figure 2-7 NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System Configuration
CHAPTER 2
Page 14
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
•
•
Trunk Group
A group, organized according to routes, of trunks which transmits calls incoming to or originated from the
ACD System.
ACD Group (Tenant)
An ACD system can be divided into groups according to the user firms or departments. The ACD group is
Note: The following data must be assigned on an ACD tenant basis:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Trunk Group
ACD Monitored Number (Pilot Number)
Split
Announcement Equipment
Transferring Destination (STN)
Transferring Destination (TRK)
Split
1
Split
n
Supervisory position
ACD
Group
(Tenant)
ACD
Group
(Tenant)
C.O.
Line
NEAX2400 IMX
Figure 2-8 ACD Group Configuration
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 2
Page 15
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
•
•
Split
The unit of division of an ACD group according to functions. Each split is composed of a queue to hold
incoming calls temporarily, agent positions to answer the incoming calls, and a group supervisory position.
Queue
The queue is the area in which calls incoming to the ACD in the IMX System wait for handling. Each split
has multiple queues.
When all of the agent positions of a queue are busy, the calls assigned to that queue will wait. As agent
positions become idle, the calls are distributed to the agent positions according to first-in, first-out condition.
However, since queues are assigned different priority levels, the calls in higher-priority queues are
distributed before the calls in lower-priority queues.
•
Overflow
An ACD call waiting in a queue of a split that cannot be connected to an agent position assigned to the queue
(overflow origination) once a predetermined period of time had elapsed, the call is sent to the queue of
another split (overflow destination) where it can wait for an agent position to become idle in both queues.
This allows the ACD call to be answered by the first available agent.
•
•
•
Overflow Threshold
The period of time between the origination of an ACD call and its overflow.
Inflow Threshold
Specific value defined by number of waiting calls in the overflow destination.
ACD Agent Position
All agent positions belong to any ACD group and an ACD call is originated/picked up from the agent
position. Also, when Client/Server MIS system is used, ACD agent positions may have the client MIS.
•
•
•
•
Group Supervisory Position
The position assigned the agent position supervisory functions, such as monitoring of agent positions and
assistance of agent positions, as well as the functions of an agent position. It may be equipped with the MIS
Terminal (DTE) which can display the status of the ACD subsystem.
Agent
The operator using an agent position to handle calls via the ACD system. Every agent can be assigned an
ID code to logon to the CallCenterWorX-Enterprise (ACD) system. For the purpose of effective use, the
agent can use to connect the client MIS.
Group Supervisor
This is the manager who uses a supervisory position to assist agent positions, monitor them, supervise their
status using the MIS terminal, and change the system configuration of an ACD group. Every supervisor can
be assigned an ID code.
MIS Terminal (DTE)
This is the MIS Data Terminal Equipment used to display the ACD status and/or change the system config-
uration.
CHAPTER 2
Page 16
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00 18:00
24:00
0:00
Supervisory
Position
Day Mode
Night Mode
Night Mode
“Night” key pressed
“Night” key pressed
Agent
Position 1
Unavailable
Available
Unavailable
“Log ON/OFF” key pressed
Unavailable
Break
Break
“Break”
key pressed
“Break”
key pressed
“Log ON/OFF” key pressed
Unavailable
Agent
Position 2
Available
Break
Break
“Log ON/OFF” key pressed
“Break”
key pressed
“Break”
key pressed
“Log ON/OFF” key pressed
Available
(Ready Mode)
Figure 2-9 Concept of Operation Mode
•
Day/Night Mode
The day and night mode determine the destination of incoming ACD calls on a per-split basis. Set the day
mode when starting the ACD call reception service, and set the night mode to end the ACD call reception
service in the evening or before the agent leaves position.
•
•
Ready Mode
This is the status of an ACD position (including group or system supervisory position) after starting the
reception service. In this state, the position can answerACD calls.
Work Mode
This is the state of an ACD position (including supervisory position) in which it restricts the termination of
incoming ACD calls. The agent may then perform nonverbal tasks, such as the creation of a business slip.
The Work mode can be set either automatically at the end of conversation with an incoming call (Automatic
After Call Work mode) or manually by pressing the“Work” key as needed.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 2
Page 17
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
•
•
•
Break Mode
This is the state of an ACD position (including supervisory position), which is activated by the agent
pressing the “BREAK” key to disallow the termination of incoming ACD calls before the agent temporarily
leaves the position.
ACD Trunk in a Fusion Network
ACD trunks can be accommodated in the multiple nodes within the Fusion network and via the trunk in the
remote node, ACD calls can be originated or picked up from the agent accommodated in the node that pro-
vides ACDP.
Agent Anywhere
With this function, ACD agent positions can be installed in multiple nodes of a Fusion Network, and ACD
calls can be distributed to ACD agents in the remote node. Those agent positions are controlled by one
ACDP in a Fusion Network.
•
•
Expanding ACD capacity
With the ACD Option Service Software, the built-in ACDP capacity will be extended and more than 1000
agent positions can be installed.
Split formed by multiple supervisors. It is beneficial when more than one supervisor serves a split of agents.
CHAPTER 2
Page 18
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 3
1. GENERAL
INSTALLATION
This chapter describes the installation and test procedures for the NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD
System.
The installation of the ACD in the IMX system is completed by the installing the MIS, MIS interface, and ter-
minal equipment such as agent positions and supervisory positions.
Because the installation procedures required for the NEAX2400 IMX are the same as for the business system,
this manual describes only the terminal equipment related to the MIS and ACD positions. For information on
installation procedures related to the NEAX2400 IMX, refer to the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual.
2. PRECAUTIONS
2.1 ESSENTIAL/CRITICAL INFORMATION
To prevent accidents or equipment damage from occurring while installation is being performed, each
NEAX2400 IMX manual provides “WARNING”, “CAUTION”, and “Note” indications to draw the techni-
cian’s attention to specific matters.
1. Meaning
WARNING: Personal injury may result if the warning is not heeded.
CAUTION: Damage to the equipment and/or the system may result if the caution is not heeded.
Note: Indicates an item which requires special attention.
2. Locations of Indicators
WARNING and CAUTION indications are located at the top of the page. Descriptions are included as part
of the procedures on the page.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
Figure 3-1 Static Caution Indication
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 3
Page 19
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
This manual provides Static Caution indicators (see Figure 3-1) on page where work involving static-sensitive
components is described.
The 3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit, shown in Figure 3-2 is recommended as an effective counter-
measure against static electricity. The kit is available from NEC.
Wrist Strap
Place the Circuit Card
on a Conductive
sheet.
Connect ground wire to the Earth
terminal of the Module Group
Figure 3-2 3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit
CHAPTER 3
Page 20
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
3.1 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
This section explains the procedures to install peripheral equipment for the ACD in the IMX system (Agent po-
sitions, MIS terminals, etc.).
NEAX2400 IMX
MDF
ACD Agent Position
ACD Supervisory Position
MIS
Emergency Recorder
Announcement Machine
IVR/Host
Figure 3-3 Peripheral Equipment Installation Procedures
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 3
Page 21
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
NAP-200-101
Sheet 1/3
Installation of ACD Agent Position
Figure 3-4 shows the cable connection between the Agent Position and the NEAX2400 IMX.
MDF
Dterm No.0
(Dterm Series III/Series E)
PIM
Installation Cable
No.1
PA-16ELCJ
LT
No.15
Max. 850m (0.5φ)
MDF
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
A0
A1
No.0
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
A2
A3
A4
A5
Note 1
A0
B0
6
7
8
B5
B6
B7
A6
A7
A8
No.6
No.7
No.8
Note 1: Connector leads (A0 and B0)
may be connected with Modu-
lar Rosette.
9
B8
B9
1
2
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A9
No.9
3
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
No.10
No.11
No.12
No.13
No.14
No.15
Modular Rosette
Modular Jack
Agent Position
1
3
2
4
16ELC Camp
Connector Leads (example)
Note 2: For more details of connector lead accommodation, see “Circuit Card Manual”.
Figure 3-4 Connection of ACD Agent Position
CHAPTER 3
Page 22
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
NAP-200-101
Sheet 2/3
Installation of ACD Agent Position
•
Attach the provided key pad/labels to identify the names of the keys. For the function key data assignments,
term
(1) D
Series III
CW AUTO/MAN ASSIST
EMER TRKTRBL RECALL
ACD CALL
LINE
FNC HAND/HEAD
MIC
SPKR
RLS
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
BREAK
LOGON
TALLY
WORK
0
#
*
HOLD
XFR
CONF
term
Figure 3-5 Key Pads on ACD Agent Position Keyboard (D
Series III)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 3
Page 23
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
NAP-200-101
Sheet 3/3
Installation of ACD Agent Position
term
(2) D
Series E
CW AUTO/MAN ASSIST EMER
TRKTRBL RECALL ACDCALL LINE
FUNC HAND/HEAD MIC
SPKR
2
5
8
0
1
4
7
3
6
9
#
RLS
BREAK
LOGON
TALLY
WORK
HOLD
XFR
CONF
FLEX KEY
term
Figure 3-6 Key Pads on ACD Agent Position Keyboard (D
Series E)
CHAPTER 3
Page 24
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
NAP-200-102
Sheet 1/3
Installation of ACD Supervisory Position
Figure 3-7 shows the cable connection between the Supervisory Position and the NEAX2400 IMX.
MDF
PIM
D
term No. 0
(Dterm Series III/Series E)
Installation Cable
No.1
No.15
PA-16ELCJ
LT
Max. 850m (0.5 f )
MDF
26
B0
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
No.0
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
No.7
No.8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
B1
B2
B3
Note 1
B4
B5
A0
B0
B6
B7
Note 1: Connector leads (A0,
B0) may be connected
B8
B9
1
2
4
10 A9
11 A10
A11
13 A12
A13
15 A14
with Modular Rosette.
No.9
3
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
No.10
No.11
No.12
No.13
No.14
No.15
12
Modular Rosette
Modular Jack
14
A15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Supervisory Position
1
3
2
4
16ELC Camp
Connector Leads (example)
Note 2: For more details of connector lead accommodation, see “Circuit Card Manual”.
Figure 3-7 Connection of ACD Supervisory Position
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 3
Page 25
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
NAP-200-102
Sheet 2/3
Installation of ACD Supervisory Position
•
Attach the provided key pad/labels to identify the names of the keys. For the function key data assignments,
term
(1) D
Series III
CW AUTO/MAN MON/BARGE
TRKTRBL RECALL
NIGHT
ACD CALL
LINE
FNC HAND/HEAD
MIC
SPKR
RLS
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
BREAK
6
LOGON
9
TALLY
0
#
*
HOLD
XFR
CONF
WORK
term
Figure 3-8 Key Pads on Supervisory Position Keyboard (D
NDA-24282
Series III)
CHAPTER 3
Page 26
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
NAP-200-102
Sheet 3/3
Installation of ACD Supervisory Position
term
(2) D
Series E
CW
AUTO/MAN MON/BARGE NIGHT
ACDCALL LINE
TRKTRBL RECALL
FNC HAND/HEAD MIC
SPKR
2
5
8
0
1
4
7
3
6
9
#
LOGON
RLS
CONF
TA LLY
HOLD
XFR
BREAK WORK
FLEX KEY
term
Figure 3-9 Key Pads on Supervisory Position Keyboard (D
Series E)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 3
Page 27
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
NAP-200-103
Sheet 1/1
Installation of MIS
Figure 3-10 shows the cable connection between the MIS and the NEAX2400 IMX.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00 01 02 03 04
LANI (PZ-PC19)
LPM
BASEU
10BASE-T (Straight)
MIS
HUB
Note: When the client MIS and IVR/Host are installed in a system together, LAN network for these terminals
should be separated by the router.
Figure 3-10 Cable Connection between MIS and PBX
CHAPTER 3
Page 28
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
NAP-200-104
Sheet 1/1
Installation of Emergency Recorder
AC
MDF
16COT
R0
T0
A
B
Emergency
Recorder
No.0 circuit
Speech Wires
Starting Wire
No.1 circuit
M
G
(T1)
-48V
-48V RPT0
FUSE
G
Power Receiving Terminal
Figure 3-11 Connection of Emergency Recorder
(When Emergency Recorder Has Starting Terminal)
AC
Receptacle
Speech Wires
Power Relay
Emergency
Recorder
MDF
A
16COT
R0
T0
No.0 circuit
AC
B
Note
M
(T1)
No.1 circuit
G
Starting Wire
-48V
RPT0
G
Power Receiving
Terminal
Note: If a power relay is used, select an optimum relay by
confirming the amplifiers current drain.
Figure 3-12 Connection of Emergency Recorder
(When Emergency Recorder Does Not Have Starting Terminal)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 3
Page 29
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
NAP-200-105
Sheet 1/1
Installation of Announcement Machine
The standard announcement machine available is PA-4DATA or PA-4DATB (4DAT: 4 Digital Announcement
Trunk) card. The 4DAT can be used by simply inserting it in the universal slot of PIM.
If a non-standard announcement machine is used, the connection method and the announcement trunk to be used
as interface vary depending on the machine.
MDF
16 COT
R0
T0
OA
OB
Announcement
Machine
No.0 circuit
No.1 circuit
R1
G
OC
(RT)
–48
G
M
(T1)
–48V
RPT0
G
Fuse
Power Receiving
Terminal
Figure 3-13 Connection of Announcement Machine
CHAPTER 3
Page 30
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
NAP-200-106
Sheet 1/1
Installation of IVR/Host
Figure 3-14 shows the system configuration when IVR/Host is installed.
For more details of IVR cable connection, refer to Figure 3-15 and for the Host connection, refer to Figure 3-16.
E
L
C
Dterm
(ACD Positions)
L
C
HUB
L
A
N
L
A
N
PBX
IVR/Host
Router Note
MIS
Note: When the client MIS and IVR/Host are installed in a system together, LAN network directly connected
with these terminals should be separated by the router.
Figure 3-14 System Configuration (when IVR/Host is installed)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 3
Page 31
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
Figure 3-15 shows the cable connection between Host and the PBX.
HUB PKG
PIM
10BASE-T
(Straight)
LANI
LANI
LPM
10BASE-T
(Straight)
BASEU
10BASE-T (Straight)
Note: When the client MIS and IVR/Host are installed in a system together, LAN network directly connected
with these terminals should be separated by the router.
Figure 3-15 Connection of Host
CHAPTER 3
Page 32
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
Figure 3-16 shows the cable connection between IVR and the PBX.
PIM
MDF
Installation cable
Rosette
L2
IVR
16LC
L2
L1
A0
Note
B0
A1
B1
L1
A15
B15
Note: Connector leads (A0, B0) may be connected differently.
Figure 3-16 Connection of IVR
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 3
Page 33
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
4. SYSTEM START-UP PROCEDURE FOR ADDING ACD FEATURES
4.1 ACD SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
This section explains the installation procedure for adding the Built-in ACDP software to the PBX in on-line
operation. For more detailed information about start-up procedures before the ACD application software install,
see the “Installation Manual”.
[Operation Procedure]
a. Basic Operating Procedure
STEP 1 : By using MEM_HDD command, save all data to both HDDs.
STEP 2 : Insert the Built-in ACDP software FD into the HDD of the PBX.
Note 1: When ACD service is used in a Fusion Network and when “ACD Trunk in a FCCS Network” is used:
Install the software into the node that accommodates the ACDP.
When “AGENT ANYWHERE” is used:
Install the software into one node only. In this case, the node with the most ACD agent positions is recom-
mended to prevent network traffic congestion. The node that uses the ACDP is most recommended accord-
STEP 3 : Install the Configuration Software to all nodes. Note 2
Note 2: This software is used to define the CallCenterWorX-Enterprise (ACD) system capacity (50, 200, 500, 900,
or 2000 Agent Positions).
STEP 4 : Initialize the system (perform IPL, DM loading).
PROGRAM=“LOAD”
SYSTEM DATA=“LOAD”
CHAPTER 3
Page 34
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
b. When Installing ACD Trunk into Multiple Fusion Nodes (Software installation when the ACD trunk is in-
stalled at Fusion Nodes.)
(1) At the node that uses the ACDP, the ACD software (Built-in ACDP software) and ACD Option Soft-
ware installation is necessary.
(2) At the node that accommodates the ACD trunk, only ACD Option Software installation is necessary.
Do not install the ACD software.
(3) Initialize the node that uses the ACDP after the software installation.
c. When Installing ACD Agent Position into Multiple Fusion Nodes (For PBX Software Series 7300 or later)
(1) At the node that uses the ACDP, the ACD software (Built-in ACDP software) and the basic ACD
Option Software, installation is necessary.
(2) At the node that accommodates the ACD trunk, ACD agent position, the basic ACD Option Service
Software must be installed.
(3) Initialize the node that uses the ACDP after the software installation.
d. When Installing ACDP into Multiple Fusion Nodes (For PBX Software Series 7400 or later)
(1) At the node that uses the ACDP, the ACD software (Built-in ACDP software) and ACD Option Soft-
ware installation is necessary.
(2) At the node that accommodates the ACD trunk, only ACD Option Software installation is necessary.
Do not install the ACD software.
(3) Initialize the node that uses the ACDP after the initialization of the other nodes (non-ACDP nodes).
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 3
Page 35
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
4.2 BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT FOR START-UP
STEP 1 : Change the system data written in DM.
ASYD SYS1
INDEX2 -
b0=1 (ACDP mounted)
INDEX31 - b0~b3: CM mounting capacity
Assign Normally “06”. Note 1
INDEX79 - b6=0 (ACD service is effective) Note 1
INDEX207 - b0=1 (ACDP in system0 is used)
b1: ACDP in system1
0/1=Not used/Used
INDEX241 - b2=1 (call event process) Note 1
Note 1: When the ACD service is activated via FCCS, this data must be set to all nodes providing ACD service (Not
just the node accommodating the ACDP).
STEP 2 : Assign the system data written in LDM as shown below.
ASYDL SYS1
INDEX512:
INDEX513:
FPC of the self-node
01 Hex (LDM usage)
INDEX515~518 b0~b7: IP address (Hex) for PBX over external LAN
Note 2
INDEX519~522 b0~b7: Subnet Mask (Hex) for PBX over external LAN Note 2
INDEX523~526 b0~b7: Default Gateway Address for External LAN
(This data is required when the Host is connected via gateway)
Note 2
INDEX864 -
INDEX864
b0=1 (Built-in ACDP is provided)
b1: Output the system message (4-R) when TCP-IP is normally disconnected.
0/1 = Effective/Ineffective
Note 3
b2: 0/1 = “Agent Anywhere” Out of Service/In Service
b3: 0/1 = Multiple ACDPs Not Available/Available
FPC of Node Providing IP.
INDEX865:
INDEX866:
FPC of Node Providing ACDP.
Note 2: If the MAT or SMDR has been connected with external LAN already, this data assignment is not necessary.
STEP 3 : Assign the System data written in NDM.
This data is necessary when using “AGENT ANYWHERE” (Available since the PBX software
Series 7300.)
ASYDN SYS1
INDEX514-
INDEX533-
NDM usage
FPC of the node that provides VNDM
STEP 4 : Check the station-to-station connection and confirm no fault status occurs or system messages
are output (such as cable connection fault, LCD display fault, memory alarm fault, abnormal
interrupt, etc.).
STEP 5 : Program the ACD office data. Also, program the Fusion data to make ACD service effective
STEP 6 : Save the DM, ACD data memory into the HDD by using MEM_HDD.
CHAPTER 3
NDA-24282
Page 36
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
5. UPGRADING ACD SYSTEM FROM NEAX2400 ICS TO NEAX2400 IMX
Figure 3-17 and Table 3-1 show the requirements when upgrading the CallCenterWorX-Enerprise (ACD) sys-
tem from NEAX2400 ICS to 2400 IMX.
5.1 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
Client MIS
PBX
[8]
[1]
[2]
Server MIS
CPU
ACDP
Router [9]
[5]
[6]
LAN
[7]
MAT
MIS DB
[4]
[3]
DM
ACD DM
IVR/Host
[10]
Note 1: [5], [6], [7], [8] are not necessary for the ACD without MIS.
Note 2: [10] is not necessary for the ACD without IVR/Host.
Figure 3-17 Hardware and Software Upgrading Requirements
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 3
Page 37
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
Table 3-1 Hardware and Software Upgrading Requirements
Upgrading Hardware or
Software
NEAX2400 ICS
(before upgrading)
NEAX2400 IMX
(after upgrading)
No.
Generic Software
All types of system
PBX software Release 3 or later
•
•
•
Basic software
Standard Service software
Optional software
•
•
Basic software (#1~#11)
Internal MAT software
(#1~#2)
[1]
•
TCP/IP software
ACD software
SC-2242 PRG-E or
SC-2243 PRG-F
Built-in ACDP software
Windows
[2]
[3]
MAT
IBMPC/AT
Hardware and Software
ACD Data Memory
PBX software Release 2 or
Release 3
Built-in type
Necessary to be reprogrammed
via [3]
[4]
[5], [6]
[7]
Server Hardware and
Navigator MIS (IBMPC/AT) Navigator MIS (IBMPC/AT)
For NEAX2400 IMX system
MIS
Software
Data base
(Config., static data,
etc.)
Navigator MIS (IBMPC/AT) Navigator MIS (IBMPC/AT)
Client MIS terminal Software Navigator MIS (IBMPC/AT) (a) Remote MIS terminal
MIS terminal for Navigator
MIS (IBMPC/AT)
(b) Client MIS terminal
Navigator MIS client for
NEAX2400 IMX system
[8]
[9]
Router
–
Router
IVR/Host Hardware and Soft-
ware
[10]
Note: Necessary when IVR/
Host is added only.
CHAPTER 3
Page 38
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
5.2 UPGRADING PROCEDURE
STEP 1 : Print out the existent data in the MIS terminal or save the data as the text file.
STEP 2 : List up the office data related to the current ACDP.
Note 4
Note 4
STEP 3 : Shutdown MIS operation following the appropriate procedure.
STEP 4 : Make busy the CPU (ACDP) card (CP53/CP54) and disconnect all cables connected to cards
related to ACD.
STEP 5 : Upgrade the PBX hardware following the Upgrade Manual for the PBX.
STEP 6 : Install the software below to upgrade the PBX software. Refer to Chapter 3, Section 4.1, “ACD
•
•
•
An assortment of software for NEAX2400 IMX
Built-in ACDP software
Note 1
Note 2
System Configuration Software containing ACD Options
STEP 7 : Program the following ACD commands data again.
ACDTN/ACDSPL/ACDLOG/ACDPSN/ACDCCV/ACDPLT/ACDTG/ACDANA/ACDIVR/
ACDHS/ACDHC/ACDWS
STEP 8 : Start up the Navigator MIS for IBMPC/AT.
Note 3
•
•
Standard MIS hardware and software
MIS terminal hardware and software
STEP 9 : Start up the IVR/Host.
Note 4
•
•
IVR/Host hardware and software
Related Equipment for LAN
STEP 10 : Perform the installation test.
Note 1: When ACD service is used in a Fusion Network, and when “ACD Trunk in aFusion Network” is used:
Install the software into the node that accommodates the ACDP.
When “AGENT ANYWHERE” is used:
Install the software into one node only. In this case, the node with the most ACD agent positions is
recommended to prevent network traffic congestion. The node that uses the ACDP is most recommended
Note 2: When ACD features are activated in Fusion network, this software is installed in all nodes.
Note 3: This procedure is not necessary for the ACD without MIS.
Note 4: Details for start-up procedure are decided by the IVR/Host feature specifications.
This procedure is not necessary when IVR/Host is not used.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 3
Page 39
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is for your notes.
CHAPTER 3
Page 40
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 4
1. GENERAL
SWITCH SETTING OF ACD CIRCUIT CARDS
This chapter explains the circuit cards related to the NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise (ACD) System
Table 4-1 List of ACD Circuit Cards
MOUNTING
SYMBOL
CIRCUIT CARD
REMARKS
MODULE
CPU
EAPI
ALMC
APINT
COPY
CPU
PA-CP53
PH-PC22/PH-PC27
PA-AL16
PIMU
LPRJ-A
APM
For circuit card type
For module type
PH-PC21
LPRJ-A
APM
PA-PC56-A
PA-CP54
APM
CRAM
IOC
PA-ME34
APM
PA-IO02-A
PH-BS16
APM
PBI
APM
SPGT
ELC
PA-GT17
MISCME
PIMU
PIMU
PIMU
PIMU
PIMU
PIMU
APM/PIMU
APM
For MISCME type
Common
PA-16ELCDD
PA-16ELCH
PA-16ELCJ
PA-4DATA
PA-4DATB
PA-4DTLA
PA-CC98
16ELC
16ELC
4DAT
DAT
Common
Common
Common
Common
4DTL
ETHER
MBB
Common
Module/Package
Module
PA-GT16
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 41
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH SETTING OF ACD CIRCUIT CARDS
2. EXPLANATION OF ACD CIRCUIT CARDS
This section explains each of the ACD circuit cards regarding the following items.
1. Function
Explanations are given about the functional outline and the purpose of each circuit card.
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting location of each circuit card is illustrated with the mounting module name, slot number, etc.
Any conditions pertaining to mounting are also denoted.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a face
layout.
4. Lamp Indications
Lamps equipped on each circuit card, their names, colors, and indication states are tabulated.
5. Switch Setting
Switches equipped on each circuit card, their names, switch numbers, setting and its meaning, standard set-
ting, etc. are tabulated.
6. External Interface
If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by anLT connector, the relation between the mounting
slots and the LT connector is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. Also, if the lead outputs are
provided by other than an LT connector or the lead outputs are provided by the circuit card front connector,
the connector lead accommodations and the connecting routes are illustrated.
A SWITCH SETTING SHEET showing module name, slot number, switch name, switch shape, etc. is provided
at the end of the explanation of each circuit card.
CHAPTER 4
Page 42
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CP53 (CPU)
PA-CP53 (CPU)
1. Function
This circuit card is the CPU card (Central Processing Unit) which controls the ACD Circuit Card Type Sys-
tem. Using V60 microprocessor (32 bits), this CPU card provides programs and data memory. The card is
equipped with EPROM of 2MB and SRAM of 1MB, respectively.
ACDP
GATE
I/O LOCAL BUS
RS-232C (Non-protocol)
EAPI
ACD-MIS
SYSTEM
CPU
LPRJ-A
ACD in IMX system (Circuit Card Type)
Position within the system
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 43
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CP53 (CPU)
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
(a) When this circuit card is mounted in PIMA
Mounting Module
PIMU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note: ● indicates the mounting locations of this circuit card.
(b) When this circuit card is mounted in PIMB
Mounting Module
PIMB
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note: ● indicates the mounting locations of this circuit card.
CHAPTER 4
Page 44
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CP53 (CPU)
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
SW1
SW0
SW2
CPU OPE
MBR
CLKA
COPA
LANA
DMWE
RESET
SENSE
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
STATE
CPU OPE
Green
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
Lights when a microprocessor operating clock failure has occurred in this circuit
card.
CLKA
COPA
Red
Red
Lights when a C-level infinite loop has occurred.
Lights when a major failure has occurred in PA-CC98 card or when this circuit
card is not connected with PA-CC98 card. Note
LANA
DMWE
Yellow
Green
Remains lit when the data memory in this circuit card is in write enable state.
Note: When this circuit is used only as ACDP, PA-CC98 card is not used and thus this card is operating normally
even if this lamp is lighting.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 45
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CP53 (CPU)
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH
NO.
STANDARD
SETTING
SETTING
MEANING
UP
DOWN
PUSH
5
Circuit card make busy request.
Circuit card make busy request cancel
Starting of reset of this circuit card
On line (Normal Operation)
MBR
RESET
×
SENSE
Clearing the data memory area at the time of
initialization
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
IMX
SW0
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
SW1
ON
7
8
OFF
OFF
ICS
×
Fixed
CHAPTER 4
Page 46
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CP53 (CPU)
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH
NO.
STANDARD
SETTING
SETTING
MEANING
ON
OFF
ON
×
Internal NMI possible
Internal NMI inhibited
1
2
3
4
×
Data Memory Write Protect cancel
Data Memory Write Protect controllable
Data Memory Write inhibited
Data Memory Write controllable
When connecting PA-CC98 card
When not connectingPA-CC98 card
Fixed
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
×
SW2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
5
6
7
8
×
×
×
×
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 47
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CP53 (CPU)
SWITCH SETTING SHEET
SWITCH
NAME
MODULE
PIM
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
any
universal
slot
MBR
UP:
Circuit card make
busy request
DOWN: Circuit card make
busy request cancel
ON
RESET
SENSE
SW0
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW1
7 = ON for IMX
7 = OFF for ICS
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW2
4 ON When connecting
PA-CC98
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHAPTER 4
Page 48
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-PC22 (EAPI)
PH-PC22 (EAPI)
1. Function
This circuit card is an I/O system functions integrated card to be used in the ACD Circuit Card Type System.
This card supports the following functions.
(a) APINT Function: For processor communications between the CPU of the System and ACDP card,
this circuit card provides FIFO for mutual I/O bus connections.
(b) IOC Function: For ACD-MIS connection, this circuit card provides a serial interface which conforms
with RS-232C (two I/O ports).
TSW, INT
Extended 8-bit I/O Bus
RS-232C
8-bit I/O Bus
GATE
GATE
MISC
EAPI
MISC
8-bit I/O Bus
32-bit MEM Bus
ECPY
ACDP
CPU
CPU
MEM
MEM
Position within the system
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module
CMA
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note
Note: This circuit card is mounted in any one of Slot No. 02~04.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 49
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-PC22 (EAPI)
Mounting Module
LPRJ-A
00 01 02 03 04
CPRAC-0
CPRAC-1
Note
Note: This circuit card is mounted in any one of Slot No. 00~02
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
IOC OPE
CLKALM
OPE/MB
MB
MBR
SW11
SW0
SW01
CHAPTER 4
Page 50
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-PC22 (EAPI)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
STATE
OPE/MB
IOCOPE
CLKALM
Green
Red
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
Remains lit while the non-protocol/RS-232C Port Controller is operating normally.
Lights when a clock failure has occurred.
Red
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
UP
Circuit card make busy request
Circuit card make busy cancel
MB
DOWN
Requests the software to place the ACD-MIS
Interface Port Controller into make-busy state.
UP
MBR
Cancels the request to place the ACD-MIS
Interface Port Controller into make-busy state.
(Circuit card operating state)
DOWN
1
2
3
4
5
6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
×
×
×
×
×
×
Fixed
SW0
7
8
OFF
ON
×
×
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 51
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-PC22 (EAPI)
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
SW01-1
SW11-1
SW01-2
SW11-2
SW01-3
SW11-3
NON-PROTOCOL RS-232C
PORT DATA SPEED SETTING
1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
300 bps
600 bps
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
1200 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
2
3
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Sets the non-protocol RS-232C port stop bit
length to 1 bit.
ON
OFF
ON
×
×
4
5
Sets the non-protocol RS-232C port stop bit
length to 2 bit.
SW01
(for Port 0)
SW11
(for Port 1)
(When using
ACD-MIS
Interface Port)
Sets the non-protocol RS-232C port data length
to 7 bit.
Sets the non-protocol RS-232C port data length
to 8 bit.
OFF
SW01-6
SW11-6
SW01-7
SW11-7
NON-PROTOCOL RS-232C PORT
PARITY BIT SETTING
6
7
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ODD Parity Check
EVEN Parity Check (standard setting)
No Parity Check is to be made
OFF
Sets the polarity of non-protocol RS-232C PB
signal to Not Provided.
ON
8
Sets the polarity of non-protocol RS-232C PB
signal to +, or sets PB signal to Provided.
OFF
×
CHAPTER 4
Page 52
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-PC22 (EAPI)
SWITCH SETTING SHEET
SWITCH
NAME
MODULE
LCMA
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
02
03
04
MB
UP: Circuit card make busy
DOWN
DOWN
MBR
SW0
DOWN: Circuit card make idle
LPRJ-A
00
01
02
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW01
SW11
9600 bps Port 0, 1 Stop 7 Even
9600 bps Port 1, 1 Stop 7 Even
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 53
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-PC27 (EAPI)
PH-PC27 (EAPI)
1. Function
This circuit card is an I/O system functions integrated card to be used in the ACD Circuit Card Type System.
This card supports the following functions.
(a) APINT Function: For processor communications between the CPU of the System and ACDP card,
this circuit card provides FIFO for mutual I/O bus connections.
(b) IOC Function: For ACD-MIS connection, this circuit card provides a serial interface which conforms
with RS-232C (three I/O ports).
TSW, INT
Extended 8-bit I/O Bus
RS-232C
8-bit I/O Bus
GATE
GATE
MISC
EAPI
MISC
8-bit I/O Bus
32-bit MEM Bus
ECPY
ACDP
CPU
CPU
MEM
MEM
Position within the system
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module
LCMA
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note
Note: This circuit card is mounted in any one of Slot No. 02~04.
CHAPTER 4
Page 54
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-PC27 (EAPI)
Mounting Module
LPRJ-A
00 01 02 03 04
CPRAC-0
CPRAC-1
Note
Note: This circuit card is mounted in any one of Slot No. 00~02.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
IOC OPE
CLKALM
OPE/MB
MB
MBR
AP-1
SW0
to CP-53
SW12
SW11
AP-0
to CP-53
SW10
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 55
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-PC27 (EAPI)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
STATE
OPE/MB
IOCOPE
CLKALM
Green
Red
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
Remains lit while the non-protocol/RS-232C Port Controller is operating normally.
Lights when a clock failure has occurred.
Red
Note: The PH-PC27 is a three port EAPI card.
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
Circuit card make busy.
UP
MB
DOWN
Circuit card make idle.
Requests the software to place the ACD-MIS
Interface Port Controller into make-busy state.
UP
MBR
Cancels the request to place the ACD-MIS
Interface Port Controller into make-busy state.
(Circuit card operating state)
DOWN
1
2
3
4
5
6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
×
×
×
×
×
×
Fixed
SW0
7
8
OFF
ON
×
×
CHAPTER 4
Page 56
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-PC27 (EAPI)
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
1
SW01-1
SW11-1
SW01-2
SW11-2
SW01-3
SW11-3
NON-PROTOCOL RS-232C
PORT DATA SPEED SETTING
SW10
(for Port 0)
SW11
(for Port 1)
SW12
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
300 bps
600 bps
2
3
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
1200 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
(for Port 2)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
MIS Port
Interface
Sets the non-protocol RS-232C port stop bit
length to 1 bit.
ON
OFF
ON
×
×
4
5
Sets the non-protocol RS-232C port stop bit
length to 2 bit.
Sets the non-protocol RS-232C port data length
to 7 bit.
Sets the non-protocol RS-232C port data length
to 8 bit.
OFF
SW01-6
SW11-6
SW01-7
SW11-7
NON-PROTOCOL RS-232C PORT
PARITY BIT SETTING
6
7
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ODD Parity Check
EVEN Parity Check (standard setting)
No Parity Check is to be made
OFF
Sets the polarity of non-protocol RS-232C PB
signal to Not Provided.
ON
8
Sets the polarity of non-protocol RS-232C PB
signal to +, or sets PB signal to Provided.
OFF
×
Note: Ports 0, 1 and 2 translate to MIS ports 1, 2 and 3.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 57
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-PC27 (EAPI)
SWITCH SETTING SHEET
SWITCH
NAME
MODULE
LCMA
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
02
03
04
MB
UP: Circuit card make busy.
DOWN
MBR
SW0
DOWN: Circuit card make idle.
DOWN
LPRJ-A
00
01
02
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW10
SW11
SW12
2, 4, 5, 6 ON only
2, 4, 5, 6 ON only
2, 4, 5, 6 ON only
ON
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHAPTER 4
Page 58
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-AL16 (ALMC)
PA-AL16 (ALMC)
1. Function
This circuit card collects fault information and manages a dual-configuration system of the ACD Module
Type System. The card displays the collected fault information on the TOPU. Besides, the card provides
the functions for data communication between two ACDPs in the dual system configuration.
CPU
I/O LOCAL BUS
APINT
CPU
APINT
CPU
ALMC
IOC
(ACDP)
(ACDP)
RS-232C (Non-protocol)
ACD-MIS
COPY
CRAM
COPY
CRAM
APM-A\E
IMX ACD system (Module Type)
Position within the System
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting location of this circuit card and the condition related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module
APM-A\E
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
When ACDP is provided by single system configuration in the IMG (IMX), this circuit card is to be
mounted in its mounting slot only when the APMA is installed externally.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 59
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-AL16 (ALMC)
3. Face layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
MBR
SW1
SW5
EMA SUP
CPUSEL
SW4
MG
(SW3)
SW6
SW0
SW2
CHAPTER 4
Page 60
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-AL16 (ALMC)
4. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
NO.
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NAME
SETTING
MEANING
Circuit card make busy.
UP
MB
ON
ON
Circuit card make idle.
Fixed
DOWN
EMASUP
CPUSEL
UP
DOWN
UP
×
ON
For ACDP Dual System Configuration
For ACDP Single System Configuration
Single CPU System Note 1
MIDDLE
DOWN
MG (SW3)
0
9
Multi CPU System Note 2
SW0
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
ON
1 2
3
4
SW1
OFF
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
OFF
ON
Note 1: For IMG (IMX) (ICS), IMGx, IMGxh
Note 7: For MMG (ICS), UMG (ICS), UMGx
SWITCH
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NAME
SW2
SETTING
MEANING
NO.
Fixed
Fixed
1
OFF
ON
×
ON
1
2
2
×
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 61
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-AL16 (ALMC)
SWITCH
NO.
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NAME
SETTING
MEANING
SW4
Alarm Bus Fixed
Alarm Bus Fixed
Alarm Bus Fixed
Alarm Bus Fixed
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
×
×
×
×
ON
1 2
3
4
SW5
SW6
1
2
3
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
×
×
×
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
ON
1
2
3
4
For ACDP Dual System Configuration
For ACDP Single System Configuration
Alarm Bus Fixed
4
1
2
OFF
OFF
OFF
×
×
ON
1
2
Alarm Bus Fixed
CHAPTER 4
Page 62
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-AL16 (ALMC)
SWITCH SETTING SHEET
SWITCH
NAME
MODULE
APM
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
Circuit card make busy
20
MB
UP:
ON
DOWN:Circuit card make idle
EMASUP
CPUSEL
ON
ON
Middle = ACDP Dual System
Down = ACDP Single System
MG (SW3)
0 = Single CPU Systems
9 = Multi CPU Systems
0
9
SW0
SW1
ON
1 2 3 4
2 and 4 ON (Fixed)
ON
1 2 3 4
SW2
SW4
SW5
SW6
ON
1 2
Alarm Bus
ON
1 2 3 4
4 ON = Dual ACDP
4 OFF = Single ACDP
ON
1 2 3 4
Alarm Bus
ON
1 2
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 63
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-PC21 (APINT)
PH-PC21 (APINT)
1. Function
This circuit card is an inter-processor interface card and is used only for the ModuleType ACD.
The card provides FIFO for mutual I/O bus connections for processor communication between the system
CPU and the ACDP.
TSW, INT
Extended 8-bit I/O Bus
8-bit I/O Bus
GATE
GATE
APINT
APINT
8-bit I/O Bus
32-bit MEM Bus
ECPY
CPU
MEM
CPU
ACD Module
MEM
Position within the system
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting location of this circuit card and the condition related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module
LPRJ-A
00 01 02 03 04
CPRAC-0
CPRAC-1
Note
Note: This circuit card is mounted in any one of Slot No. 00~02.
CHAPTER 4
Page 64
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-PC21 (APINT)
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
CLKALM
OPE/MB
MB
AP1
AP0
SW01
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
OPE/MB
COLOR
STATE
Green
Red
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
Lights while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
CLKALM
Red
Lights when a failure has occurred to clocks for I/O bus synchronization.
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
UP
Circuit card make busy.
Circuit card make idle.
MB
DOWN
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 65
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-PC21 (APINT)
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
When using this circuit card in the ACDP of
single-system configuration or when
connecting this circuit card to No. 0 system of
the ACDP of dual-system configuration.
ON
1
When connecting this circuit card to No. 1
system of the ACDP of dual-system
configuration.
OFF
2
3
ON
ON
×
Fixed
When the ACDP is provided by single-system
configuration.
When the ACDP is provided by dual-system
configuration.
OFF
SW0
4
5
OFF
OFF
×
×
Fixed
Fixed
6
7
8
ON
OFF
ON
SW0-6 SW0-7 SW0-8
DEFINITION OF SOFTWARE TYPE
To be used in ACD ModuleType (Single-
System Configuration)
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
To be used in ACD ModuleType (Dual-
System Configuration)
OFF
ON
Others
Not used
CHAPTER 4
Page 66
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-PC21 (APINT)
SWITCH SETTING SHEET
SWITCH
NAME
MODULE
LPRJ-A
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
Circuit card make busy
00
01
02
MB
UP:
DOWN: Circuit card make idle
ON
SW0
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 67
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-PC56-A (COPY)
PA-PC56-A (COPY)
1. Function
This circuit card provides the function to copy the contents of the RAM of both the standby (ST-Y) system
and the active (ACT) system so that the contents of the RAM of both system may be always coinciding with
each other.
ALMC
IOC
CPU
(ACDP)
CPU
(ACDP)
RS-232C (Non-protocol)
COPY
CRAM
COPY
CRAM
APM
Position within the system
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module
APM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
For No.0 system
For No.1 system
•
This circuit card is not used when the ACDP is provided in a single-system configuration.
CHAPTER 4
Page 68
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-PC56-A (COPY)
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
OPE
SREQ
MB
COPY
SW0
MBS1
MBS0
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
STATE
OPE
Green
Green
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating in ACT state.
COPY
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating in COPY mode.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 69
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-PC56-A (COPY)
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
Circuit card make busy.
UP
MB
DOWN
UP
Circuit card make idle.
Separate mode request.
SREQ
DOWN
Separate mode request cancel (Copy mode).
To be set in the case of System No. 0.
(To be mounted in Slot No. 08 of APMA.)
ON
1
To be set in the case of System No. 1.
(To be mounted in Slot No. 17 of APMA.)
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
SW0
Fixed
ON
ON
ON
CHAPTER 4
Page 70
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-PC56-A (COPY)
SWITCH SETTING SHEET
SWITCH
NAME
MODULE
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
APM-A\E
08
17
MB
UP:
Circuit card make busy
ON
DOWN:Circuit card make idle
SREQ
SW0
ON
1 ON = System No. 0
1 OFF = System No. 1
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 71
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CP54 (CPU)
PA-CP54 (CPU)
1. Function
This circuit card is the CPU card (Central Processing Unit) which controls the ACD Module Type System.
Using the V60 microprocessor (32 bits), this CPU card provides programs and working memory. The card
is equipped with EPROM of 2MB and SRAM of maximum 384KB respectively.
CPU
I/O LOCAL BUS
APINT
CPU
APINT
CPU
ALMC
IOC
(ACDP)
(ACDP)
RS-232C (Non-protocol)
ACD-MIS
COPY
CRAM
COPY
CRAM
APM
ACD in IMX system (Module Type)
Position within the System
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module
APM-A\E
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
For No.0 system
For No.1 system
CHAPTER 4
Page 72
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CP54 (CPU)
3. Face Layout of Lamp, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
SW0
SW1
SW2
CPU OPE
MBR
CLKALM
COPALM
SW3
RESET
SENSE
SW4
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
STATE
CPU OPE
Green
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
Lights when a microprocessor operating clock failure has occurred in this circuit
card.
CLK ALM
COP ALM
Red
Red
Lights when a C-level infinite loop has occurred.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 73
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CP54 (CPU)
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
Circuit card make busy.
UP
MB
DOWN
PUSH
Circuit card make idle.
RESET
Starting of reset of this circuit card.
0
1
For MMG (ICS), UMG (ICS), UMGx
(Normal Setting).
2
3
4
For IMG (IMX) (ICS), IMGx, IMGxh, IMGdxh
(Normal Setting).
5
6
7
8
When connecting the ACD System to
MMG (ICS), UMG (ICS), UMGx; and when
the data memory of ACDP is to be cleared at
the time of ACDP initialization.
(CRAM Clear).
SENSE
9
A
B
C
When connecting the ACD System to
IMG (IMX) (ICS), IMGx, IMGxh, IMGdxh;
and when the data memory of ACDP is to be
cleared at the time of ACDP initialization.
(CRAM Clear).
D
E
F
CHAPTER 4
Page 74
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CP54 (CPU)
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
ON
OFF
ON
×
Memory Parity Alarm Inhibited.
Memory Parity Alarm not inhibited.
External NMI input inhibited.
External NMI input not inhibited.
Memory Alarm NMI inhibited.
Memory Alarm NMI not inhibited.
COPALM inhibited.
1
2
3
4
OFF
ON
×
×
OFF
ON
SW0
OFF
OFF
OFF
×
×
×
COPALM not inhibited.
Fixed.
5
6
Fixed.
When ACDP is provided by dual-system con-
figuration.
ON
7
8
1
When ACDP is provided by single-system con-
figuration.
OFF
OFF
ON
×
Fixed.
Sets Ready Alarm Detect Timing to longer than
48 sec.
Sets Ready Alarm Detect Timing to longer than
6 sec.
OFF
ON
×
×
Sets the interval of C-Level interrupt to 4 msec.
2
3
Sets the interval of C-Level interrupt to 16
msec.
OFF
NMI input from an external memory system is
inhibited.
ON
NMI input from an external memory system is
not inhibited.
OFF
×
SW1
4
5
6
7
OFF
ON
×
×
Fixed.
Equipped with 1.5 MB CRAM area.
Equipped with 3 MB CRAM area.
Fixed.
OFF
ON
×
IMX
ICS
×
ON
Fixed.
OFF
ON
Fixed.
CRAM (PA-ME34) mounted.
CRAM (PA-ME34) not mounted.
8
OFF
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 75
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CP54 (CPU)
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
SW2-1
MEANING
SW2-2
SETTING OF EPROM
1
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
When equipping 1M bit EPROM IC.
When equipping 2M bit EPROM IC (standard).
When equipping 4M bit EPROM IC.
Not used
OFF
OFF
2
3
4
OFF
ON
×
When equipping 1M bit SRAM IC.
When equipping 256 K bit SRAM IC.
OFF
SW2-4
SW2-5
SETTING OF ROM AREAS
ON
ON
When providing 1MB of F00000H ~ FFFFFFH.
When providing 2MB of F00000H ~ FFFFFFH and 00000H ~
0FFFFFH (standard setting).
OFF
OFF
ON
SW2
When providing 4MB of F00000H ~ FFFFFFH and 00000H ~
2FFFFFH.
OFF
5
6
When providing EE0000H ~ EFFFFFH and
E00000H ~ E3FFFFH as RAM areas.
ON
OFF
ON
×
×
When providing EE0000H ~ EFFFFFH as
RAM area.
When equipping 256 kbit SRAM IC as parity
RAM.
7
When equipping 64 kbit SRAM IC as parity
RAM.
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Test mode (Always mis-hit state).
Normal operation mode.
Fixed.
8
1
×
×
When equipping 64 kbit SRAM IC as parity
RAM.
ON
2
3
4
When equipping 256 kbit SRAM IC as parity
RAM.
OFF
×
×
When equipping EPROM IC of either 1M bit
2M bit.
SW3
ON
OFF
ON
When equipping EPROM IC of 4M bit.
When equipping EPROM IC of either 1M bit
2M bit as parity ROM.
×
When equipping EPROM IC of 4M bit as pari-
ty ROM.
OFF
CHAPTER 4
Page 76
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CP54 (CPU)
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
OFF
ON
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
OFF
ON
SW4
OFF
OFF
OFF
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 77
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CP54 (CPU)
SWITCH SETTING SHEET
MODULE
SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE
ON
REMARKS
APM
09
16
MBR
RESET
SENSE
SW0
UP:
Circuit card make busy.
DOWN:Circuit card make idle.
7 ON = Dual ACDP
7 OFF = Single ACDP
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW1
7 ON = IMX Systems
8 ON = PA-ME34 Mounted
8 OFF = PA-ME34 Not Mounted
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW2
Standard
Standard
Fixed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW3
ON
1 2 3 4
SW4
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHAPTER 4
Page 78
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-ME34 (CRAM)
PA-ME34 (CRAM)
1. Function
This circuit card is a RAM card for the ACD System and has memory capacity of 1.5 Mbytes.
ALMC
IOC
CPU
(ACDP)
CPU
(ACDP)
RS-232C (Non-protocol)
COPY
CRAM
COPY
CRAM
APM-A\E
Position within the system
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module
APM-A\E
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note
For No. 0 system
For No. 1 system
Note: When ACDP is single system configuration, this circuit card is mounted in Slot No. 08.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 79
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-ME34 (CRAM)
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
OPE
DMWE
DMWD
SW0
DMWDK
PZ-ME17
SW1
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
OPE
COLOR
Green
Red
STATE
Lights when the CPU has accessed to the RAM in this card.
Lights when the data memory area of this card is in write enable state.
DMWE
Lights when the data memory area of this card is in write inhibited state as set by the
DMWDK switch.
DMWD
Red
CHAPTER 4
Page 80
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-ME34 (CRAM)
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
UP
DOWN
OFF
OFF
ON
Data memory area write inhibited
Data memory area write enable
DMWDK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Sets the RAM area to
$800000 ~ 8FFFFFH,
$C00000 ~ C7FFFFH
Fixed
ON
SW0
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Fixed
Fixed
1
2
SW1-1
SW1-2
ON
ON
Write Protect is provided.
Write Protect is not provided (Fixed).
SW1
OFF
OFF
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 81
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-ME34 (CRAM)
SWITCH SETTING SHEET
SWITCH
NAME
MODULE
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
APM-A\E
06
08
19
DMWDK
ON
SW0
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW1
ON
1 2
CHAPTER 4
Page 82
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-IO02-A (IOC)
PA-IO02-A (IOC)
1. Function
This circuit card is an I/O card (input/output control card) and provides a serial interface function by which
the CPU performs mutual communications with the ACD-MIS conforming with the RS-232C Interface.
ALMC
IOC
CPU
(ACDP)
CPU
(ACDP)
RS-232C (Non-protocol)
COPY
CRAM
COPY
CRAM
APM-A\E
Position within the system
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module
APM-A\E
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 83
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-IO02-A (IOC)
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
OPE
MB
SW12
ON LINE1
SW3
ON LINE0
MB REQ
OFF LINE
SW02
SW01 SW11
SW0
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
STATE
OPE
Green
Green
Green
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating in ACT mode.
Remains lit while PORT 1 is in on-line state.
ON LINE1
ON LINE0
Remains lit while PORT 0 is in on-line state.
CHAPTER 4
Page 84
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-IO02-A (IOC)
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
Circuit card make busy.
MB
UP
DOWN
UP
Circuit card make idle.
Circuit card make busy.
Circuit card make idle.
Setting is inhibited.
Fixed.
MB REQ
DOWN
UP
OFF LINE
MIDDLE
DOWN
×
Setting is inhibited.
SW0
1
2
SW0-1 SW0-2
SETTING OF IOC EQUIPMENT NUMBER
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF Sets IOC Equipment Number 0.
ON
Sets IOC Equipment Number 1.
OFF Sets IOC Equipment Number 2.
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Fixed
SW3
Fixed
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 85
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-IO02-A (IOC)
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
SW1
(for Port 0)
SW11
1
SW01-1
SW11-1
SW01-2
SW11-2
SW01-3
SW11-3
DATA TRANSMISSION SPEED
(BPS) SETTING
(for Port 1)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
300 bps
600 bps
2
3
4
5
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
1200 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
SW01-4
SW11-4
SW01-5
SW11-5
PARITY SETTING
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ODD Parity
EVEN Parity (standard setting)
No Parity
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
×
×
Data Length: 7 bits
Data Length: 8 bits
Stop Bit: 1 bits
6
7
OFF
Stop Bit: 2 bits
Data store into the send-side buffer of the port
is disabled.
ON
8
Data of max. 64 kbytes are to be stored into the
send-side buffer of the port.
OFF
×
CHAPTER 4
Page 86
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-IO02-A (IOC)
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
SW02
(for Port 0)
SW12
PB terminal becomes minus (-) when the port
terminal is busy.
ON
×
1
PB terminal becomes plus (+) when the port
terminal is busy.
OFF
ON
(for Port 1)
×
Sets the ER terminal of the port to Always ON.
2
Controls ON/OFF of the ER terminal of the
port by the CPU.
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
DR signal lead is not to be used to the port.
DR signal lead is to be used to the port.
CD signal lead is not to be used to the port.
CD signal lead is to be used to the port.
CS signal lead is not to be used to the port.
CS signal lead is to be used to the port.
CI signal lead is not to be used to the port.
CI signal lead is to be used to the port.
PB signal lead is not to be used to the port.Note
PB signal lead is to be used to the port.
Not used.
3
4
5
6
×
×
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
×
OFF
ON
×
×
7
8
OFF
OFF
×
Note: When setting SW02-7/SW12-7 to ON, set SW02-1/SW12-1 to ON, also.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 87
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-IO02-A (IOC)
6. External Interface
The RS connector leads accommodation of this circuit card is shown below.
RS Connector Leads Accommodation
RS0 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
E
E
E
E
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SD0
RD0
RS0
CS0
DR0
SG0
CD0
ER0
PB0
31 CI0
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
10 SP00
11 SP10
12 SP20
13 SD1
14 RD1
15 RS1
16 CS1
17 DR1
18 SG1
19 CD1
20 ER1
21 PB1
22 SP01
23 SP11
24 SP21
25 EXTB
43 CI1
44
45
46
47
48
49
E
E
E
E
E
E
50 EXTA
RS0
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
APM-A\E
Figure 4-1 RS Connector Leads Accommodation
CHAPTER 4
NDA-24282
Page 88
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-IO02-A (IOC)
SWITCH SETTING SHEET
SWITCH
NAME
MODULE
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
Circuit card make busy.
APM-A\E
04
MB
UP:
ON
MB REQ
OFF LINE
SW0
DOWN:Circuit card make idle.
ON
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW3
ON
1 2 3 4
SW01
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW11
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 89
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-BS16 (PBI)
PH-BS16 (PBI)
1. Function
This circuit card provides an interface by which the ACDP performs inter-processor communications with
another Processor via the Processor Bus (P-BUS) under control of the ACDP (PA-CP54 card). Also, this
circuit card is connected with the Maintenance Bus (M-BUS) and provides functions that allow the SP
(System Processor) to read out status or fault information of the ACDP and that cause the ACDP to set make-
busy or perform initialization.
CPU
(ACDP)
MEM
SP0
SPC
SP1
SPC
PBI
M-BUS No.0
M-BUS No.1
To other
processor
P-BUS No.0
P-BUS No.1
To other
processor
Position within the system
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module
APM-A\E
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
For No. 1 system
For No. 0 system
CHAPTER 4
NDA-24282
Page 90
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-BS16 (PBI)
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
ACT
OPE
MB
PWRALM
EQBY
PBIH
PBIL
B-OPE0
B-OPE1
TR BSY
RV BSY
M-OPE
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 91
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-BS16 (PBI)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
STATE
Green
Red
Remains lit while the CPU which controls this circuit card is in ACT state.
Lights with PBI Make Busy switch and MB switch turned on.
ACT
OPE
PWRALM
EQBY
Green
Red
Lights when the CPU has accessed to this circuit card.
Lights when the On-Board Power Supply equipped on this circuit card is faulty.
Remains lit while the circuit card is in equipment busy state.
Green
Green
Remains lit while BUS No. 0 of this circuit card is data transmitting and receiving.
B-OPE0
B-OPE1
Lights when BUS No. 0 of this circuit card has been placed into make-busy state by
SP or PBI Make Busy switch has been turned on.
Red
Green
Red
Remains lit while BUS No. 1 of this circuit card is data transmitting and receiving.
Lights when BUS No. 1 of this circuit card has been placed into make-busy state by
SP or PBI Make Busy switch has been turned on.
TRBSY
RVBSY
M-OPE
Green
Green
Green
Lights when the send memory of this circuit card is busy.
Lights when the receive memory of this circuit card is busy.
Lights when the data have been received from M-BUS.
CHAPTER 4
Page 92
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-BS16 (PBI)
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
STAN-
DARD
SETTING
SWITCH
SWITCH NAME
SETTING
MEANING
NO.
MB
Circuit card make busy.
UP
ON
Circuit card make idle.
Fixed
DOWN
×
×
PBIH
PBIL
7
0
Not used.
Not used
7
8
ACDP0-System No. 0 (Mounted in Slot No. 13
of APMA0) (standard setting)
ACDP0- System No. 1(Mounted in Slot No. 14
of APMA0) (standard setting)
9
ACDP1-System No. 0 (Mounted in Slot No. 13
of APMA1)
A
B
C
D
ACDP1-System No. 1 (Mounted in Slot No. 14
of APMA1)
ACDP2-System No. 0 (Mounted in Slot No. 13
of APMA2)
ACDP2-System No. 1 (Mounted in Slot No. 14
of APMA2)
E
F
Not used
Not used
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 93
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PH-BS16 (PBI)
SWITCH SETTING SHEET
SWITCH
NAME
MODULE
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
13
14
MB
UP:
Circuit card make busy
ON
DOWN:Circuit card make idle
PBIH
PBIL
7: Fixed
7
CHAPTER 4
Page 94
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-GT17 (SPGT)
PA-GT17 (SPGT)
1. Function
This circuit card is used when the MISCME module is required. This circuit card provides flow control and
terminates the extention of the MISC bus. This circuit card also controls the alarm LEDs equipped in the
Top Unit.
Single Configuration
LOCAL I/O BUS
IMG0
INT
TSW
MISCME
GT
To IMG 1
GTA
APINT
APINT
APINT
APINT
To IMG 2 GTA
To IMG 3 GTA
EXGT
CPRB-A
HDD
FDD
EMA
IOC
SPGT
MISC BUS
Dual Configuration
IMG0
LOCAL I/O
BUS
INT0
INT1
TSW
MISCME
GT0
GT1
GTA1
GTA
GTA
To IMG 1 GTA0
To IMG 2 GTA
To IMG 1
To IMG 2
To IMG 3
APINT
APINT
To IMG 3
GTA
APINT
APINT
CPRB-A
CPRB-A
SPGT
SPGT
EXGT1
EXGT0
HDD#0
HDD 1
FDD 1
EMA
IOC
FDD#0
MISC BUS
MISC BUS
Figure 4-2 Position in IMGdxh
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 95
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-GT17 (SPGT)
2. Mounting Location/Conditions
The SPGT card mounts in the MISCME as shown below.
Mounting Module
MISCME
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
OPE
MB
CLK ALM
DSPP
ALM
SW10
CHAPTER 4
Page 96
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-GT17 (SPGT)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
STATE
OPE
Green
Red
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
Lights when a clock down occurred.
CLK ALM
5. Switch Setting
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH SWITCH
STANDARD
SETTING
SETTING
MEANING
NAME
NO.
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Circuit card make busy.
Circuit card make idle.
Fixed.
MB
×
×
×
1
2
SW10
Fixed.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 97
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-GT17 (SPGT)
Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH
NAME
MODULE
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
UP:
Circuit card make busy
DOWN: Circuit card make idle
ON
MB
MISCME
22 and 23
ON
1 2
SW0
CHAPTER 4
Page 98
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCDD (ELC)
PA-16ELCDD (ELC)
1. Function
This circuit card is a line card which supports the interface of HDAC. When using voice only, 16 lines of
HDAC can be connected to this circuit card. Further, by changing the switch setting, this circuit card can be
connected with eight (8) lines respectively of voice terminals and data terminals.
NUMBER OF
NUMBER OF
LINE
DATA COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
REMARKS
TIME SLOTS
CIRCUITS
8DLC Mode
16ELC Mode
8 circuits
16 circuits
16 Time Slots
16 Time Slots
Available
Not Available
Terminal 0
Terminal 7
Terminal 8
Terminal 15
INT
COT
C.O. Line
16ch
ELC
T
(PA-16ELCDD)
S
W
Note
CPU
MEM
Position within the system
Note: To be accommodated toTerminals 0~7 in 8DLC Mode.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 99
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCDD (ELC)
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
(a) When this circuit card is mounted in PIMA
Mounting Module
PIMU-A
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
(b) When this circuit card is mounted in PIMB
Mounting Module
PIMB
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
● indicates the mounting locations of this circuit card.
CHAPTER 4
Page 100
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCDD (ELC)
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
OPE
N-OPE
MB
PWRALM
BL15
BLO
SW0
ELC Connector
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
STATE
OPE
Green
Red
Remains lit while this circuit card is in operating normally.
N-OPE
Remains lit while this circuit card is isolated from the system.
term
PWRALM
Red
Lights when power supply to D
is abnormal on more than one circuit.
Green
Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
BL0
Lights when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or when the related
system data is not assigned.
Flash
BL15
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 101
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCDD (ELC)
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
Circuit card make busy.
UP
DOWN
ON
MB
Circuit card make idle.
For using this circuit card as 8DLC.
For using this circuit card as 16ELC.
1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
×
×
×
×
×
Fixed
SW0
term
When connecting D
24 key type to this
ON
circuit card (connection to any other type is not
allowed).
7
8
term
When not connecting D
circuit card.
24 key type to this
OFF
OFF
×
×
CHAPTER 4
Page 102
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCDD (ELC)
6. External Interface
The LT connector leads accommodation and the connection diagram of this circuit card are shown below.
(a) LT connector leads accommodation when this circuit card is mounted in PIMU-A
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *1
Accommodated in *2
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connectors
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connectors
26 B00
27 B10
28 B01
29 B11
30 B02
31 B12
32 B03
33 B13
34 B04
35 B14
36 B05
37 B15
38 B06
39 B16
40 B07
41 B17
42
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A00
A10
A01
A11
A02
A12
A03
A13
A04
26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34 B00
35 B10
36 B01
A00
10 A14
11 A05
12 A15
13 A06
14 A16
15 A07
16 A17
17
10 A10
11 A01
37
38
12
13
B11
B02
A11
A02
39 B12
40 B03
41 B13
14 A12
15 A03
16 A13
42
17
B04
A04
43
18
43 B14
44 B05
45 B15
46 B06
18 A14
19 A05
20 A15
21 A06
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
47
22
B16
A16
48
23
48 B07
49 B17
50
23 A07
24 A17
25
49
24
50
25
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Group No.
*
1
*
2
*
1
*
2
*
1
*
2
*
1
*
2
*
1
*
2
*
1
*
2
PIMA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
Highway Block
Figure 4-3 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A (1/2)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 103
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCDD (ELC)
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *3
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connectors LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connectors
26
1
26 B04
1
2
A04
A14
A05
A15
A06
A16
A07
A17
B14
B05
27
2
27
28
28
3
3
29
4
29 B15
30 B06
4
30
5
5
B16
B07
B17
31
6
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
6
32
7
7
33
8
8
34
9
9
35
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42 B00
43 B10
44 B01
45 B11
46 B02
47 B12
48 B03
49 B13
50
17 A00
18 A10
19 A01
20 A11
21 A02
22 A12
23 A03
24 A13
25
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Group No.
*
3
*
3
*
3
*
3
*
3
*
3
PIMA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
Highway Block
Figure 4-3 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A (2/2)
CHAPTER 4
Page 104
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCDD (ELC)
(b) LT Connector Leads Accommodation when this circuit card is mounted in PIMB
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *1
Accommodated in *2
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 7, 9 Connectors
LT1, 3, 5, 8, 10, Connectors
26 B00
27 B10
28 B01
29 B11
30 B02
31 B12
32 B03
33 B13
34 B04
35 B14
36 B05
37 B15
38 B06
39 B16
40 B07
41 B17
42 (B04)
43 (B14)
44 (B05)
45 (B15)
46 (B06)
47 (B16)
48 (B07)
49 (B17)
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A00
A10
A01
A11
A02
A12
A03
A13
A04
26
1
2
27
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34 B00
9
A00
A10
A01
10 A14
11 A05
12 A15
13 A06
14 A16
15 A07
16 A17
17 (A04)
18 (A14)
19 (A05)
20 (A15)
21 (A06)
22 (A16)
23 (A07)
24 (A17)
25
35
36
10
11
B10
B01
37 B11
38 B02
39 B12
12 A11
13 A02
14 A12
40
41
15
16
B03
B13
A03
A13
42 B04
43 B14
44 B05
17 A04
18 A14
19 A05
45
46
20
21
B15
B06
A15
A06
47 B16
48 B07
49 B17
50
22 A16
23 A07
24 A17
25
Note:
Only LT6 outputs the signals shown in ( ).
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6
LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 23
14 22
13 21
12 20
11 19
10 18
09 17
08 16
07 15 23 07 15 23
06 14 22 06 14 22
05 13 21 05 13 21
04 12 20 04 12 20
03 11 19 03 11 19
02 10 18 02 10 18
01 09 17 01 09 17
00 08 16 00 08 16
03 07 11 15 19 23 03 07
02 06 10 14 18 22 02 06
01 05 09 13 17 21 01 05
00 04 08 12 16 20 00 04
Group No.
*
1
*
2
*
1
*
2
*
1
*
2
*
1
*
1
*
2
*
1
*
2
PIMB
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Highway Block
Figure 4-4 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (1/2)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 105
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCDD (ELC)
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *3
LT0, 2, 4, 7, 9 Connectors
LT1, 3, 5, 8, 10 Connectors
B04
B14
A04
A14
A05
A15
A06
A16
A07
A17
26
1
26
27
1
2
27
2
28
3
28 B05
29 B15
30 B06
3
29
4
4
30
5
5
B16
B07
31
6
31
32
6
32
7
7
33
8
33 B17
34
8
34
9
9
35
10
35
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
36
11
36
37
12
37
38
13
38
39
14
39
40
15
40
41
16
41
42 B00
43 B10
17 A00
18 A10
42
43
44
45
19
20
44
B01
B11
A01
A11
45
46 B02
47 B12
48 B03
21 A02
22 A12
23 A03
46
47
48
49
50
24
25
49
B13
A13
50
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6
LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 23
14 22
13 21
12 20
11 19
10 18
09 17
08 16
07 15 23 07 15 23
06 14 22 06 14 22
05 13 21 05 13 21
04 12 20 04 12 20
03 11 19 03 11 19
02 10 18 02 10 18
01 09 17 01 09 17
00 08 16 00 08 16
03 07 11 15 19 23 03 07
02 06 10 14 18 22 02 06
01 05 09 13 17 21 01 05
00 04 08 12 16 20 00 04
Group No.
*
3
*
3
*
3
*
3
*
3
PIMB
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Highway Block
Figure 4-4 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (2/2)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 106
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCDD (ELC)
(c) Front connector leads accommodation
Leads from No. 8~15 circuits come out to the front connector of the circuit card. The front connector
leads are shown below.
ELC Connector Leads Accommodation
Front Connector Leads
CHAMP Connector Leads
1A A08
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
B08
B18
B09
B19
B0A
B1A
B0B
B1B
B0C
26 B08
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A08
A18
A09
A19
A0A
A1A
A0B
A1B
A0C
No. 8
A18
A09
B18
B09
2A
3A
27
28
No. 9
4A A19
A0A
6A A1A
A0B
8A A1B
A0C
10A A1C
A0D
29 B19
B0A
5A
30
31 B1A
B0B
No. 10
No. 11
No. 12
No. 13
No. 14
No. 15
7A
32
33 B1B
B0C
When using 16
ELC CA-B cable
9A
34
35 B1C
B0D
10B B1C
B0D
12B B1D
B0E
14B B1E
B0F
10 A1C
11 A0D
12 A1D
13 A0E
14 A1E
15 A0F
16 A1F
17
11A
12A A1D
A0E
11B
36
37 B1D
B0E
13A
14A A1E
A0F
13B
38
39 B1E
B0F
40
15A
15B
16A A1F
17A
16B B1F
17B
41 B1F
42
43
18
19
44
45
20
21
46
47
22
23
48
49
24
25
50
Figure 4-5 ELC Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (1/2)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 107
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCDD (ELC)
ELC2
Front Connector Leads
CHAMP Connector Leads
1A
A08
A18
A09
A19
A0A
A1A
A0B
A1B
A0C
A1C
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
10B
11B
12B
13B
14B
15B
16B
17B
B08
B18
B09
B19
B0A
B1A
B0B
B1B
B0C
B1C
B0D
B1D
B0E
B1E
B0F
B1F
No. 8
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
9A
10A
11A A0D
12A A1D
13A A0E
14A
15A
16A
17A
B08
B18
B09
B19
B0A
B1A
B0B
B1B
B0C
B1C
B0D
B1D
B0E
B1E
B0F
B1F
B08
B18
B09
B19
B0A
B1A
B0B
B1B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A08
A18
A09
A19
A0A
A1A
A0B
A1B
A0C
A1C
A0D
A1D
A0E
A1E
A0F
A1F
A08
A18
A09
A19
A0A
A1A
A0B
A1B
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
No. 9
No. 10
No. 11
No. 12
No. 13
No. 14
No. 15
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A1E
A0F
A1F
ELC1
Front Connector Leads
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
9A
10A
11A
12A
13A
14A
15A
16A
17A
A08
A18
A09
A19
A0A
A1A
A0B
A1B
A0C
A1C
A0D
A1D
A0E
A1E
A0F
A1F
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
10B
11B
12B
13B
14B
15B
16B
17B
B08
B18
B09
B19
B0A
B1A
B0B
B1B
B0C
B1C
B0D
B1D
B0E
B1E
B0F
B1F
No. 8
No. 9
No. 10
No. 11
No. 12
No. 13
No. 14
No. 15
When using
16ELC CA-A cable
CHAMP Connector Leads
B0C
B1C
B0D
B1D
B0E
B1E
B0F
B1F
B08
B18
B09
B19
B0A
B1A
B0B
B1B
B0C
B1C
B0D
B1D
B0E
B1E
B0F
B1F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A0C
A1C
A0D
A1D
A0E
A1E
A0F
A1F
A08
A18
A09
A19
A0A
A1A
A0B
A1B
A0C
A1C
A0D
A1D
A0E
A1E
A0F
A1F
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
ELC0
Front Connector Leads
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A08
A18
A09
A19
A0A
A1A
A0B
A1B
A0C
B08
B18
B09
B19
B0A
B1A
B0B
B1B
B0C
B1C
B0D
B1D
B0E
B1E
B0F
B1F
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
9A
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
10B
11B
12B
13B
14B
15B
16B
17B
No. 8
No. 9
No. 10
No. 11
No. 12
No. 13
No. 14
No. 15
10A A1C
11A A0D
A1D
A0E
A1E
A0F
A1F
12A
13A
14A
15A
16A
17A
Figure 4-5 ELC Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (2/2)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 108
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCDD (ELC)
(d) Connection Diagram
Front connector
NEAX2400 ICS
MDF
A00
A0
ELC
B00
A10
B10
B0
A1
B1
HDAC
Modular
Block
A08
A0
B08
A18
B18
B0
A1
B1
HDAC
Modular
Block
Figure 4-6 Connection Diagram
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 109
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCDD (ELC)
SWITCH SETTING SHEET
SWITCH
NAME
MODULE
PIMU-A
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
04~12
15~23
MB
UP:
Circuit card make busy.
DOWN:Circuit card make idle.
ON
SW0
ON
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CHAPTER 4
Page 110
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCH (16ELC)
PA-16ELCH (16ELC)
1. Function
This circuit card is a line circuit card that supports the interface of 16 circuits or 8 circuits of a 2W-Digital
Terminal based on TCM transmission system (Time Compression Multiplex).
This circuit card can be used as an 8-circuit voice/data digital line (8DLC Mode) and a 16-circuit voice only
term
term
digital line circuit (16ELC Mode), and can be connected to any D
operations by mode are shown below.
of the D
Series III. Differences in
NUMBER OF
CIRCUITS
NUMBER OF
TIME SLOTS
DATA COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
Provided
REMARKS
8DLC Mode
16ELC Mode
8 circuits
16 Time Slots
16 Time Slots
16 circuits
Not Provided
16ELC
term
D
0
COT
INT
C.O. Line
term
D
7
16ch
T
term
D
D
8
S
W
term
15
Note
MEM
CPU
Note: If 8DLC mode, the circuit card is
Position within the System
term
accommodated to D
0~7.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 111
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCH (16ELC)
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
(a) When this circuit card is mounted in PIMA
Mounting Module
PIMU-A
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates that the slots are a universal slot for line/trunk circuit cards.
(b) When this circuit card is mounted in PIMB
Mounting Module
PIMB
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates that the slots are a universal slot for line/trunk circuit cards.
CHAPTER 4
Page 112
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCH (16ELC)
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
OPE
MB
PWR ALM
BL15
BL0
SW0
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
Green
OFF
STATE
Remains lit while on-line operations are normal.
Off when on-line operations are abnormal.
OPE
Red
Lights when more than one power supply circuit are abnormal.
Off when all the power supply circuits are normal.
Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
PWR ALM
BL0
OFF
Green
Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or the system data is not
assigned.
Flash
OFF
BL15
Off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 113
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCH (16ELC)
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
SW0
When APR-J/APA-J is not connected.
When APR-J/APA-J is connected.
ON
1
Note 1
Note 2
OFF
Setting of Speech Level: NEAX2400 IMS
(HDS) Level.
ON
2
Setting of Speech Level: NEAX2400 IMS
(ICS) Level.
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
×
×
×
×
Fixed in the system.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Single Port Mode.
Dual Port Mode.
Fixed in the system.
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Fixed in the system.
OFF
ON
16ELC Mode.
OFF
ON
8DLC Mode.
×
Fixed in the system.
OFF
UP
MB
Circuit card make busy.
Circuit card make idle.
DOWN
×
term
Note 1: APR-J/APA-J is an optional device to be connected to D
and provides interface for analog terminal.
Note 2: By setting SWO-1 and SWO-7 as explained in the above table, either APR-J/APA-J or Data Adapter can be used.
CHAPTER 4
Page 114
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCH (16ELC)
SW0-7
ON
OFF
SW0-7
Up to 16 circuits can be connected.
Only voice is used.
Up to 8 circuits can be connected.
Simultaneous communications of voice and
data (use of Data Adapter) can be utilized.
Make this setting when using Data Adapter.
ON
Up to 16 circuits can be connected.
Up to 8 circuits can be connected.
Simultaneous communications of voice and
Simultaneous communications of voice and
OFF
data (use of APR-J/APA-J) cannot be serviced. data (use of APR-J/APA-J) can be serviced.
When either data or voice is used by changing
over with APR-J/APA-J.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 115
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCH (16ELC)
6. External Interface
Accommodation of theLT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown be-
low.
(a) LT Connector Lead Accommodation when this circuit card is mounted in PIMA
•
When the mode is 16ELC Mode/Single Port Mode.
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *1
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
Accommodated in *2
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
B0
B1
1
2
A0
A1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
B2
3
A2
3
B3
4
A3
4
B4
5
A4
5
B5
6
A5
6
B6
7
A6
7
B7
8
A7
8
B8
9
A8
B0
B1
9
A0
A1
B9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B2
A2
B3
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
B7
A7
B8
A8
B9
A9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Group No.
PIMA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
Highway Block
Figure 4-7 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A (1 of 3)
CHAPTER 4
Page 116
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCH (16ELC)
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *3
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
B8
A8
2
2
B9
A9
3
3
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Group No.
PIMA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
Highway Block
Figure 4-7 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A (2 of 3)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 117
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCH (16ELC)
•
When the mode is 8DLC Mode/Dual Port Mode.
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *1
Accommodated in *2
Accommodated in *3
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
9
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Group No.
PIMA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
Highway Block
Figure 4-7 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A (3 of 3)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 118
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCH (16ELC)
(b) LT Connector Lead Accommodation when this circuit card is mounted in PIMB
When the mode is 16ELC Mode and the APR-J/APA-J is used.
•
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *1
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 7, 9 Connector
Accommodation *2
LT1, 3, 5, 8, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
B0
B1
1
2
A0
A1
26
1
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
2
B2
3
A2
3
B3
4
A3
4
B4
5
A4
5
B5
6
A5
6
B6
7
A6
7
B7
8
A7
8
B8
9
A8
B0
B1
9
A0
A1
B9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B2
A2
B3
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
B7
A7
B8
A8
B9
A9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6
LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 23
14 22
13 21
12 20
11 19
10 18
09 17
08 16
07 15 23 07 15 23
06 14 22 06 14 22
05 13 21 05 13 21
04 12 20 04 12 20
03 11 19 03 11 19
02 10 18 02 10 18
01 09 17 01 09 17
00 08 16 00 08 16
03 07 11 15 19 23 03 07
02 06 10 14 18 22 02 06
Group No.
01 05 09 13 17 21 01 05
00 04 08 12 16 20 00 04
PIMB
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
0
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Highway Block
9
1
3
Figure 4-8 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (1 of 3)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 119
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCH (16ELC)
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *3
LT0, 2, 4, 7, 9 Connector LT1, 3, 5, 8, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
B8
1
A8
B9
2
A9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
3
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6
LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 23
14 22
13 21
12 20
11 19
10 18
09 17
08 16
07 15 23 07 15 23
06 14 22 06 14 22
05 13 21 05 13 21
04 12 20 04 12 20
03 11 19 03 11 19
02 10 18 02 10 18
01 09 17 01 09 17
00 08 16 00 08 16
03 07 11 15 19 23 03 07
02 06 10 14 18 22 02 06
Group No.
01 05 09 13 17 21 01 05
00 04 08 12 16 20 00 04
PIMB
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
0
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Highway Block
9
1
3
Figure 4-8 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (2 of 3)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 120
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCH (16ELC)
•
When the mode is 8DLC Mode and the APR-J/APA-J is used.
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *1
Accommodated in *2
Accommodated in *3
LT1,3, 5, 8, 10 Connector
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 7, 9 Connector
LT1, 3, 5, 8, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
1
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
26
1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
9
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6
LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 23
14 22
13 21
12 20
11 19
10 18
09 17
08 16
07 15 23 07 15 23
06 14 22 06 14 22
05 13 21 05 13 21
04 12 20 04 12 20
03 11 19 03 11 19
02 10 18 02 10 18
01 09 17 01 09 17
00 08 16 00 08 16
03 07 11 15 19 23 03 07
02 06 10 14 18 22 02 06
Group No.
01 05 09 13 17 21 01 05
00 04 08 12 16 20 00 04
PIMB
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
0
2
4
6
8
10
11
Highway Block
9
1
3
5
7
9
Figure 4-8 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (3 of 3)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 121
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCH (16ELC)
REMARKS
Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH
NAME
MODULE
PIMU-A
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
SW0
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MB
DOWN
Circuit card make idle.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 4
Page 123
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCJ (16ELC)
PA-16ELCJ (16ELC)
1. Function
This circuit card is a line circuit card which supports the interface of 16 circuits or eight circuits of a 2W-
Digital Terminal based on TCM transmission system (Time Compression Multiplex).
This circuit card can be used as an eight-circuit voice/data digital line (8DLC Mode) and a 16-circuit voice
term
term
only digital line circuit (16ELC Mode), and can be connected to any D
Differences in operations by mode are shown below.
of the D
Series III.
DATA COMMUNICA-
TION FUNCTION
NO. OF CIRCUITS
NO. OF TIME SLOTS
REMARKS
8DLC Mode
16ELC Mode
8 Circuits
16 Time Slots
16 Time Slots
Provided
16 Circuits
Not Provided
16ELC
Dterm
0
C.O. Line
INT
COT
D
D
term 7
term 8
16ch
T
S
W
Dterm 15
Note
CPU
MEM
Note: In 8DLC mode the circuit card is
term
accommodated to D
0~7.
Position within the System
CHAPTER 4
Page 124
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCJ (16ELC)
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
(a) When this circuit card is mounted in PIMJ
Mounting Module
PIMU-A
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
(b) When this circuit card is mounted in PIMK
Mounting Module
PIMK
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 125
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCJ (16ELC)
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps and switches on this circuit card is shown below.
OPE
SW00 (MB)
PALM
BL15
BL0
SW01
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
Green
OFF
STATE
Remains lit while on-line operations are normal.
Off when on-line operations are abnormal.
OPE
PALM
Red
Lights when more than one power supply circuit are abnormal. Note
Off when all the power supply circuits are normal.
Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
OFF
Green
BL0
Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or the system data
is not assigned.
Flash
OFF
BL15
Off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
Note: When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions.
i) Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit as to all lines which belong to the
PA-16ELCJ card whose PALM is on.
term
ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated D
.
term
iii) Disconnect the D
iv) Connect the D
from the rosette, then leave it disconnected for at least 1 minute.
again.
term
CHAPTER 4
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 126
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCJ (16ELC)
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH
NO.
STANDARD
SETTING
SETTING
MEANING
1
ON
When APR-J/APA-J is not connected.
When APR-J/APA-J is connected.
Note 1
Note 2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
×
×
×
×
×
Fixed ON
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fixed in the system.
OFF
ON
Fixed in the system.
Dual Port Mode.
OFF
ON
SW01
Fixed in the system.
OFF
ON
Fixed in the system.
OFF
ON
16ELC Mode
OFF
ON
8DLC Mode
×
×
Fixed in the system.
OFF
UP
Circuit card make busy.
SW00
(MB)
DOWN
Circuit card make busy cancel.
term
Note 1: APR-J/APA-J is an optional device to be connected to D
and provides interface for analog terminal.
Note 2: By setting SW01-1 and SW01-7 as explained in the table below, either APR-J/APA-J or Data Adapter can be used.
SW01-7
ON
OFF
SW01-1
Up to 16 circuits can be connected.
Only voice is used.
Up to 8 circuits can be connected.
Simultaneous communications of voice and
data (use of Data Adapter) can be done.
Make this setting when using Data Adapter.
ON
Up to 16 circuits can be connected.
Simultaneous communications of voice and
data (use of APR-J/APA-J) cannot be done.
When either data or voice is used by changing
over with APR-J/APA-J.
Up to 8 circuits can be connected.
Simultaneous communications of voice and
data (use of APR-J/APA-J) can be done.
OFF
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 127
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCJ (16ELC)
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown
below.
(a) LT Connector Lead Accommodation when this circuit card is mounted in PIMJ
•
When the mode is 16ELC Mode/Single Port Mode.
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *1
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
Accommodated in *2
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
B0
B1
1
2
A0
A1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
B2
B3
B4
B5
3
4
5
6
A2
A3
A4
A5
3
4
5
6
B6
7
A6
7
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
8
9
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
8
9
B0
B1
A0
A1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B2
B3
B4
B5
A2
A3
A4
A5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Group No.
PIMJ
3
9
0
1
2
4
5
6
7
10 11
8
Highway Block
Figure 4-10 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A (1 of 3)
CHAPTER 4
Page 128
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCJ (16ELC)
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *3
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B8
B9
A8
A9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Group No.
PIMJ
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
Highway Block
Figure 4-10 LT Connector Lead Accommodation of PIMU-A (2 of 3)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 129
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCJ (16ELC)
•
When the mode is 8DLC Mode/Dual Port Mode.
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *1
Accommodated in *2
Accommodated in *3
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
9
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Group No.
PIMJ
3
0
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
Highway Block
Figure 4-10 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A (3 of 3)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 130
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCJ (16ELC)
(b) LT Connector Lead Accommodation when this circuit card is mounted in PIMK
When the mode is 16ELC Mode and the APR-J/APA-J is used.
•
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *1
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 7, 9 Connector
Accommodation *2
LT1, 3, 5, 8, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
9
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
9
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B9
A9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6
LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 23
14 22
13 21
12 20
11 19
10 18
09 17
08 16
07 15 23 07 15 23
06 14 22 06 14 22
05 13 21 05 13 21
04 12 20 04 12 20
03 11 19 03 11 19
02 10 18 02 10 18
01 09 17 01 09 17
00 08 16 00 08 16
03 07 11 15 19 23 03 07
02 06 10 14 18 22 02 06
Group No.
01 05 09 13 17 21 01 05
00 04 08 12 16 20 00 04
PIMK
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Highway Block
9
Figure 4-11 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMK (1 of 3)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 131
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCJ (16ELC)
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *3
LT0, 2, 4, 7, 9 Connector LT1, 3, 5, 8, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
B8
B9
1
2
3
A8
A9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6
LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 23
14 22
13 21
12 20
11 19
10 18
09 17
08 16
07 15 23 07 15 23
06 14 22 06 14 22
05 13 21 05 13 21
04 12 20 04 12 20
03 11 19 03 11 19
02 10 18 02 10 18
01 09 17 01 09 17
00 08 16 00 08 16
03 07 11 15 19 23 03 07
02 06 10 14 18 22 02 06
Group No.
01 05 09 13 17 21 01 05
00 04 08 12 16 20 00 04
PIMK
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
0
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Highway Block
9
1
3
Figure 4-11 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMK (2 of 3)
CHAPTER 4
Page 132
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCJ (16ELC)
•
When the mode is 8DLC Mode and the APR-J/APA-J is used.
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *1
Accommodated in *2
Accommodated in *3
LT1,3, 5, 8, 10 Connector
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 7, 9 Connector
LT1, 3, 5, 8, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
9
9
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
9
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6
LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 23
14 22
13 21
12 20
11 19
10 18
09 17
08 16
07 15 23 07 15 23
06 14 22 06 14 22
05 13 21 05 13 21
04 12 20 04 12 20
03 11 19 03 11 19
02 10 18 02 10 18
01 09 17 01 09 17
00 08 16 00 08 16
03 07 11 15 19 23 03 07
02 06 10 14 18 22 02 06
Group No.
01 05 09 13 17 21 01 05
00 04 08 12 16 20 00 04
PIMK
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
0
2
4
6
8
10
11
Highway Block
9
1
3
5
7
9
Figure 4-11 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMK (3 of 3)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 133
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-16ELCJ (16ELC)
MDF
NEAX2400 ICS
ELC
A0
B0
A0
B0
Dterm
Rosette
Figure 4-11 Connecting Route Diagram
Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH
NAME
MODULE
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PIM
SW01
MB
DOWN
Circuit card make busy cancel.
CHAPTER 4
Page 134
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATA (4DAT)
PA-4DATA (4DAT)
1. Function
This circuit card is a trunk card which supports the announcement function for a maximum of four lines
without external announcement equipment. A message for an announcement recorded in this circuit card
can be rewritten in any way desired.
TSW
C.O. Line/Tie Line
LC
TRK
DAT
Position within the System
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
(a) When this circuit card is mounted in PIMA
Mounting Module
PIMU-A
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates that the slots are a universal slot for line/trunk circuit cards.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 135
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATA (4DAT)
(b) When this circuit card is mounted in PIMB
Mounting Module
PIMB
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates that the slots are a universal slot for line/trunk circuit cards.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
SW5 SW7
OPE
SW12
N-OPE
SW11
SW10
MB
BL7(G)
SW6
BL4(G)
BL3(R)
BL0(R)
3
2
1
0
SW9
SW8
JACK
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
CHAPTER 4
Page 136
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATA (4DAT)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
STATE
OPE
Green
Red
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
N-OPE
Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
Green
Lights when the corresponding circuit (circuits No. 0 through No. 3) is busy.
BL4
BL7
BL0
BL3
Flashes while message recording is in progress on the correspond-circuit (circuits No.
0 through No. 3).
Flash
Red
Lights when the corresponding circuit (circuits No. 0 through No. 3) is busy.
Flashes when the corresponding circuit (circuits No. 0 through No. 3) is in make-busy
state or is not assigned in the system.
Flash
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 137
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATA (4DAT)
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
Circuit card make busy.
MB (SW11)
UP
DOWN
×
Circuit card make idle.
SW1 (for Cir-
cuit No. 0)
SETTING OF TIMER FOR EACH CIRCUIT
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
TIMER (MODE)
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON 16-sec. mode
OFF 32-sec. mode
OFF 60-sec. mode
SW2 (for Cir-
cuit No. 1)
OFF
OFF
OFF
Note 1: 16-sec. mode = 4 recording circuits
32-sec. mode = 2 recording circuits
60-sec. mode = 1 recording circuit.
SW3 (for Cir-
cuit No. 2)
Note 2: For each circuit, SW1 ~ SW4 must be set
in the same way. (Two different modes
cannot be assigned.)
SW4 (for Cir-
cuit No. 3)
SW5
SETTING OF ANNOUNCEMENT RECORDING/
PLAYBACK TIME
1
2
SW5-1
SW5-2
RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
16-sec. Recording/Playback
32-sec. Recording/Playback
60-sec. Recording/Playback
OFF
Note 3: Set the Recording/Playback Timer in the same way as set by
SW1 ~ SW4.
ON
OFF
ON
×
To be used by µ-Law.
3
4
To be used by Α-Law.
When using as an external hold tone source
When using as announcement equipment only
OFF
CHAPTER 4
Page 138
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATA (4DAT)
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
SW6
ON
OFF
ON
One-time playback by Circuit No. 0. Note
Repeated playback by Circuit No. 0.
One-time playback by Circuit No. 1. Note
Repeated playback by Circuit No. 1.
One-time playback by Circuit No. 2. Note
Repeated playback by Circuit No. 2.
One-time playback by Circuit No. 3. Note
Repeated playback by Circuit No. 3.
Fixed
1
2
3
4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
5
6
7
×
×
×
Fixed
Not used
Recording from a telephone set
Normal setting
8
OFF
×
Note: For announcement-like Automated Attendant, etc., set one-time playback (ON). For At-
tendant Delay Announcement, set repeated playback (OFF).
SW7
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
×
×
×
×
Fixed
Fixed
Not used
Not used
SW8
(START KEY)
Setting for recording start from a tape recorder
or for playback start.
UP
DOWN
×
Normal setting
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 139
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATA (4DAT)
SWITCH
NAME
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
MEANING
SW9 Note
Set to E while the circuit card is in use as an-
nouncement equipment only.
E
0
1
2
3
4
5
Designation of Circuit No. 0.
The timer is 16-sec. mode.
Designation of Circuit No. 1.
The timer is 16-sec. mode.
Designation of Circuit No. 2.
The timer is 16-sec. mode.
Designation of Circuit No. 3.
The timer is 16-sec. mode.
Designation of Circuits No. 0 and No. 1.
The timer is 32-sec. mode.
Designation of Circuits No. 2 and No. 3.
The timer is 32-sec. mode.
Designation of All Circuits.
The timer is 60-sec. mode.
6
F
Recording from a telephone set.
SW10
Circuit No. 0 make busy request.
Circuit No. 0 is designated during a recording.
ON
0
1
2
3
OFF
ON
×
×
×
×
×
Circuit No. 0 make busy request cancel.
Circuit No. 1 make busy request.
Circuit No. 1 is designated during a recording.
OFF
ON
Circuit No. 1 make busy request cancel.
Circuit No. 2 make busy request.
Circuit No. 2 is designated during a recording.
OFF
ON
Circuit No. 2 make busy request cancel.
Circuit No. 3 make busy request.
Circuit No. 3 is designated during a recording.
OFF
UP
Circuit No. 3 make busy request cancel.
SW12
(WR KEY)
Recording from a tape recorder. (WRITE
mode)
DOWN
Normal setting
Note: When this circuit card is being used as an external hold tone source, set 0, 4 or 6 by timer mode.
CHAPTER 4
Page 140
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATA (4DAT)
6. External Interface
Accommodation of theLT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown be-
low.
(a) LT Connector Lead Accommodation when this circuit card is mounted in PIMA
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *1
Accommodated in *2
Accommodated in *3
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
FM
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
FM
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
FM
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Group No.
PIMA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
Highway Block
Figure 4-12 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 141
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATA (4DAT)
(b) LT Connector Lead Accommodation when this circuit card is mounted in PIMB
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *1
Accommodated in *2
Accommodated in *3
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 7, 9 Connector
LT1, 3, 5, 8, 10 Connector
LT1,3, 5, 8, 10 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
26
1
2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
FM
2
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
FM
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
FM
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6
LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 23
14 22
13 21
12 20
11 19
10 18
09 17
08 16
07 15 23 07 15 23
06 14 22 06 14 22
05 13 21 05 13 21
04 12 20 04 12 20
03 11 19 03 11 19
02 10 18 02 10 18
01 09 17 01 09 17
00 08 16 00 08 16
03 07 11 15 19 23 03 07
02 06 10 14 18 22 02 06
Group No.
01 05 09 13 17 21 01 05
00 04 08 12 16 20 00 04
PIMB
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
0
2
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
Highway Block
9
1
3
5
Figure 4-13 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 142
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATA (4DAT)
Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH SHAPE
SWITCH
NAME
MODULE
PIM
SLOT NO.
REMARKS
SW1
ON
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
SW10
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
ON
3
2
1
0
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 143
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATA (4DAT)
MODULE
Switch Setting Sheet (Continued)
SWITCH
NAME
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
SW12
ON
MB
DOWN
Circuit card make idle.
CHAPTER 4
Page 144
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATB (DAT)
PA-4DATB (DAT)
1. General Function
The PA-4DATB (DAT) circuit card is used as a Digital Announcement Trunk supporting service features
related to announcement functions such as Automated Attendant, Delay Announcement Attendant,
Announcement Service (for Hotel System). Depending on the switch setting, this circuit card works in one
of the following three modes.
•
•
•
64-second mode (maximum 4 CHs/card)
128-second mode (maximum 2 CHs/card)
240-second mode (maximum 1 CH/card)
A message can be recorded from either a tape recorder or a telephone set. In addition, this circuit card can
be used as an external music source.
This diagram shows an example when this card is used for Delay Announcement Attendant.
INT
SW
INT
We are sorry, the line is
busy now. Please stay
on the line.
INCOMING CALL
COT
(PRERECORDED MESSAGE)
CALLING PARTY
CALLING PARTY
PUBLIC
NETWORK
DAT
ATI
COT
INCOMING CALL
ATTCON
LOCAL I/O BUS
CPU
GT
Figure 4-14 Location of PA-4DATB (DAT) card within the system
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 145
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATB (DAT)
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-4DATB (DAT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIMU-A
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
Mounting Module
PIME
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
CHAPTER 4
Page 146
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATB (DAT)
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown below.
OPE
WR
N-OPE
MB
ML7
SW3
SW5
ML0
SW6
SW1
3
2
1
0
MB RQ
SW2
SW7
MRCS
START
JACK
SW4
JP0
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP
COLOR
STATE
OPE
Green
Red
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
N-OPE
Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is connected to
a recording source.
Green
BL4
BL7
Flashes while message recording is in progress on the corresponding circuit (No. 0
through No. 3 circuit).
Flash
Red
Lights when the corresponding circuit (No. 0 through No. 3 circuits) is busy.
BL0
BL3
Flashes when the corresponding circuit (No. 0 through No. 3 circuits) is in make-busy
state or has not been assigned in the system.
Flash
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 147
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATB (DAT)
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH
MB
SETTING
MEANING
Circuit card make busy.
NO.
UP
DOWN
×
×
Circuit card make busy cancel.
MB RQ
MRCS
Make busy request on a channel basis
(Channel Designation for Recording/Playback)
ON
1-4
OFF
Make busy request cancel on a channel basis
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SETTING OF RECORDING MODE
SWITCH NO.
MODE
Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
64-sec. mode
3
0, 1
2, 3
0, 1, 2, 3
128-sec. mode
240-sec. mode
Each Switch corresponds to each chan-
nel of
SETTING OF TIMER FOR EACH CIRCUIT
DAT: channel
1
2
2
4
TIMER (MODE)
SW1
SW4
SW1: channel 0
SW2: channel 1
SW3: channel 2
SW4: channel 3
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
64-sec. mode
128-sec mode
240-sec. mode
Not available
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
CHAPTER 4
Page 148
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATB (DAT)
SWITCH
NO.
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH
SW5
SETTING
MEANING
SETTING OF ANNOUNCEMENT RECORDING/PLAYBACK
TIME
1
2
SW5-1
SW5-2
RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
64-sec. Recording/Playback
128-sec. Recording/Playback
240-sec. Recording/Playback
OFF
Note: Setting of Recording/Playback Timer should
correspond to that of SW1-SW4.
ON
OFF
ON
Compression Law: µ-law
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
Compression Law: A-law
To be used as external hold tone source
To be used as announcement equipment
Single playback of No. 0 channel Note 2
Multiple playback of No. 0 channel
Single playback of No. 1 channel Note 2
Multiple playback of No. 1 channel
Single playback of No. 2 channel Note 2
Multiple playback of No. 2 channel
Single playback of No. 3 channel Note 2
Multiple playback of No. 3 channel
RAM Test data - clear
OFF
ON
SW6
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
×
×
×
×
RAM Test data - store
6
7
8
Not used
Not used
Not used
Note 3: When this card is used as announcement equipment, SW6-1~SW6-4 should be set OFF.
Note 4: For Automated Attendant and Delay Announcement-Attendant, set single playback (ON).
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 149
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATB (DAT)
SWITCH
NO.
STANDARD
SETTING
SWITCH
SETTING
MEANING
Activation of RAMTest
SW7
ON
OFF
ON
1
2
×
Normal setting
Port Microprocessor is reset when MBR key is ON.
OFF
OFF
OFF
UP
×
×
×
Port Microprocessor is not reset when MBR key is ON.
3
4
Not used
Not used
WR
For recording from the phone jack
Normal setting
DOWN
×
×
START
When starting recording from the phone jack or play-
back.
UP
DOWN
Normal setting
Jumper Setting
SWITCH
SHAPE
SWITCH
SETTING
DESCRIPTION
LEFT
Compression Law: µ-law
Compression Law: A-law
JP0
RIGHT
RIGHT
LEFT
CHAPTER 4
Page 150
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATB (DAT)
6. External Interface
When this card is used as an external music-on-hold source, the following cable connection is required.
Mounting Module
PIMC
Accommodated in *2
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
Accommodated in *1
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
Accommodated in *3
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FM
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
E
E
FM
9
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
E
FM
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Group No.
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
3
2
3
5
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
PIMC
0
1
2
4
6
7
8
9
10 11
Highway Block
Figure 4-15 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIMU-A)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 151
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATB (DAT)
Mounting Module
PIME
Accommodated in *2
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15 Connector
Accommodated in *1
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 Connector
Accommodated in *3
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15 Connector
FM
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
E
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
E
FM
9
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
E
FM
LT14 LT15
LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6 LT7
09
LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11 LT12 LT13
15 21 22
23
24
LT0 LT1
Slot No.
11
18
20
06 07 08
10
12 13 14
16 17
19
25
00 01 02 03 04 05
01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
00 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 20 22
01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 21
00 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20
Group No.
18
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
PIME
HW0
HW1
HW2 HW3 HW4
HW5
HW11
HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10
HW6
Highway Block
Figure 4-16 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIME)
CHAPTER 4
Page 152
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATB (DAT)
7. Reference
How to Record a Message
•
Prior to your recording, set switches on the DAT card according to the following example.
SWITCH
SETTING
DESCRIPTION
Timer Value for Channel 0-3: 240 sec.
SW1
SW4
SW5
Circuit Card Timer: 60 sec. A-law/µ-law: A-law External Music Source/ An-
nouncement Equipment: Announcement Equipment
SW6
Single/Repeated Playback: Repeated Playback
MRCS
Channel Designation:
240 sec mode
SWITCH SETTINGS ON DAT (Example <240 sec mode>)
•
Connect a tape recorder to the DAT card with a cable.
Front
Tape Recorder
DAT
Jack
earphone jack (3.6 ø)
•
•
Turn On the MBRQ key to make busy a channel to be recorded.
(To record a message in the 240 sec. mode, all circuits must be placed into MB state.)
Turn the WR key upwards.
(The corresponding BL lamp lights green indicating the tape recorder has been connected to the cir-
cuit.)
•
•
Turn the START key upwards.
(The corresponding BL lamp starts flashing.)
Start the tape recorder and record your message in the designated channel.
<recording>
•
•
The corresponding BL lamp (BL0 ~ BL7) lights steadily. (Recording ends.)
Return the START, WR key to the previous position.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 153
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DATB (DAT)
How to Play Back the Recorded Message
•
Playback from a telephone set
•
•
•
Set the related switches on the PA-4DATB (DAT) card.
Seize a specific channel by “Individual Trunk Access”.
Hear the recorded message.
•
Playback from the phone jack on PA-4DATB (DAT) card.
•
•
•
•
Connect a earphone to the phone jack on the PA-4DATB (DAT) card.
Select your desired channel (0~3) by the MRCS switch.
Turn the START key upwards.
Hear the recorded message.
CHAPTER 4
Page 154
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DTLA (4DTL)
PA-4DTLA (4DTL)
1. Function
This circuit card is a trunk/line card that interfaces the NEAX2400 to four Data Modules.
NEAX2400IMS
Data Terminal
Equipment
(DTE)
Dterm /Data
Adapter
Navigator MIS
Host
DM
MDF
MDF
4
D
T
L
16
E
L
A
C
Navigator Remote
Terminal
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
(a) When this circuit card is mounted in PIMU-A
Mounting Module
PIMU-A
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates that the slots are a universal slot for line/trunk circuit cards.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 155
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DTLA (4DTL)
(b) When this circuit card is mounted in PIMB
Mounting Module
PIMB
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates that the slots are a universal slot for line/trunk circuit cards.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
RFBS
OPE
ECSL
N-OPE
SFBS
MB
RSBS
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
SW1
SW0
Side View
Front View
CHAPTER 4
Page 156
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DTLA (4DTL)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
Status
STATE
OPE
Green
Red
ON
ON
ON
The Port Microprocessor is operating normally.
N-OPE
The Port Microprocessor is not operating due to MB switch or software.
The circuit is in use.
BL0
BL3
Red
Blinking The circuit is out of service due to switch setting or software.
(1/sec.)
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
SWITCH
TYPE AND
NAME
FUNCTION
ELEMENT
POSITION
MEANING
Toggle Switch
MB
UP
Take circuit card out of service.
Normal operation.
Make Busy (entire
circuit card)
DOWN
UP (left)
“Piano” keys
MB0 ~ MB3
Normal operation.
Busy out individual
circuits
0 ~ 3
1 ~ 4
Take corresponding circuit out of ser-
vice.
DOWN (right)
Dip Switch
SW0
Must be ON
ON
DIP Switch
RFBS
Firmware control; DSR always ON.
Received framing bit
control
1 ~ 4
Note
Hardware control; DSR set by DTE
(standard setting).
OFF
DIP Switch
SFBS
ON
Firmware control; DSR always ON.
Sent framing bit
control
1 ~ 4
Note
Hardware control; DSR set by DTE
(standard setting).
OFF
DIP Switch
RSBS
(Standard setting.)
Not used
Not used
1 ~ 4
1 ~ 4
OFF
OFF
DIP Switch
ECSL
(Standard setting.)
Note: Each switch element (1 ~ 4) controls the corresponding circuit (0 ~ 3).
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 157
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DTLA (4DTL)
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown
below.
(a) LT Connector Lead Accommodation when this circuit card is mounted in PIMA
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *1
Accommodated in *2
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
B00
B10
B01
B11
B02
B12
B03
B13
A00
A10
A01
A11
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A02
A12
A03
A13
A00
A10
A01
A11
B00
B10
B01
B11
B02
B12
B03
B13
A02
A12
A03
A13
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Group No.
PIMA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
Highway Block
Figure 4-17 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A (1/2)
CHAPTER 4
Page 158
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DTLA (4DTL)
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *3
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
B00
B10
B01
B11
B02
B12
B03
B13
1
A00
A10
A01
A11
2
3
4
A02
5
A12
A03
A13
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Group No.
PIMA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
Highway Block
Figure 4-17 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMU-A (2/2)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 159
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DTLA (4DTL)
(b) LT Connector Lead Accommodation when this circuit card is mounted in PIMB
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *1
LT0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
Accommodated in *2
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
B00
B10
B01
B11
B02
B12
B03
B13
A00
A10
A01
A11
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A02
A12
A03
A13
B00
B10
B01
B11
B02
B12
B03
B13
A00
A10
A01
A11
A02
A12
A03
A13
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6
LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 23
14 22
13 21
12 20
11 19
10 18
09 17
08 16
07 15 23 07 15 23
06 14 22 06 14 22
05 13 21 05 13 21
04 12 20 04 12 20
03 11 19 03 11 19
02 10 18 02 10 18
01 09 17 01 09 17
00 08 16 00 08 16
03 07 11 15 19 23 03 07
02 06 10 14 18 22 02 06
Group No.
01 05 09 13 17 21 01 05
00 04 08 12 16 20 00 04
PIMB
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
11
Highway Block
5
7
9
Figure 4-18 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (1/2)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 160
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DTLA (4DTL)
LT Connector Accommodation
Accommodated in *3
LT1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
A00
A10
A01
A11
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
B00
B10
B01
B11
B02
B12
B03
B13
1
2
3
4
A02
5
A12
A03
A13
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6
LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10
LT Connector Name
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
15 23
14 22
13 21
12 20
11 19
10 18
09 17
08 16
07 15 23 07 15 23
06 14 22 06 14 22
05 13 21 05 13 21
04 12 20 04 12 20
03 11 19 03 11 19
02 10 18 02 10 18
01 09 17 01 09 17
00 08 16 00 08 16
03 07 11 15 19 23 03 07
02 06 10 14 18 22 02 06
Group No.
01 05 09 13 17 21 01 05
00 04 08 12 16 20 00 04
PIMB
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
0
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Highway Block
9
1
3
Figure 4-18 LT Connector Leads Accommodation of PIMB (2/2)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 161
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-4DTLA (4DTL)
MDF
NEAX2400 IMS
4DTL
G
B00
RS232
DTE
Modular
Jack
R
B
Y
A00
B10
A10
CHAPTER 4
Page 162
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CC98 (ETHER)
PA-CC98 (ETHER)
Ethernet Controller
1. Functional Outline
In the NEAX2400 ICS OAI System, this circuit card supports the functions for interface between the CPU
(IP) circuit card and the external computer. If circuit card type, this circuit card is directly connected with
the CPU card (PA-CP53). If module type, being paired with PA-GT (MBB) card, it connects the Interface
Processor (IP) and the User Application Processor (UAP) through a LAN.
CPU (No.0 Sys)
(PA-CP53)
CPU (No.0 Sys)
(PA-CP54)
CPU (No.1 Sys)
(PA-CP54)
Memory Bus
Memory Bus
ETHER
(No.0 System)
(No.1 System)
(PA-CC98)
MBB
ETHER
Ethernet
(PA-GT16)
(PA-CC98)
Ethernet
ALMC
(PA-AL16)
(a) If circuit card type
(b) If module type (dual system configuration)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 163
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CC98 (ETHER)
2. Circuit Card Mounting Locations/Conditions
The mounting locations and conditions of this circuit card are shown below.
(a) In the case of circuit card type
•
When mounting in the PIMU-A
Mounting Module PIMU-A
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates the mounting locations of this circuit card.
•
When mounting in the PIMB
Mounting Module
PIMB
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates the mounting locations of this circuit card.
CHAPTER 4
Page 164
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CC98 (ETHER)
(a) In the case of module type
Mounting Module APM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
3. Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The locations of lamps, switches, and connectors equipped on this circuit card are shown below.
SW0
OPE
SW1
ERR
S1
S2
S3
FUSE
SW2
LAN
BUS
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 165
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CC98 (ETHER)
4. Lamp Indications
The meaning of indication of each lamp on this circuit card is shown below.
LAMP
COLOR
MEANING OF INDICATION
OPE
Green
Red
Remains lit while this circuit card is in operating status
When a fault has occurred within this circuit card, this lamp lights or flashes to-
gether with lamp S1, S2, or S3 so as to specify the contents of the fault
ERR
Red
Flash
Green
Flash
Flashes when data frame has been sent out onto the LAN
S1
S2
S3
Green
Green
Lights when this circuit card is ready to operate
Remains lit while the power supply to this circuit card is on
5. Switch Setting
Each switch setting on this circuit card and its meaning are shown in the tables on the following pages.
The CC98 Internet address is set by using the AIPT MAT command. For ICS and IMX, Internet is set only
by the AIPT command. For HDS (IMG) configurations, the AIPT command is used for setting the Internet
address for software versions J04.7 and higher.
Contact NEC Personnel for Internet address settings in HDS software versions below J04.7.
Each CC98 card must have a unique MAC address. This MAC address allows each CC98 to be different
from each other and different from any other LAN system. The MAC address is twelve digits in length.
Switches SW0 and SW1 are used to set the lowest three digits. The remainder of the MAC address is fixed.
The Internet address set by AIPT is used with the MAC address to allow the CC98 to connect to LAN net-
works.
Note: If two or more CC98 cards are connected on the same LAN, each must have a unique MAC address.
CHAPTER 4
Page 166
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CC98 (ETHER)
DIP SW
No.
DEFAULT
SETTING
SWITCH
SETTING
MEANING
SW0
ON
OFF
ON
Sets 0, corresponding to bit 0 of MAC address
Sets 1, corresponding to bit 0 of MAC address
Sets 0, corresponding to bit 1 of MAC address
Sets 1, corresponding to bit 1 of MAC address
Sets 0, corresponding to bit 2 of MAC address
Sets 1, corresponding to bit 2 of MAC address
Sets 0, corresponding to bit 3 of MAC address
Sets 1, corresponding to bit 3 of MAC address
Sets 0, corresponding to bit 4 of MAC address
Sets 1, corresponding to bit 4 of MAC address
Sets 0, corresponding to bit 5 of MAC address
Sets 1, corresponding to bit 5 of MAC address
Sets 0, corresponding to bit 6 of MAC address
Sets 1, corresponding to bit 6 of MAC address
Sets 0, corresponding to bit 7 of MAC address
Sets 1, corresponding to bit 7 of MAC address
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
ON
(8 DIP Switches)
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Note: For switch setting for MAC address, refer to [Reference] shown below in the
setting of SW1.For details of switch setting for Internet address, refer to the
AIPT command explained in Chapter 7, ”PBX and ACD Command Pro-
SW1
ON
OFF
ON
Sets 0, corresponding to bit 8 of MAC address
Sets 1, corresponding to bit 8 of MAC address
Sets 0, corresponding to bit 9 of MAC address
Sets 1, corresponding to bit 9 of MAC address
Sets 0, corresponding to bit 10 of MAC address
Sets 1, corresponding to bit 10 of MAC address
1
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
ON
(8 DIP Switches)
OFF
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 167
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CC98 (ETHER)
DIP SW
No.
DEFAULT
SETTING
SWITCH
SETTING
MEANING
SW1 (Continued)
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Sets 0, corresponding to bit 11 of MAC address
4
Sets 1, corresponding to bit 11 of MAC address
5
6
7
8
×
×
×
×
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
[Reference]
Relation between the value
of 4 Bits and Switch Setting
Setting of MAC address
Hex
Switch Setting
On LAN and TCP/IP, this circuit card can have the following
addresses and ports.
0H
MAC Address:
000032250xxxH (48 bits)
1H
2H
3H
4H
5H
6H
7H
8H
9H
AH
BH
CH
DH
EH
FH
TCP Port Numbers: 16 port numbers of 1024 ~ 1039
The last 12 bits of MAC address must be set by switches
SW0 and SW1 before starting up this circuit card.
(Ex.)
When MAC address is to be set to 000032250123H:
By dividing 12 bits into 4-bit units (refer to the table on the
right side), and set the switches as shown below.
SW1
SW0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
ON
3
2
1
0
0 = Fixed (not used)
SW2
Fixed setting (When operating)
0
(Rotary SW)
CHAPTER 4
Page 168
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-CC98 (ETHER)
MODULE
SLOT SWITCH
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
SW0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
SW1
SW2
Fixed for the system
0
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 169
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-GT16 (MBB)
PA-GT16 (MBB)
Memory Bus Buffer
1. Functional Outline
This circuit card is used in the OAI module type for the NEAX2400 IMX and ICS OAI System. It is a circuit
card which repeats the memory bus on PA-CP54 (CPU) card side to ETHER (Ethernet Interface) gate card.
CPU (No.0 Sys)
(PA-CP54)
CPU (No.1 Sys)
(PA-CP54)
Memory Bus (No.0 System)
Memory Bus (No.1 System)
MBB
ETHER
Ethernet
(PA-GT16)
(PA-CC98)
ALMC
(PA-AL16)
Position within the system
2. Circuit Card Mounting Locations/Conditions
Mounting Module
APM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
CHAPTER 4
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 170
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-GT16 (MBB)
3. Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The locations of lamps, switches, and connectors equipped on this circuit card are shown below.
SW0
OPE
MB
LAN ALM
MBRQ
SEG
BUS
4. Lamp Indications
The meaning of indication of each lamp on this circuit card is shown below.
LAMP
COLOR
MEANING OF INDICATION
OPE
Green
Remains lit while this circuit card and ETHER card are normally operating
Lights when the processor in ETHER card has become faulty or when ETHER
card is not correctly connected with this circuit card
LAN ALM
Red
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 171
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-GT16 (MBB)
5. Switch Setting
Each switch setting on this circuit card and its meaning are shown below.
DIP SW
No.
DEFAULT
SETTING
SWITCH
SETTING
MEANING
Circuit card make-busy
MB
UP
ON(MB)
Circuit card make-busy cancel
(Circuit card is in operating status)
DOWN
OFF
(Toggle SW)
MBRQ
Circuit card make-busy request
UP
ON(MB)
×
×
Circuit card make-busy request cancel
(Circuit card is in operating status)
OFF
DOWN
(Toggle SW)
SEG
Sets memory address area to XF0000H ~
XFFFFFH
F
(Rotary SW)
SW0
×
×
1
2
OFF
ON
Fixed
Interrupt is inhibited
Interrupt is not inhibited
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
Sets the equipment number of this circuit card to
1
(8 DIP Switches)
ON
3
×
Sets the equipment number of this circuit card to
0
OFF
×
×
×
×
×
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
ON
Not used
Fixed
OFF
OFF
OFF
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
CHAPTER 4
Page 172
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PA-GT16 (MBB)
Switch Setting Table
SWITCH SHAPE
MODULE
NAME
SLOT SW NAME
REMARKS
Circuit card make-busy
UP:
DOWN: Circuit card make-busy cancel
(Circuit card in operating
status)
ON
ON
MB
MBRQ
APM
12
Fixed
SEG
F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
SW0
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 4
Page 173
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is for your notes.
CHAPTER 4
Page 174
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5
1. GENERAL
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
This chapter explains the office data design for the ACD in the IMX system.
2. BASIC OFFICE DATA ASSIGNMENT
This section explains how to assign the basic office data. Items covered in this section include the following:
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 175
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
2.1 BACK-UP UCD
When a system provides the back-up UCD group, ACD calls will be routed to the back-up UCD group if ACD
system is corrupted.
Design of UCD station
•
•
•
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
AMNON
401
ASHU
402
400
300
500
UCD
Control
STA
301
501
UCD
STA
302
502
UCD
STA
(ACD) (PBX)
(ACD) (PBX)
(ACD) (PBX)
Supervisory position
Agent position 1
Agent position 2
AMNON
ASHU
402
400
300
500
401
(ACD)
301
• PBX
• UCD STA
302
(ACD) (PBX)
(ACD) • PBX
• UCD STA
UCD
Control
STA
Supervisory position
Agent position 1
Agent position 2
ASHU
AMNON
400
300
401
301
501
402
(ACD)
302
(ACD) • PBX
(ACD) (PBX) UCD
• PBX
Control
STA
• UCD STA
• UCD STA
Supervisory position
Agent position 1
Agent position 2
CHAPTER 5
Page 176
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
<Back-up UCD for Fusion service>
Design of UCD station
Assign the ACD positions in the self-node as UCD controlling station at each node. By this programming, ACD
incoming calls terminated to the trunk in the self-node can be distributed to the UCD group member in the self-
node even when link down or the remote system down is occurred.
When there is no ACD positions in the node, the back-up UCD group may be organized by the non-ACD posi-
tion.
• Pattern 1 when a back-up UCD group is formed by ACD positions in a node.
ACD calls are distributed to the UCD group member in the self-node.
Node A
(provides ACDP)
NEC
ACD incoming call
Node B
NEC
Public
Network
ICT
ACD incoming call
Public
ICT
Network
ACD
agent
ACD agent
UCD Controlling
Station
UCD Controlling
Station
.....
.....
UCD Distribution
UCD Group (a)
UCD Distribution
UCD Group (b)
• In the node with no ACD positions
NON-ACD Stations
.....
UCD Group of Non-ACD stations
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 177
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
• Pattern 2 when a back-up UCD group is formed by ACD positions in multiple nodes.
When ACD positions in multiple nodes belong to an ACD split, assign back-up UCD group for the split to
divide into two groups and assign the UCD controlling station number to ACD positions in the self-node and
the remote node.
Node A
(provides ACDP)
NEC
ACD incoming call
Node B
Public
Network
ICT
ACD incoming call
NEC
Public
ICT
Network
UCD Distribution OK
UCD Group (a)
.....
.....
UCD
Controlling Station
UCD Distribution OK
UCD Group (b)
.....
.....
UCD
Controlling Station
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 178
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
When a UCD group is organized by ACD positions in multiple nodes, ACD incoming calls cannot be distributed
to ACD positions in the node where UCD controlling station is not accommodated when the link connecting the
nodes is down.
ACD incoming calls terminated at the trunk in Node B are distributed to UCD group members in Node B.
Node A
(provides ACDP)
NEC
Node B
Public
Network
LINK DOWN
ICT
ACD incoming call
NEC
Public Network
ICT
.....
.....
UCD
Controlling Station
UCD Group of ACD Positions
UCD Distribution NG
UCD Distribution OK
ACD incoming calls are not distributed to any position and the caller hears the reorder tone.
Node A
(provides ACDP)
NEC
Node B
Public
Network
LINK DOWN
ICT
ACD incoming calls
NEC
Public
Network
ICT
UCD Controlling
Station
.....
.....
UCD Group
UCD Distribution NG
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 179
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
Step 1: ASHU (Station Hunting - UCD)/ASHUN (for Fusion)
Assign UCD group data
Note: ASHU command data and ASHUN command data cannot be used in a system.
Step 2: AMNO (Monitored Number)/AMNON (for Fusion)
• Assign “1” on a parameter UCD.
• Assign the control station number of the back-up UCD per Monitored number.
CHAPTER 5
Page 180
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
2.2 ACD IN A FUSION NETWORK DATA ASSIGNMENT
This section provides general information about ACD in an Fusion Network and also, network establishment
conditions, data programming. For the function differences, this information is classified into the following two
functions.
Function 1 - ACD agents in a node providing ACDP can answer the ACD incoming calls via access to
ACD trunks in the remote node. This is called “ACD Trunk for Fusion” in this manual.
Function 2 - ACD agents in multiple nodes can answer ACD incoming calls since multiple ACDPs can be
provided in a Fusion Network (PBX software Series 7400 feature). This is called “Multiple
ACDPs in an Fusion Network” in this manual.
Note: Feature [A-133] AGENT ANYWHERE allows ACD calls to be terminated to agents in remote nodes since
Conditions for Network Establishment
1. Telephone Number (maximum 5 digits) is used for the station number type (both PBX line and ACD line)
to activate ACD system through Fusion Network. Note 1
2. Logical Route (1-254: route numbers more than 254 are not available) is used for the route type to activate
ACD system through Fusion Network. The tables below show which data programming is changed in ac-
cordance with these conditions in terms of data and commands.
1
Basic Office Data
Data Description
Notice
Monitor number
1. AMNON is used in place of AMNO
2. Telephone number for Monitor number (pilot number) is assigned in ALGNN com-
mand before the monitor number data assignment.
3. ACNON is used in place of ACNO
Announcement data
Back up-UCD data
AADTN is used in place of AADT
ASHUN is used in place of ASHU. See “Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) [U-1]” in Fea-
ture Programming Manual.
Other data
Logical route number (1-254) and telephone number (max. 5 digits) are used.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 181
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
2
ACD Command Data
Data Description
Notice
ACDANA
Telephone number (monitor number = pilot number) should be set in AMNON before
this command.
ACDCCV
ACDIVR
ACDLOG
ACDPLT
Telephone number is programmed when the transferred destination is a station.
Telephone number is programmed for Access number to IVR.
Telephone number is programmed in Personal Assist and Personal Emergency.
Telephone number (monitor number = pilot number) should be set in AMNON before
this command.
ACDPSN
Telephone number is programmed in ALGSN (Position Number and ACD/PBX Line
Number.
ACDSPL
ACDTG
ACDTN
Telephone number is programmed in ASIST, NIGHT, and EMGCY.
Logical route (1-254) is programmed in ALRTN.
Telephone number is programmed in IVR Pilot Number and Operator Access Code.
CHAPTER 5
Page 182
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
3. The following operation codes (OP-CODE) are not available for OAI system when OAI and ACD system
MSF (F-KIND=1): OP-CODE=185~191
TMF (F-KIND=2): OP-CODE=248~255
4. Proper number of connection trunks must be prepared to prevent the traffic congestion. If all connection
trunks are busy, ACD call distribution is not available. If such a situation occurs, program the CCV step as
shown below. Using this data setting, ACD calls distribution to transfer to another agent position is avail-
able using the alternate routing function.
Transfer is assigned at CCV Step 20.
The system is designed to select the alternating route assigned in Step 20 automatically if the connection
trunk is busy.
Table 5-1 CCV for ACD CallsTransfer (in case ofTraffic Congestion)
CCV step
CCVACT
Remarks
1
2
3
Queue Assign
Pause
Announcement
End CCV
Be sure to assign “End CCV” by CCV Step 19 so that the call is not processed
with CCV Step 20 “Transfer”.
4
:
:
Transfer
Examples of alternating route (dialed number of the transfer destination)
20
•
•
Monitor Number in the self-node
Monitor Number in the remote node via outgoing trunk route
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 183
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
2.2.1 ACD TRUNK IN A FUSION NETWORK
General Information
To use the ACD services in a Fusion Network, any ACD calls can be picked up from ACD positions in a node
providing ACDP using ACD trunk in the remote node.
Note: ACD calls terminated at the trunk in the remote node can be handled by ACD positions in any node
(irrespective of the self or remote node, or providing ACDP or not.) since the PBX software Series 7300.
Network Configurations:
Examples:
AVAILABLE
(a) One ACDP manages all nodes in
Fusion network
(b) Two ACDPs manage individual system at each.
•
ACDP2 manages only PBX4. (PBX4 is ACD stand-alone system.)
PBX
PBX
PBX1
PBX3
PBX
PBX
ACDP
PBX2
ACDP1
ACD for Fusion
PBX4
Fusion Network
ACDP2
ACD for Fusion
Fusion Network
UNAVAILABLE
(c) Two ACDPs manage the same nodes in Fusion network.
Multiple ACD for Agent Anywhere cannot exist in a Fusion Network.
PBX1
PBX3
PBX2
ACDP1
ACD for Fusion
ACDP2
ACD for Fusion
Fusion Network
PBX4
CHAPTER 5
Page 184
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
Data Programming
Step 1: ASYDL - ACD for Fusion Network. This data must be set for all nodes to be provided ACD service.
SYS1, INDEX512: FPC number of the self-node (1-253)
*SYS1, INDEX865: FPC of the node providing IP. (When IVR is used, this data is necessary)
*SYS1, INDEX866: FPC of the node providing built-in ACDP.
Note 1: The same value (FPC) must be set to these indexes.
Note 2: Assign 0 for the node using ACD service in the self node only.
Step 2: ASYDN - SYS1, INDEX514: NDM usage
Step 3: Data programming procedures other than Steps 1, 2 are the same as those for the non-Fusion system
(ACD stand-alone system). However, note which data is necessary for the node providing ACDP. The
others are set to all Fusion nodes in which ACD trunks or ACD agents are installed.
Data required for the node that accommodates ACDP:
ASYD - SYS1, INDEX2, b0:1=ACDP is used
SYS1, INDEX207, b0:1=ACDP0 is used
SYS1, INDEX207, b1:0/1=ACDP1 is not used/used
Note 4
ASYDL - SYS1, INDEX864, b0:1=Built-in ACDP is used
Note 3: PBX command data such as AKYD, AOKC, ASFC is set to all nodes in a Fusion Network.
Note 4: Not used in Internal ACD.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 185
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
2.2.2 MULTIPLE ACDPS IN A FUSION NETWORK
General Information
This feature allows multiple ACDPs in a Fusion Network. Since Series 7400 software, establishing the CCIS
line is not necessary to use ACD function through the network. The network user can transfer ACD calls to the
remote node with an FCCS line and fusion service can be used by establishing a Fusion Network. As for ACD
incoming calls, calls terminated to ACD trunk can be distributed to the remote node regardless of the self-node
or the remote node. This feature is available since the PBX software Series 7400.
Node A
ICT
PBX
ACD Calls
Agents
ICT
ACD Calls
MIS
ACDP
Fusion
Network
ICT
ICT
ICT
ICT
PBX
PBX
Agents
ACDP
ACDP
MIS
Node B
Node C
CHAPTER 5
Page 186
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
Service Conditions
1. ACDP can be accommodated in all fusion nodes.
2. The maximum number of Status Monitoring Requests to a terminal (including Trunk) is decided by the
system data (maximum of eight ports available including ACDP, UAP*). Note that the normal operation is
not guaranteed if Status Monitoring is requested to a terminal from more than the number of ports (for
example, the case DID Trunk is managed by more than the designated number of ACDPs). Do not establish
such a network configuration.
* UAP for Status Monitoring Request using SMFR. Status Monitoring Request from UAP is available by
using the ports other than ports used for Status Monitoring Request from ACDP.
3. Multiple ACDPs can be used for “ACD Trunk for Fusion” and ACD stand-alone (the ACDP provides ACD
function in the self-node only) in a Fusion Network. However, only one ACDP can be used for “AGENT
ANYWHERE” in a Fusion Network.
4. The destination node (ACDP) for ACD incoming calls is designated on a monitor number basis using ACD-
PLT command (ACD trunk basis). Note that the same monitor number cannot be assigned at multiple nodes
using ACDPLT).
5. Agent positions to be controlled from different ACDPs cannot be accommodated in a node.
Both ACDPs in Node 1 and Node 2 cannot control ACD positions in Node 3.
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
ACDP
ACDP
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 187
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
6. When Multiple ACDPs are used in a Fusion Network that accommodates the IMX-U system, consider the
following conditions when programming data.
(a) IMX-U system where the agent positions are accommodated in a Local Node of the system. In the
IMX-U system, data programming for “ACD Trunk for Fusion” must be programmed at the node that
has ACDP (“ACDP1” in the figure below). Program so that another ACDP (“ACDP2” in the figure
below) can be used for“AGENT ANYWHERE”.
IMX-U
LN
ACDP 2
LN
LN
LN
LEGEND
LN
LN
: Local Node that
has agent positions
LN
ACDP 1
(b) IMX-U system where the agent positions are accommodated in a multiple Local Nodes. In the IMX-
U system, data programming for “AGENT ANYWHERE” must be programmed at the node that has
ACDP (“ACDP1” in the figure below). In the network, only one ACDP can be used for “AGENT
ANYWHERE”.
IMX-U
LN
ACDP 2
LN
LN
LN
LEGEND
LN
LN
: Local Node that
has agent positions
LN
ACDP 1
7. When a DID Trunk is managed by multiple ACDPs, the trunk information (CA, AF message) is sent to each
MIS. Accordingly, the number of originating static report which is concerned with the trunk group and the
trunk to be processed by the other ACDPs is included in the report.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 188
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
Network Configurations:
The following are examples of ACD system configuration in a Fusion Network where single ACDP is provided
and in a network where multiple ACDPs are provided. The following examples show how to change a network
with a single ACDP into a network with multiple ACDPs. For settings, see “Data Programming” in this section.
Type I: Non-ACD system (as an example for comparing with the other systems)
PBX1
Note 1: ACD calls can be transferred to this system from other ACD systems
via the data programming of PBX3 in Type III.
Type II: ACD stand-alone system (ACD system provides ACD function in the self-node only)
Note 2: ACD calls can be transferred to this system from other ACD systems
via the data programming of PBX4 in Type III.
Type III: Systems using “ACD Trunk in a Fusion Network”
PBX2 ACDP
PBX3 - System providing ACD trunks only
PBX3
PBX4ACDP
PBX4 - System providing ACD trunks and ACD positions
Type IV: Systems using “AGENT ANYWHERE”
PBX5 - System providing ACD trunks and ACD positions
ACDP
PBX6
PBX5
PBX6 - System providing ACD trunks and ACD positions
Additionally, the node providing VNDM (CN of VNDM) and NCN
Figure 5-1 Legend
The following are example configurations of a network providing single ACDP. In this network, call transfer is
not available between different types of system since each ACDP works individually.
1. ACD Stand-alone x n
Call Transfer between ACD stand-alone system is allowed for non-ACD calls
PBX ACDP
only.
→ * See Note 2 in LEGEND.
PBX ACDP
Fusion Network
2. non-ACD system + ACD stand-alone system + systems using “ACD Trunk in
a Fusion Network”
PBX
PBX
PBX ACDP
PBX
Call Transfer among systems of Type I~III is allowed for non-ACD calls only
(ACD incoming calls are unavailable).
→ * See Note 1 and Note 2 in LEGEND.
Fusion Network
3. ACD stand-alone system + Systems using “ACD Trunk in a Fusion Network
(non- ACD system + System using “Agent Anywhere”)
Call Transfer between ACD stand-alone system and systems using “ACD
Trunk in a Fusion Network” is allowed for non-ACD calls only
(ACD incoming calls are unavailable).
PBX
PBX
PBX ACDP
PBX
Fusion Network
→ * See Note 1 and Note 2 in LEGEND.
Figure 5-2 Fusion Network with Single ACDP (Example)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 189
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
The followings are some example configurations of network providing multiple ACDPs. In this network, ACD
incoming calls in a node can be terminated to any nodes depending on the setting. And also, call transfer is
available for each other.
1. System using “ACD Trunk in a Fusion Network”
PBX ACDP
PBX ACDP
Fusion Network
2. Systems using “ACD Trunk in a Fusion Network” (non-ACD
PBX
PBX
PBX ACDP
PBX
system + ACD stand-alone system + System using “Agent
Anywhere”)
Fusion Network
3. Systems using “ACD Trunk in a Fusion Network” + System using
“Agent Anywhere”
PBX
PBX
PBX ACDP
PBX
Fusion Network
Figure 5-3 Fusion Network with Multiple ACDPs (Example)
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 190
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
Data Programming
This section shows data programming divided into the types of ACD system in the figure below.
The following shows the network configuration of ACD system in a Fusion Network.
LEGEND
Type I: Non-ACD system (as an example for comparing with the other
I
PBX1
PBX3
PBX5
PBX2ACDP II
systems) ACD calls may be transferred to this system from other
ACD systems via the data programming of PBX3.
Type II: ACD Stand-alone system (ACD system provides ACD function in
the self-node only)
PBX4ACDP
III
NCN
ACD calls may be transferred to this system from other ACD
systems via the data programming of PBX4.
PBX6ACDP
IV
Type III: Systems using “ACD Trunk in a Fusion Network”
PBX3 - System providing ACD trunks only
Fusion Network
PBX4 - System providing ACD trunks and ACD positions
Type IV: Systems using “AGENT ANYWHERE”
PBX5 - System providing ACD trunks and ACD positions
PBX6 - System providing ACD trunks and ACD positions
Also, the node providing VNDM (CN of VNDM) and NCN
Figure 5-4 Network Configuration of ACD systems
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 191
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
1. The following is a quick reference of optional software and data programming for each ACD system type.
Type and Node
I
II
III
IV
ACD
PBX1 PBX2 PBX3 PBX4 PBX5 PBX6
Software and Data Programming
ACD Software
Built-in ACDP software
(Series 7300 or later release)
1
ACD Option Service software (basic)
(APL-0809: Series 7400 or later release)
2
ACD Option Service software (for defining the ACD
capacity) (APL-0729~0733)
3
4
ACD Option Service Software for “AGENT ANYWHERE”
(APL-0734: Series 7300 or later release)
System Data
ACDP in service/out of service
(ASYD: SYS1, INDEX2, b0)
3
4
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
6
0
1
0
6
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
6
0
1
0
6
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
6
0
1
CM Usage Note 1
(ASYD: SYS1, INDEX31, b0~3)
OAI in service/out of service
(ASYD: SYS1, INDEX79, b6)
5
IP in system 0 is used/not used
(ASYD: SYS1, INDEX207, b0)
6
IP in system 1 is used or not
(ASYD: SYS1, INDEX207, b1)
Note
2
Note
2
Note
2
7
OAI Call Processing Event Notification
(ASYD: SYS1, INDEX241, b2)
8
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
SCF Return Error Detail Notification
(ASYD: SYS1, INDEX241, b3)
9
Built-in ACDP is used/not used
(ASYDL: SYS1, INDEX864, b0)
10
11
“AGENT ANYWHERE” in service/out of service
(ASYDL: SYS1, INDEX864, b2) Note 3
“MULTIPLE ACDPs in an FCCS Network” in service/out
12 of service Note 4
0
0
1
1
1
1
(ASYDL: SYS1, INDEX864, b3)
FPC no. of the node providing IP
13
Note Note Note Note
0
0
0
0
5
5
5
5
(ASYDL: SYS1, INDEX865)
FPC no. of the node providing ACDP
Note Note
14
PBX 6 PBX 6
6
7
(ASYDL: SYS1, INDEX866)
: Item 1 is ACD FD4 included with Generic Software. Items 2, 3 and 4 are provided on the Configuration FD.
: Node requires ACD data programming.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 192
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
Type and Node
I
II
III
IV
ACD
PBX1 PBX2 PBX3 PBX4 PBX5 PBX6
Software and Data Programming
15
Number of ports for SMFN (terminal)
(ASYDL: SYS1, INDEX864, b4~5)
Note 8 Note 8 Note 8 Note 8 Note 8
0
16
FPC no. of Center Node providing VNDM
(ASYDN: SYS1, INDEX533)
Note 9 Note 9 Note 9 Note 9 Note 9 Note 9
17
ACD data
(See item (2) in this section)
: Item 1 is ACD FD4 included with Generic Software. Items 2, 3 and 4 are provided on the Configuration FD.
: Node requires ACD data programming.
Note 1: When CM is used for another function, this setting may be changed.
Note 2: When the CPU in system 1 is used, assign “1”. (Used only in External ACD.)
Note 3: Assign “1” to all nodes using “AGENT ANYWHERE”.
Note 4: All fusion nodes in the network are used for “MULTIPLE ACDPs in a Fusion Network”, this data may be
assigned using ASYDN.
Note 5: This data is required for UAP connection.
Note 6: When ACD incoming calls are controlled by one ACDP, assign FPC no. of the node providing ACDP. As
for ACD incoming calls controlled by multiple ACDPs, assign FPC no. of a node of all managing nodes.
Program the data for the transferred ACD calls.
Note 7: Assign FPC no. of the self node.
Note 8: (This data is not necessary for the example in Figure 5-4.) Assign this data so that the proper number of
ports can be used when more than three ports of Status Monitoring for terminal (SMFN) is required. The
identical data should be assigned at all nodes.
ASYDL SYS1 INDEX864 b4-5:
(b4=0, b5=0)=2 ports
(b4=1, b5=0)=8 ports
Note 9: Assign the FPC no. of ACDP node using “AGENT ANYWHERE” when a Fusion Network provided
MULTIPLE ACDPs is also provided “AGENT ANYWHERE”. While in the network not provided “AGENT
ANYWHERE” (actually, the node may be changed into the node provided “ACD Trunk for Fusion”) assign
the FPC no. of ACDP node using “ACD Trunk in a Fusion Network” (In this example, FPC no. of PBX4
or PBX6 is applied with this condition).
2. Notations for ACD command data programming are described below.
(a) When the DID trunk is controlled by multiple ACDPs, the identical ACDTG command data can be
programmed at the nodes of ACDPs.
(b) Do not duplicate the monitor number in ACDPLT data, agent position (including analog ACD
positions and agent positions in a “Hot Split”)’s number in ACDPSN, and IVR access number in
ACDIVR command data at multiple ACDP nodes.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 193
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
3. Some notices for PBX commands data programming are described below.
See Figure “Network Configuration of ACD systems” for network configuration of ACD systems.
Type and Node
I
II
III
IV
PBX1 PBX2 PBX3 PBX4 PBX5 PBX6
PBX Command Data
AMNO (Monitor Number Data)
N/L
F
N
F
N
F
(Back-up UCD) Note
ACNO (Conversion Number Data)
AADT (Announcement/Dictation Data)
AOKC (OAI Key Code Data)
term
N/L
N
N
N
N
N
AKYD (Key Data for D
)
ASFC (Service Feature Restriction Class Data)
ASHU (Station Hunting Group-UCD Data)
F
F
F
F
F
: Assign data by the corresponding commands written in DM.
N : Assign data by the corresponding commands written in NDM.
L : Assign data by the corresponding commands written in LDM when the call is not terminated from other nodes.
F : UCD for Fusion service must be used for the back-up UCD.
Note: When a COT card is used for back-up UCD, assign the UCD pilot number for the destination of RT and TK
for COT card using ACSI command data.
The system may not be operated normally if the above-mentioned data (especially, system data in item 1)
is not programmed correctly or the required software (also, described in item 1) is not installed yet. Data
to be checked if the following faults occur are shown below.
Note: Data marked with an asterisk (*) indicates that system must be initialized after data change.
(a) ACD data cannot be programmed.
- Software to be installed
• Software install for Built-in ACDP function (Basic ACD Option Service software (APL-0809:
Series 7400 or later release)
- Data Programming
• ACDP in service/out of service (ASYD: SYS1, INDEX2, b0)
• IP in system 0 is used/not used (ASYD: SYS1, INDEX207, b0)
• IP in system 1 is used/not used (ASYD: SYS1, INDEX207, b1) Note 1
• Built-in ACDP is used/not used (ASYDL: SYS1, INDEX864, b0)
Note 1: IP in System 1 not used in Internal ACD.
(b) ACD agent positions cannot be logged on to the split.
CHAPTER 5
Page 194
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
- Software to be installed
• Software install for VNDM function (Basic ACD Option Service software, APL-0809: Series
7400 or later release)
• Software install for “AGENT ANYWHERE” (APL-0734: Series 7300 or later release)
- Data Programming
• FPC number of Center Node providing VNDM (ASYDN: SYS1, INDEX533)
• “AGENT ANYWHERE” is in service/out of service (ASYDL: SYS1, INDEX864, b2)
• “MULTIPLE ACDPs in a Fusion Network” is in service/out of service (ASYDL: SYS1,
INDEX864, b3)
(c) ACD incoming calls are routed to the busy tone connection./ACD incoming calls are distributed by
back-up UCD function.
- Software to be installed
• Software install for VNDM function or ACD Trunk for Fusion function (Basic ACD Option Ser-
vice software, APL-0809: Series 7400 or later release)
• Software install for “AGENT ANYWHERE” (APL-0734: Series 7300 or later release)
- Data Programming
• FPC number of Center Node providing VNDM (ASYDN: SYS1, INDEX533)
• “AGENT ANYWHERE” is in service/out of service (ASYDL: SYS1, INDEX864, b2)
• “MULTIPLE ACDPs in a Fusion Network” is in service/out of service (ASYDL: SYS1,
INDEX864, b3)
• FPC number of the node providing ACDP (ASYDL: SYS1, INDEX866)
(d) ACD incoming calls released before connecting with the ACD positions are not deleted from the
queue (Abandoned Call Search is ineffective)/ACD positions are not automatically released from the
connection with an ACD call after the call is released.
- Software to be installed
• Software install for extending the number of ports for SMFN (terminal) function
(Basic ACD Option Service software, APL-0809: Series 7400 or later release)
- Data Programming
• CM usage (ASYD: SYS1, INDEX31, b0~3)
• OAI Call Processing Event Notification (ASYD: SYS1, INDEX241, b2)
• Number of ports for SMFN (terminal) (ASYDL: SYS1, INDEX864, b4~5)
(e) ACD agent position is locked up after transferring an ACD call to another position in the remote node.
- Software Install
• Software install for extending the number of ports for SMFN (terminal) function
(Basic ACD Option Service software, APL-0809: Series 7400 or later release)
- Data Programming
• Number of ports for SMFN (terminal) (ASYDL: SYS1, INDEX864, b4~5)
- Others
transferred ACD calls from other ACD systems, data programming and software install of PBX3
to PBX1, data programming and software install of PBX4 to PBX2 are required.
(f) ACD incoming calls are not distributed using alternate routing function when system is down or con-
nection trunks are all busy.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 195
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
- Data Programming
• SCF Return Error Detail Notification (ASYD: SYS1, INDEX241, b3=1) (*)
• ACD data programming (see ACDCCV command data in item 4) (*)
(g) LCD display is not operated normally on ACD agent positions.
- Software Install
• Software install for extending the number of ports for SMFN (terminal) function
(Basic ACD Option Service software, APL-0809: Series 7400 or later release)
- Data Programming
• Number of ports for SMFN (terminal) (ASYDL: SYS1, INDEX864, b4~5)
• ACD data programming (ACD position data in ACDPSN command is duplicated at multiple
nodes) (*)
3. ACD SERVICE FEATURE
This section explains general description, operating procedure, service condition, and programming procedure
for the following ACD service features.
Table 5-2 ACD SERVICE LIST
FEATURE CODE
SERVICE NAME
CHAPTER 5
Page 196
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
Table 5-2 ACD SERVICE LIST (Continued)
SERVICE NAME
FEATURE CODE
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 197
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFICE DATA DESIGN
FEATURE CODE
Table 5-2 ACD SERVICE LIST (Continued)
SERVICE NAME
CHAPTER 5
Page 198
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABANDONED CALL SEARCH - ACD
A-31A ABANDONED CALL SEARCH - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature prohibits abandoned incoming calls from being connected to agent/supervisory positions. Any
trunk call disconnected during ringback tone is considered an abandoned call and is automatically removed from
all queues. Trunk calls disconnecting after the first announcement must provide disconnect supervision to be
classified as an abandoned call and to be removed from all queues. Once the ACD has answered a call, some
central offices are unable to inform the ACD when a trunk is no longer in use. In these cases, the ACD is unable
to recognize that the trunk has been abandoned and will connect the idle trunk to an agent/supervisory position.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Step 1: A caller has dialed into the ACD and is waiting in queue since no agents were available. While waiting
the calling party hears either ringback tone, a message, or music on hold.
Step 2: The caller disconnects prior to being connected to an agent. This could be either while hearing an
announcement, listening to music on hold, or even while the agent’s phone is ringing. At this time the
abandoned call is detected and the caller will be removed from all queues he was waiting in.
Step 3: If the abandon occurred while ringing at an agent’s position, the agent will be assigned a new call from
queue if there are additional callers waiting.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Step 1: An ACD call is registered as an abandoned call under the following conditions:
a. The ACD incoming call is placed in queue and disconnects after hearing ringback tone.
b. The ACD incoming call disconnects while it is in queue at both the overflow source and the
overflow destination.
c. The ACD incoming call disconnects during the first delay announcement.
d. The ACD incoming call disconnects while hearing music or silence between the first and second
announcements.
e. The ACD incoming call disconnects during the second delay announcement.
f. The ACD incoming call disconnects after the second delay announcement and before connection
to an agent position.
g. The caller disconnects while the ACD call is being terminated to the ACD agent position and ring-
back tone is being provided.
Step 2: If the C.O. trunk is a loop start trunk (loop start trunks are unsupervised), the ACD cannot detect the
release of a call by the C.O. after the trunk has terminated or is connected to the first delay
announcement. Thus, the ACD cannot detect an abandoned call.
PROGRAMMING
None
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 199
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASSISTANCE - ACD AGENT - ACD
A-34A ASSISTANCE - ACD AGENT - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature allows an agent to call a supervisor for assistance. Activation of this feature, using the ASSIST key
during an ACD call, automatically places the active call on hold and places an assistance call to a pre-
programmed number. This number can be a PBX line for the supervisor. If the target extension of the assistance
request has display capabilities, display information identifying the call as a call for assistance will accompany
the call.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
To place an assistance request:
1. While on an ACD call, the agent whose extension is 4302, presses the ASSIST key. The ASSIST lamp
lights and ASSIST AND THEN TRANSFER is displayed at the agent position.
2. The ACD call is placed on hold and an automatic transfer to the designated supervisor is initiated.
3. The agent hears ringback tone and the supervisor is rung. The supervisor is connected to the agent. (If
supervisor is not available to take the call, the call waiting indication is provided to the supervisory position
and “BUSY” is displayed at the agent position.)
4. The assistance call will connect on the supervisor’s PBX line and will display either ASSIST NAME or
ASSIST 4302, depending on whether the agent’s name is programmed with their logon ID. Refer to Flexible
ID Codes - ACD [F-25A] for more information.
5. After consulting with the supervisor, one of three things may happen:
a. The agent may release from the call, thereby completing the transfer of the ACD call to the supervisor.
b. The supervisor may release from the call. This will reconnect the agent and the ACD call.
c. The agent may press the CONF key and invoke a three-way conference between the supervisor, the
agent and the ACD calling party.
6. When either the agent or the supervisor disconnects from the assistance call, the ASSIST lamp is
extinguished and the displays return to their original status.
To cancel an assistance request:
1. After initiating an assistance request and before being answered by a supervisor, the agent may cancel the
request by pressing the TRANSFER key or performing the switch hook flash. At that time, the agent
reconnects with the ACD call.
2. The lamp associated with ASSIST key will be extinguished, the agent will be reconnected with the ACD
calling party, and the display will return to the original display.
CHAPTER 5
Page 200
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASSISTANCE - ACD AGENT - ACD
Queuing of Assistance Requests: Valid since the PBX software Series 7400 and the ACD software R1.
1. Assistance requests may be routed to a split of supervisors or an individual supervisor. If to a split of
supervisors, multiple assistance requests can be queued. All the features which apply to CALL
TRANSFER TO SPLIT QUEUE [C-67] also apply to assistance requests to a split of supervisors.
2. If assistance requests are being routed to a split of supervisors, they will also appear on the supervisor’s
ACD line. If the calls are routed directly to an individual supervisor, they will appear on the pre-
programmed line (e.g., the supervisor’s non-ACD line).
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. During an assist call, either the agent or the supervisor can display the source of the original ACD call and
additional information.
2. The directory number used for assistance requests may not contain a “*” or a “#”.
3. Assist requests will be ignored while talking on a non-ACD line or during an emergency call.
4. The ASSIST key can be dedicated to the ASSISTANCE - ACD AGENT feature or the MONITOR ME
feature. The choice is made on a split-wide basis.
5. When an Emergency request is routed to an individual supervisor, the call is distributed to the supervisor
in Work Mode or Break Mode. While, Emergency call to a split of supervisors is not distributed to the
supervisors in those modes.
6. For emergency split queuing, to ensure the fastest processing, the only CCV steps that will be executed are
Queue to Split, Conditional Queue to Split, and Goto (the steps are followed by Pause, End CCV), and the
request will be queued at the highest priority. All other CCV steps will be ignored.
PROGRAMMING
This data is set to the agent position.
Step 1: AKYD - Assign ASSIST Key to a Function Key.
Step 2: ACDSPL - Assign number for ASSIST under the DIR numbers.
Step 3: ACDLOG - Assign Personal Assist Number.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 201
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC ANSWER - ACD
A-35A AUTOMATIC ANSWER - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature gives an agent the ability to determine whether calls should be automatically connected to the
headset or handset, or manually answered after ringing. When in Automatic Answer mode, calls are announced
using a special tone signal called Zip Tone. All normal calls are preceded by a single burst of tone. Calls which
may require special handling (forwarded or overflow calls) are preceded by two bursts of tone.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
To set AUTOMATIC ANSWER from the Manual Answer mode:
Step 1: The agent or supervisor presses the AUTO/MAN key.
term
Step 2: The D
display shows AUTO ANSWER. The AUTO/MAN lamp lights steadily.
Step 3: All subsequent calls are introduced by a Zip Tone at the agent’s or supervisor’s headset, and then the
caller is automatically on-line.
To set Manual Answer from the AUTOMATIC ANSWER mode:
Step 1: The agent or supervisor presses the AUTO/MAN key.
term
Step 2: The D
display shows MANUAL ANSWER, and the AUTO/MAN lamp is extinguished.
term
Step 3: All subsequent calls are introduced by the normal ringing of the D
set.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Step 1: The AUTO/MAN key can be pressed at any time as long as the agent or supervisor is logged onto the
ACD system.
Step 2: If the supervisor or agent is engaged in a call when the AUTO/MAN key is pressed, the answering
mode change will take effect upon the completion of the call in progress.
Step 3: If the agent or supervisor is in the Auto mode and hears Zip Tone (introducing the next call), and
presses the AUTO/MAN key at that moment, the next call will not be answered until after the current
Step 4: When the agent console is set for AUTOMATIC ANSWER, normal ACD calls are introduced by one
burst of tone (i.e., Zip Tone). Overflowed calls and calls which arrive at the agent position as a result
of forwarding from another split are announced by two bursts of tone.
Step 5: AUTOMATIC ANSWER applies only to ACD calls. It does not apply to calls which terminate to an
agent’s or supervisor’s LINE key.
Step 6: AUTOMATIC ANSWER applies only when the agent position is in the off-hook condition (through
the headset or handset) and is not engaged in any other call. If the agent position is engaged in a call
when the ACD call arrives (for example, if the agent is talking on the LINE key), then the ACD call
will terminate as though Manual Answer was set.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 202
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC ANSWER - ACD
Step 7: The answer mode change can be operated at any time a position is occupied. AUTO ANSWER
parameter in ACDSPL determines the default setting for this feature for a particular split each time
an agent or supervisor logs in.
Step 8: Agents can be restricted from changing their answer mode by not assigning an AUTO/MAN key to
the agent position. In that case, the split default will remain in effect.
term
Step 9: When a D
is left on hook in the auto answer mode, the ACD line will ring as if it were set to the
manual answer mode.
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: ACDSPL - Assign whether the default ANSWER mode is automatic or manual after logging on.
Step 2: In AKYD, assign “AUTO/MAN” key to change the answer mode.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 203
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVAILABILITY - ACD POSITION - ACD
A-37A AVAILABILITY - ACD POSITION - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
After-Call Availability allows a split to be assigned to either Automatic-Available mode or Automatic-Work
mode. This is referred to as the after-call work mode.
In Automatic-Available mode, a position becomes available to receive new ACD calls immediately upon
disconnecting from the previous call. In Automatic-Work mode, a position is unavailable to receive ACD calls
after disconnecting from the previous call. Automatic-Work mode allows the agent time to perform
miscellaneous activities that may be associated with the ACD call.
After-call work mode may have a time limit which will automatically force the position to Available mode upon
expiration.
The after-call mode and optional Work Timeout are set on a per-split basis through the ACD MAT or a MIS
terminal. Agents may change their after-call mode during an ACD call.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Automatic-Available Mode set for split:
Step 1: An agent is engaged in an ACD call. The WORK lamp is not lit and the lamp associated with the ACD
CALL key is lit.
Step 2: When the ACD call is disconnected, the lamp associated with the ACD CALL key is turned off, the
position becomes available, and READY is displayed.
Step 3: If the agent presses the WORK key before the ACD call is disconnected, the WORK lamp is lit,
WORK PENDING is displayed. The work lamp is lit until it times out or is pressed by the Agent.
Automatic-Work Mode set for split:
Step 1: An agent is engaged in an ACD call. The WORK lamp is lit and the lamp associated with the ACD
CALL key is lit.
Step 2: When the ACD call is disconnected, the lamp associated with the ACD CALL key is extinguished,
the position becomes unavailable, and WORK MODE is displayed. The work lamp is lit until it times
out or is pressed by the Agent.
Step 3: If the agent presses the WORK key before the ACD call is disconnected, the WORK lamp is
extinguished and the Automatic-Available mode is selected for this call only.
Step 4: After releasing the call and entering the Automatic-Work mode, the agent must press the WORK key
to leave the Automatic-Work mode and become available to receive new ACD calls, unless the
timeout mode is set in ACDSPL.
CHAPTER 5
Page 204
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVAILABILITY - ACD POSITION - ACD
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Step 1: The after-call mode can be operated whenever a position is occupied.
Step 2: When a position is forced into the Automatic-Work mode immediately after an agent or supervisor
logs on, the WORK key must be pressed to begin receiving ACD calls. When the first and all subse-
quent ACD calls are received, a split parameter will automatically set the appropriate after-call mode
for the position.
Step 3: The conditions for Automatic-Available/Automatic-Work mode can be set on a per-split basis. The
operating mode can be changed either from the ACD MAT or from a MIS terminal.
Step 4: During after-call Automatic-Work mode, no ACD incoming calls are allowed to terminate to the
ACD position. However, non-ACD incoming calls are terminated or originated from the position’s
MYLINE.
PROGRAMMING
Assign “WORK” key to the agent position.
AKYD - Assign AUTO/MAN to a function key.
ACDSPL - AUTO READY AFTER CALL
Note: Work mode may be canceled and reset by the manual operation even if AUTO READY AFTER CALL is
programmed in ACDSPL.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 205
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANNOUNCEMENTS - ACD
A-80A ANNOUNCEMENTS - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Other variable length announcements (4-60 seconds/2-120 seconds/1-240 seconds using NECi SPA-4DATC
Announcement Trunk Card) are provided for ACD callers by customer-provided announcement hardware using
digital announcement trunk circuits or certain analog trunk circuits. Announcements are designed to be heard
for one complete cycle from the beginning of the message. Since multiple connections to each announcement
channel are possible, an appropriate delay may be inserted to wait for the beginning of the spoken
announcement, if necessary.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Step 1: The ACD system recognizes the termination of an ACD incoming call.
Step 2: The ACD calling party hears ringback tone.
Step 3: Announcement connections are made by properly programming a Call Control Vector (CCV). Refer
Step 4: When the predetermined ring delay timing parameter set before the delay announcement has passed,
the system sends answer supervision to the central office and connects the caller to the announcement.
During this process, the ACD call retains its queue position if a “(queue to)” step has been specified
at the CCV.
Step 5: At any point after a “(queue to)” step (including during the delay announcements), if an agent be-
comes available, the ACD call is immediately connected to the agent.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Step 1: Announcements are connected only when the transfer is completed.
Step 2: The announcement source connection method can be a multiple connection or a single connection
with start point seek, depending on System Data.
Step 3: In the case of a multiple connection, all new calls that are detected within a period of time preassigned
by System Data (2~30 sec.) will receive the message simultaneously.
Step 4: This feature is applicable to ACD incoming calls from a C.O., transferred from an attendant, agent or
PBX station.
Step 5: The announcement length timer is programmed in the System data on a per-announcement basis.
Step 6: It is possible to set up multiple channels of the same announcement in a hunt arrangement to accom-
modate large volumes of simultaneously queuing calls.
Step 7: By the system data programming, at any point during the announcement when all the ACD callers
connected to the announcement are disconnected or distributed to another station/trunk, the Digital
Announcement Trunk (DAT) is released and the next announcement is sent immediately.
Step 8: In a multiple connection, a maximum of 10 ACD incoming calls can be connected to one channel of
Digital Announcement Trunks depending on the system data.
CHAPTER 5
Page 206
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANNOUNCEMENTS - ACD
Step 9: In a single connection, one ACD incoming call is connected to one channel of Digital Announcement
Trunks.
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: AADT/AADTN
Step 2: ACDCCV
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 207
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AGENT PERSONAL QUEUE - ACD
A-85A AGENT PERSONAL QUEUE - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Incoming ACD calls wait in queues until an agent is available to take the call. There are two types of queue for
waiting callers, Split Queues and Agent Personal Queues. When a call is waiting in a split queue, the next agent
who becomes available in the entire split will be assigned the longest waiting call. When a call is waiting in an
Agent Personal Queue, it can only be assigned to a single agent. A variety of overflow timeout, unavailability,
and full queue parameters can be programmed for each agent personal queue to provide for alternate call
handling when the designated agent does not get to the call in time or is unavailable.
A call is directed to a normal split queue by way of the dialed Pilot Number. A call is directed to an agent’s
personal queue by way of a Personal Pilot Number. The personal pilot number is associated with the agent’s
logon ID and is valid whenever and wherever the agent is logged onto the ACD system.
Calls (internal, external, ACD agent transfers, CCV transfers, emergency, assist, etc.) to the agent’s ACD line
are made by calling the personal pilot number. If and only if the agent is on an ACD call or is in Work mode,
the call will be queued to the agent’s personal queue. The LOGON lamp functions as the call waiting indicator
for the personal queue. Calls in the agent’s personal queue have priority over calls in any split queue.
Six pieces of data may be programmed independently for each agent’s personal queue.
The Personal Pilot Number: this is the number dialed in order to call to the personal queue.
Call Waiting Chime: alerts the agent when calls arrive in queue, may be off, on first, on always.
Maximum Queue Depth: how may calls may be waiting in the agent’s personal queue.
Forward / Full CCV: how to handle calls when the queue is full or when the agent is not available. Not available
includes the two states of a) not logged into the ACD and b) on Break.
Personal Queue Timeout: how long a call may wait in queue before overflowing.
Overflow CCV: how to handle calls which overflow in timeout.
Each call that is added to the personal queue, abandons the personal queue, or overflows from the queue invokes
a display on the agent’s console. The display indicates the current depth of the personal queue; for example,
PERS. QUEUE: 4.
A call in a personal queue does not have an associated priority. A call in a split queue does have an associated
priority because the handling of a call in a split queue is based on the call’s priority and elapsed time in the
queue. When a call overflows from a personal queue or is forwarded from a personal queue, and the call is then
queued to a split, the call must have a priority assigned to it. Calls that overflow/forward from a personal queue
are placed in one of two categories for the purpose of assigning a priority.
1. Calls that were received on an ACD trunk are given the priority of the trunk.
2. Calls that were not received on an ACD trunk are given a priority that is programmed in the ACD database.
The single priority is set on a tenant-wide basis.
CHAPTER 5
Page 208
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AGENT PERSONAL QUEUE - ACD
OPERATING PROCEDURE
The agent is handling an ACD call or is in Work mode, when a non-emergency/non-assist call to the agent’s
personal pilot number is received:
1. The call is queued to the agent’s personal queue.
2. The agent’s display shows PERS. QUEUE: 1, which indicates that a single call (in this example) is in the
agent’s personal queue.
3. The LOGON lamp, functioning as the call waiting lamp for the personal queue, begins flashing. The lamp
flashes when the queue depth is one (1) or two (2); it winks when the queue depth is three (3) or greater.
The flash and wink thresholds are fixed in the System software.
4. If programmed to do so, a chime (personal queue chime) will sound as an audio alert to the agent. The
chime can be programmed to sound for only the first call queued, for each call queued, or not to sound.
5. The calling party is immediately connected to an announcement (personal queue announcement). This
announcement, which is specifically for agent personal calls, is programmed on a tenant-wide basis. All
calls to any personal queue will hear the exact same announcement.
6. The call to the agent’s personal pilot number will have a higher priority than any non-emergency/non-assist
call queued to a split. When the agent becomes Ready the personal queue call will connect to the agent.
7. When the call is ringing and when the agent answers the call, the display shows PRS ORDERS, for four (4)
seconds, followed by TIME IN Q: 0:28 (for example). The consecutive displays indicate that the call is from
the personal queue, identify the source of the call (trunk/party, etc.), and provide the amount of time the
call spent in the queue.
8. If the timer expires, the call will be handled by the Forward/Full CCV step indicated in the ACD database.
If another ACD agent subsequently receives the overflowed call, that agent’s display will indicate that the
call overflowed from a specific personal queue; for example PRS OVF SAM.
9. If the agent logs off or enters Break mode, the call will be handled by the Forward/Full CCV step indicated
in the ACD database.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. The personal queue announcement is connected to each call as soon as the call is queued. The
announcement is only played once. Therefore, it is suggested that the announcement informs the caller that
additional announcements will not be forthcoming and that the call will be handled elsewhere (if the called
agent does not answer, and the personal queue time-out is used and expires). If the personal queue time-out
is not used, the call will remain in the personal queue until it is either handled by the agent, or the agent
logs off or goes into Break mode. In the latter case, the call will go to the personal queue forward step.
2. A personal queue overflow step and a personal queue forward step both point to a step (instruction) in a
particular Call Control Vector. The indicated steps can be any CCV instruction.
3. The flash and wink thresholds for the LOGON lamp are fixed in the system; they are not programmable.
The LOGON lamp will flash when the queue depth is one or two calls; it will wink when the queue depth
is three or more calls.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 209
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AGENT PERSONAL QUEUE - ACD
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: AIGNN - Assign telephone number for NDM.
Step 2: AMNON - Assign the pilot number (monitor number) for an individual call.
pilot number (maximum 5 digits) Note
Step 3: ACDTN -
ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER:
Assign the announcement number per tenant
announcement number for an individual call (0-58)
“0” means an announcement service is out of service for an
individual call
OVERFLOW/FORWARD PRIORITY: Priority order of queue for an individual call (1-255)
ACDLOG - Personal Queuing
PILOT NUMBER:
MAX QUEUE DEPTH:
Pilot number for an individual call (maximum 5 digits)
Maximum Queue Depth for an incoming call routed to the
agent (0-999)
PERSONAL FORWARD CCV:
CCV No. to be routed when the individual call encounters
busy status (1-900)
CCV step number to be forwarded when the individual call
encounters busy status (1-20)
OVFT:
Overflow Timeout (0-9999 sec.)
“0” means overflow service is out of service for an individ-
ual call
PERSONAL OVERFLOW CCV:
CCV number to be routed when the time limit (OVFT) is
over (1-900)
CCV step number to be routed when the time limit (OVFT)
is over (1-20)
CALL WAITING CHIME:
Call waiting chime is not available
Call waiting chime is rung only once (at the first time)
Call waiting chime is rung every time
CHAPTER 5
Page 210
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO WORK MODE FOR PBX CALLS - ACD
A-86A AUTO WORK MODE FOR PBX CALLS - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
All the agents, within a split, can automatically be placed in Work mode when handling a call on a PBX line.
Incoming and outgoing PBX calls are treated separately.
When this feature is applied to incoming PBX calls, an agent will be automatically placed in Work mode upon
receiving an incoming PBX call.
When this feature is applied to outgoing PBX calls, an agent will be automatically placed in Work mode upon
receiving dial tone on their PBX line.
If Work mode is restricted, Break mode is used instead.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
This feature is implemented through the ACDSPL command. The command data is on a split-wide basis.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 211
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANALOG ACD POSITION - ACD
A-91A ANALOG ACD POSITION - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature extends the functionality of ACD features to users operating analog station equipment. By dialing
access codes from a single-line (POTS) station an agent may invoke several features including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Logon with ID
Logon without ID
Logoff
Switch between the modes ofWork, Ready, and Break (up to nine types of Break)
Enter Tally codes
Register Trunk Trouble
Place the split into Day and Night modes
Using Off-Premise Extension (OPX) technology an agent can be situated at a remote location and still process
ACD calls with many of the features available to the local agents using digital telephone sets. With additional
hardware, a remote agent can dial in to the NEAX2400 ACD and remain continuously connected while calls are
connected to the agent one after another. The same hardware can also be programmed to call the agent back at
their home telephone number effectively reversing any long distance charges which might apply.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
A typical shift at an analog position might be as follows:
•
The agent dials the access code 4300 to logon to a split using the ID code 100. ID 100 is not currently
in use by another agent, and is programmed for Split 1 which requires an ID code. The agent is logged
on to Split 1 and hears the success announcement or the service set tone* programmed for access code
4300. The agent entersWork mode automatically upon logon.
•
•
•
After the Work Timeout expires (3 seconds, for example), the agent automatically enters Ready mode.
If ACD calls are waiting in queue one will be immediately assigned to this position.
At the conclusion of each call, the position is placed in Work mode for three seconds, then returned to
Ready mode (assuming the after call work timeout is programmed for three seconds).
At the end of the shift, the agent calls the access code to logoff and is connected to the success announce-
ment or the service set tone*.
* Available since PBX software Series 7400 and ACD software Release 3.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. The access codes dialed by agents from analog positions may be from two to five digits in length and may
not contain any “*” or “#” digits even though these digits are commonly available on the station equipment
typically used.
2. Success and failure announcements are not connected to agents performing a transfer to the access code.
Only agents without a held party hear announcements.
3. The PBX without announcement trunk can send the tone, (service set tone for success and reorder tone for
failure) to the agent since PBX software Series 7400 and ACD software Release 3.
CHAPTER 5
Page 212
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANALOG ACD POSITION - ACD
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: AMNON - Assign the Access Codes used in ACDANA
N_MNO: pilot number (monitor number) Maximum 5 digits
N_NMI: number monitored Index (1-4095)
Step 2: ACDANA
ACC:
Access code (Maximum 5 digits) assigned in AMNON.
Feature
Logon with ID code
Logon without ID code
Logoff
Ready Mode
Work Mode
Break Mode
Tally Code
Trunk Trouble
Day Mode Single
Day Mode All
Night Mode Single
Night Mode All
Permanent Work
ID:
Logon ID *Valid for “Logon with ID” Feature
Tally code *Valid for “Tally Code” Feature
Break type *Valid for “Break Mode” Feature
Success Announcement or Tone
0 = Service Set Tone*
CODE:
TYPE:
S-ANT:
1-58 = Announcement No. programmed in AADT. Analog ACD position will be
connected to the announcement upon successful operation.
Failure Announcement or Tone
F-ANT:
0 = Reorder Tone*
1-58 = Announcement No. programmed in AADT. Analog ACD position will be
connected to the announcement upon failed operation.
Note: Valid since PBX software Series 7400 and ACD software Release 3.
Step 3: ACDSPL - Assign the split data.
Step 4: ACDPSN
Position Number: My line number for the analog agent Note
ACD -
Yes -
My line number for the analog agent
Analog agent position
Note: Position and ACD number same for Analog Agent.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 213
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALTERNATE NIGHT CCV - ACD
A-93A ALTERNATE NIGHT CCV - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Alternate Night CCV provides custom routing on a per Pilot Number basis for incoming ACD calls which
encounter splits in the night mode. This feature is activated only when a split is in night mode. Consequently, if
a split is in Call Forward mode the Alternate Night CCV assigned to the Pilot Number will not be checked.
Several incoming Pilot Numbers can be directed to a common split for answering of calls during the daytime.
When the split is placed in Night Mode a new Night CCV is specified to handle the calls. Calls to Pilot Numbers
which do not specify an Alternate Night CCV will be routed to the split’s Night CCV.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. An ACD position puts the split into night mode via the NIGHT key.
2. New calls arriving at this time will route to the Alternate Night CCV specified for the Pilot Number dialed.
3. If the Pilot Number dialed does not have an Alternate Night CCV then the split’s night destination is used
as a default.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Alternate Night CCV will be used if and only if the call is not yet queued to any split and the current split
being checked is in the Night Mode.
2. Alternate Night CCV cannot be CCV Index #1, CCV Step#1; only CCV Index #2 through CCV index #900
and CCV Step#2 through 20 are allowed.
3. Incoming calls to Pilot Numbers without an Alternate Night CCV will follow the Night Mode programmed
for the split.
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: ACDPLT
CCV index number to be routed in the night mode (2-900)
CCV step number to be routed in the night mode (2-20)
Step 2: ACDSPL
NIGHT:
Destination pilot number in the night mode (maximum 5 digits)
Note: When night destination is not programmed for the split, enter the pilot number assigned in ACDPLT.
CHAPTER 5
Page 214
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AGENT ANYWHERE - ACD
A-133A AGENT ANYWHERE - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature is used in the fusion network. This feature allows the ACD agent position to be installed in any
fusion node irrespective of the node having the ACDP. (Those ACD agent positions in multiple nodes are
controlled by one ACDP). By using this feature, the ACD call terminated at the trunk in the self node can be
handled by ACD agent positions in the self node. A split can consist of ACD positions belonging to multiple
nodes.
This feature is available with the Series 7300 or later PBX software.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Refer to the condition described in Section 2.2, ACD In a Fusion Network Data Assignment of this chapter.
2. ACDP is in only one node of the Fusion Network.
3. The node that has the most ACD agent positions must be specified for the node providing ACDP.
4. After the system initialization is complete in the node providing the ACDP, it will take around five minutes
until the ACD service becomes effective in all nodes. (It depends on the quantity of the ACD data. The
shortest time is 30 seconds.)
The reason for the delay is because of the time to complete transferring the ACD data written in the Variable
Network Data Module (VNDM) to all nodes.
5. The pilot number (including the personal monitored number and the dialed number for ANALOG ACD
POSITION [A-91]) has to be registered in the Network Data Memory (programmed in AMNON).
6. After the ACD pilot number is added or deleted, it takes around five minutes until the new pilot number
becomes effective in all nodes. (It depends on the quantity of the ACD data. The shortest time is 30
seconds.) When adding or deleting ACD pilot number, the VNDM data is automatically transferred to all
nodes. Thus, the addition or deletion of the pilot number has to be done in low traffic.
7. The node providing the ACDP must be initialized when all the other nodes are in on-line mode.
8. When you initialize the node that does not accommodate the ACDP, you must also initialize the node
providing the ACDP.
9. When you add a node/nodes to the network, you have to initialize the node that accommodates the ACDP.
Until you complete the initialization of the node providing the ACDP, you cannot use the ACD agent
position or the ACD trunk in the additional node.
10. The MIS must be installed in the node providing the ACDP.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 215
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AGENT ANYWHERE - ACD
PROGRAMMING
ASYDL
SYS1, INDEX864: Internal ACDP is provided (ACD node only)
SYS1, INDEX512: FPC number of the self-node (I-253)
SYS1, INDEX866: FPC number of the node that accommodates the ACDP (1-253)
ASYDN
SYS1, INDEX533: FPC number of the node that has the standard VNDM (1-253)
(assign the FPC number of the node providing ACDP).
CHAPTER 5
Page 216
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BREAK MODE - ACD
B-20A BREAK MODE - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature allows an agent to take their position out of the queue without logging off or entering Automatic-
Work mode. This feature is useful if the agent will be away from the position for a short time, such as for lunch,
a coffee break, etc. Since the agent does not log off when using BREAK MODE, no other agent may log onto
this position.
The user can select, for each split, a single break type or nine break types. If nine break types are selected for a
split, then whenever an agent in the split requests a break, the agent is prompted for the break type. The
Navigator Management Information System (MIS) allows each break type to be defined with a six-character
string, such as “coffee” or “lunch”. This string will be used for Navigator MIS reporting purposes.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
To activate BREAK MODE (single break type):
1. The agent presses the BREAK key and the associated lamp is lit.
2. If the agent is not on a call, the display will show ON BREAK. If the agent is on a call, the display will show
BREAK PENDING. At the end of the call, the display changes toON BREAK.
To activate BREAK MODE (nine break types):
1. The agent presses the BREAK key and the associated lamp is lit.
2. The display shows BREAK TYPE?
3. The agent enters a digit from “1” to “9”, to indicate the break type, then enters “#” to complete the input.
4. The display shows BREAK TYPE = N, where N is the number the agent entered in the previous step. This
display will be shown for four seconds. Following this display, if the agent is not on a call, the display will
show ON BREAK. If the agent is on a call, the display will show BREAK PENDING. At the end of the call,
the display will change to ON BREAK.
5. If the agent does not indicate a break type (“1” to “9”), within thirty seconds of pressing the BREAK key,
the system will default to break type 1, and BREAK TYPE = 1 will be displayed for four seconds. Following
this display, if the agent is not on a call, the display will show ON BREAK. If the agent is on a call, the
display will show BREAK PENDING. At the end of the call, the display will change to ON BREAK.
To cancel BREAK MODE (single break type or nine break types):
1. The agent presses the BREAK key.
2. The display shows the time spent on break in minutes and seconds. For example, BREAK OVER 35:20.
3. The BREAK lamp is extinguished.
4. The WORK lamp indicates whether the agent will be placed in the Work Mode or Ready Mode when the
Break Mode is concluded. By operating the WORK key prior to exiting Break Mode the agent may specify
what their next mode will be.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 217
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BREAK MODE - ACD
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Logging off is permitted while in Break Mode, by pressing the LOGON key. The after-call mode may be
toggled while on break and set to either Automatic-Work or Automatic-Available.
2. When Break Mode is set at a position, incoming ACD calls are not allowed to terminate to the position.
3. Non-ACD calls can be originated from or terminated to a position, while the position is in Break Mode.
4. This feature’s status can be monitored at a Navigator MIS terminal via the agent current status display and
the agent audit report.
5. Every agent position and supervisor position may have a BREAK key.
6. The operation of the BREAK key allows the MIS to track work time and non-work time.
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: ADYD - Assign BREAK key to function key.
CHAPTER 5
Page 218
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAD CALL NOTIFICATIONS - ACD
B-21A BAD CALL NOTIFICATIONS - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Bad Call Notifications are printed on the PBX system’s MAT printer when they occur. Even though the name
indicates that some serious error has occurred there are several “Bad Call Notifications” which are for
informational purposes only and do not really indicate an error situation. The term “Bad Call Notification”
cannot be changed but ACD users should consider the 6-H reports as “ACD Information Report” regardless of
what the header information says. For details about system message “6-H”, see Section 3.2.3 in Chapter 9.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Step 1: The noise or an error occurs in the communication or the agent wants to see the information of the
connection in progress.
Step 2: The agent presses the TRKTRBL key during handling the call.
Step 3: The ACD information report is printed on the PBX system’s MAT printer.
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: ADYD - Assign “TRKTRBL” to function key.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 219
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL DISTRIBUTION TO AGENTS - ACD
C-35A CALL DISTRIBUTION TO AGENTS - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ACD calls are automatically distributed among the agents in a split such that when an agent becomes available
the longest waiting call with the highest priority in the queue is assigned to that agent. Refer toPriority Queuing
During periods when more than one agent is available and there are no calls in the queue, the first incoming
ACD call is assigned, based on a two-level algorithm, to an agent.
The first level of the algorithm seeks the agent who has the highest preference level specified for the split. An
agent who is servicing a single split is considered to have the highest possible preference level (“1”) specified
for the split. An agent who is servicing multiple splits can have a preference level ranging from “1” (highest) to
“250” (lowest) specified for the split (Since an agent is allowed to handle calls terminated at a maximum of four
split, only four privilege order is applied to each split). The preference levels for an agent who is servicing
multiple splits are set in the ACD database. Refer to the description of the Multi-Split Agent - ACD [M-90A]
for more details.
The second level of the algorithm seeks the agent who has been waiting to service an incoming ACD call (in
Ready mode) for the longest period of time.
The following example illustrates the operation of the two-level algorithm.
Agent Preference Example
Preference
Agent Name
Waiting Time
Level
Allan
Barbara
Charles
Denise
3
1
1
2
55 seconds
30 seconds
25 seconds
40 seconds
The first incoming ACD call will be sent to Barbara. The first level of the algorithm removes Allan and Denise
from consideration since their respective preference levels are lower than the preference level that Barbara and
Charles have in common. The second level of the algorithm removes Charles from consideration since Charles
has been waiting to service an incoming ACD call (in Ready mode) for a shorter period of time than Barbara.
Only incoming ACD calls directed to pilot numbers or personal pilot numbers, and other calls generated within
the ACD processor (such as Assist and Emergency calls) may be connected to agents’ ACD lines. For proper
operation of the ACD, direct calls to an agent’s ACD line from stations, DIDs, Tie trunks, CCIS trunks,
attendants or any other method (such as call forwarding to agents’ ACD lines) are not permitted and must be
restricted by the proper programming of the PBX database.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 220
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL DISTRIBUTION TO AGENTS - ACD
OPERATING PROCEDURE
No agents available:
1. An incoming ACD call is queued.
2. An agent becomes available.
3. The longest waiting ACD call in the queue with the highest priority is assigned to that agent.
Agents available:
1. There are no incoming ACD calls.
2. Agents are queued as they become available.
3. An incoming ACD call arrives.
4. The ACD call is assigned to the agent who has the highest preference level, and who, among those agents
with the same preference level, has been waiting to service an incomingACD call (in Ready mode) for the
longest period of time.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. When calls are waiting in queue, all calls of a higher priority will be answered (in their order of arrival)
before calls of a lower priority, regardless of how long a lower-priority call has been waiting.
2. Upon receiving a call, an agent may transfer the call to any destination allowed under normal transfer
conditions. When transferring to a CALL PARK [C-29] location, the agent will hear only a short burst of
Service Set Tone.
3. Do Not Disturb (DND) Key
The DND Key may have undesirable side effects if utilized at an agent’s ACD position. For example: an
agent position left in Ready mode but with the DND feature set for the position’s PBX line (my line) will
still receive and ACD call (as a result of the Ready mode) but the position will not ring (as a result of the
DND feature being set). It is up to the ACD user to understand and accept all potential side effects of using
the DND key at an ACD position.
PROGRAMMING
None
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 221
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL TRANSFER TO SPLIT QUEUE - ACD
C-67A CALL TRANSFER TO SPLIT QUEUE - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature allows calls to be transferred by agents or supervisors, PBX station users, or attendants to splits in
the ACD system. The transferred call will be connected to an available agent or the call will be queued, if agents
are not available. The transferring party is allowed to remain on the line until the agent answers (screened
transfer) or may complete the transfer while still in queue or while ringing the agent (blind transfer).
OPERATING PROCEDURE
From a PBX station:
1. The PBX station user transfers the calling party to the ACD by dialing a pilot number.
2. A Call Control Vector (CCV) associated with the pilot number is processed and the transferred call may be
queued to a split.
3. The PBX transferring station processes the CCV until an agent answers, the PBX station finishes the
transfer, or the party being transferred disconnects. All announcement connections indicated in the CCV
are skipped over in the case of a transferred call. The PBX transferring party hears only ringback, while
transferring, until an agent answers.
4. The transferring station user may either disconnect, completing the transfer, or may press the TRANSFER
key again, aborting the transfer. Attempts to conference at this point will be ignored.
5. If the transferring station disconnects and completes the transfer, the calling party will then begin
processing the remainder of the CCV, including announcements.
From an ACD agent’s or supervisor’s position:
1. The agent or supervisor presses their TRANSFER key while on an ACD call or a PBX call and transfers to
the ACD by dialing a pilot number.
2. A CCV associated with the pilot number is processed and the transferred call may be queued to a split.
3. The agent processes the CCV until another agent answers, the agent finishes the transfer, or the transferred
party disconnects. All announcement connection instructions in the CCV are skipped over. Ringback Tone
(RBT) is provided to the transferring agent until another agent answers.
4. The transferring agent may either disconnect (completing the transfer), or may press the TRANSFER key
again, aborting the transfer. Attempts to conference at this point will be ignored.
5. If the transferring agent disconnects and completes the transfer, the calling party will begin processing the
remainder of the CCV, including announcements.
CHAPTER 5
Page 222
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL TRANSFER TO SPLIT QUEUE - ACD
From an attendant console:
1. The attendant transfers the calling party to the ACD by dialing a pilot number.
2. RBT is provided to the attendant. At this point the attendant may either complete or cancel the transfer. If
the attendant completes the transfer, the transferred party will begin processing the CCV, including all
announcements. Note that except for transfers across CCIS, no CCV processing is done while the attendant
listens to RBT. The attendant must complete the transfer before CCV processing takes effect. For attendant
transfers across CCIS, CCV processing will begin when the attendant first receives RBT.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Any calling party, except attendants, may be transferred into a split queue.
2. For attendant transfers to a split queue across CCIS, CCV processing will begin when the attendant first
receives RBT. However, for non-CCIS attendant transfers to a split queue, CCV processing will begin only
after the attendant completes the transfer.
3. Except for calls across CCIS, attendants are only allowed to transfer calls to pilot numbers. They may not
call pilot numbers directly. If an attendant dials pilot number directly, the call is ignored and the attendant
will hear RBT indefinitely.
4. If an attendant dials a pilot number directly across CCIS, the call will be treated as a normal trunk call.
5. If an agent or PBX station user transfers a call to a split queue and hangs up before the agent at the
destination answers, recall does not occur when the don’t answer timer expires.
6. In a call transfer to a split queue, overflow service is provided to calls placed in queue.
PROGRAMMING
None
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 223
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL WAITING INDICATION - LCD DISPLAY/CW LAMP - ACD
C-68A CALL WAITING INDICATION - LCD DISPLAY/CW LAMP - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature provides visual indication of a split’s current queue depth by the use of the CW lamp (Call Waiting)
and the position’s display. The CW lamp is always operative but can only provide an approximate indication of
the queue depth. The position’s display can show the current queue depth precisely but the display is provided
periodically as the agent processes calls. An optional Call Waiting Key may be programmed and will generate
a display of the current queue depth when pressed.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. When the number of ACD calls in a split’s queue is greater than or equal to the call-waiting-on threshold,
the CW lamp is turned on.
2. When the number of ACD calls in the split’s queue is greater than or equal to the call-waiting-flash
threshold, the CW lamp flashes. A database setting can enable a chime to sound at positions in the WORK
mode when the lamp comes on or begins flashing. For more details information, refer to Call Waiting Lamp
3. Each time an ACD agent or supervisor is assigned a new call or each time they go into Work mode, the
number of calls waiting in the split’s queue is displayed on their position.
4. When an agent or supervisor presses the LOGON key while engaged in a call, the calling party
identification of the original incoming ACD call (trunk calls only) is displayed for that position followed
by the number of calls waiting in the split queue.
5. For an on-demand display of the current queue depth and longest waiting caller the agent may press the
Call Waiting Key while in any mode.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. The lighting of the CW lamp may be somewhat delayed and is not intended to depict instantaneous queue
status.
2. Queue depth is only displayed on an agent’s position when there are calls waiting in the split queue.
3. Split data must be set for the desired threshold of calls in queue required to make the CW lamp illuminate
or flash to indicate call thresholds have been exceeded.
term
4. The call waiting indication can be provided on the D
programmable line appearance.
agent or supervisor console in any unused
5. The DLC and ELC line cards must be of the proper version to provide “call waiting indication”.
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: AKYD - Assign the CW lamp to the agent/supervisory position
KYN:
Key Number
KYI = 1 (Function key)
FKY = 47 (CW lamp)
CHAPTER 5
Page 224
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLING PARTY IDENTIFICATION - ACD
C-70A CALLING PARTY IDENTIFICATION - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
term
This feature allows calling party information to be displayed on the LCD of the D
assigned to an ACD agent. The format of the calling party information follows:
when an incoming call is
1. Incoming Trunk and Circuit Information:
A unique twenty-character name for an incoming trunk group along with the trunk circuit number within
the group can be displayed. This display is commonly used for ringdown trunks. For example,NATIONAL
7.
2. Called Number Identification: LDN
When an incoming trunk calls a particular pilot number, an ID associated with the pilot number can be
displayed instead of the twenty-character name of the incoming trunk group and the trunk circuit number.
This display is commonly used for DID trunks. For example, SALES DEPT.
3. Internal Directory Number:
The internal directory number (up to five digits) assigned to the circuit can be displayed. This display is
used for PBX stations calling into the ACD. For example, 70626.
4. Overflow Connections:
When a non-transferred call is assigned to an agent in a secondary split, an overflow message is displayed
before the calling party identification indicating that this call is not being assigned to an agent in the split
for which it was first queued. For example, OVF SHIPPING. If the call has overflowed from an agent’s
personal queue, the display will identify the call as such and will show the name of the called agent; for
5. Transfer Connections:
When a call being transferred by one agent is answered by another agent, an indication of who is transfer-
ring the call is displayed. For example, XFR JONATHAN.
6. Talking notification:
While an agent is engaged in a call, the Calling Party Identification of the original incoming ACD call,
along with the number of calls waiting in the split queue, can be displayed by pressing the LOGON key.
For example, NATIONAL 17 is displayed prior to SHIPPING: 5. A display showing the amount of time in
queue is provided to the agent position when a call is assigned (ringing) and again when the call is an-
swered. For example, TIME IN Q: 9:17. The time shown is computed as the elapsed time since the caller
entered the ACD system and when it is answered (or started ringing).
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 225
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLING PARTY IDENTIFICATION - ACD
7. If an incoming ACD call enters the system through a pilot number and the receiving agent uses a pilot
number to transfer the call to an agent in another split, the transferred call will be identified by the ID
associated with the latter pilot number. If an ID is not associated with the latter pilot number, the call will
be identified by the ID associated with the original pilot number. For example, an agent in Split A receives
a call via a pilot number with an associated ID of “SERVICE”, resulting in SERVICE being displayed at
the agent’s position. The agent uses a pilot number to transfer the call to Split B. Split B has an associated
ID of “PARTS”. The agent who receives the transferred call in Split B will have PARTS displayed at their
position. If an ID was not associated with the pilot number applied in the transfer, the agent in Split B will
have SERVICE displayed at their position. Refer to Pilot Numbers - ACD [P-40A] for related information.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
This feature is assigned through ACDPLT and ACDTG MAT commands.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Pilot number ID takes precedence over incoming trunk gate and circuit ID when both are programmed.
2. If no special Calling Party Identification is chosen for a particular trunk, the PBX defaults is displayed.
term
term
3. Names displayed is limited to sixteen alphanumeric characters on D
name (20 characters) is displayed.
Series III. On D
Series E, whole
4. The character display data for C.O. Line/Tie Line calls can be assigned on the basis of each trunk route.
5. The character display data for this service is assigned from the ACDMAT.
6. The Calling Party Identification is displayed for only four seconds; then, the default PBX display is shown.
7. Call type and circuit number of the incoming call may be displayed before Calling Party Identification
information.
PROGRAMMING
Assign the name for incoming call identification by following commands.
Step 1: ACDPLT - Assign name corresponding to the pilot number.
NAME: up to 20 characters
Step 2: ACDTG - Assign name corresponding to the route number.
NAME: up to 20 characters
Step 3: ACDSPL - Assign the name corresponding to the split.
NAME: up to 20 characters
Note 1: Since NAME programmed in ACDPLT and in ACDTG may be duplicated to display the trunk incoming call,
assign NAME in one of those two commands, and skip NAME parameter in the other command.
Note 2: When MIS is used, name corresponding to the pilot number and name corresponding to the split are pro-
grammed from MIS terminal.
CHAPTER 5
Page 226
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL CONTROL VECTOR - ACD
C-108A CALL CONTROL VECTOR - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A Call Control Vector (CCV) is a series of steps that describe how an incoming ACD call is to be handled. A
CCV can consist of a maximum of 20 steps. Each step of a CCV is an instruction for handling the call at a
specific time. The steps may be programmed in any sequence (see Service Condition #1) and will be processed
in order until an agent answers the call.
When an incoming call is presented to the ACD system, it is processed according to the CCV specified for the
dialed pilot number (refer to Pilot Numbers - ACD [P-40A]). Thus, specifying different CCVs for different pilot
numbers can produce a variety of call handling patterns. Countless combinations of CCV steps are possible and
have been put together in very creative ways to solve complex call handling requirements.
A CCV is a timed sequence of events which control incoming ACD calls prior to their connection to an agent.
It is important to understand the timing of CCV instructions in order to construct CCVs which process calls at
the proper tempo. The following table shows how much time is used for each CCV instruction. Only after that
amount of time has passed, a caller will proceed to the next step in the CCV.
Call Control Vector Timing
CCV Step Action
takes this much time
(Alphabetical Order)
Announcement
wait until beginning of announcement or 30 seconds whichever comes first,
then proceed to next instruction
Blank
0 seconds, next instruction processed immediately
0 seconds, next instruction processed immediately
0 seconds, next instruction processed immediately
wait 2 seconds, then proceed with CCV #X step#Y.
0 seconds, next instruction processed immediately
Conditional Queue to Split
Dequeue from Split
Goto CCV X:Y
Hang Up
If Estimated Time to Answer
0 seconds, process first or second instruction immediately based on testing
ETA
If Not Queued then Busy
If Not Queued then Goto X:Y
IVR Announcement
IVRDN
0 seconds, busy tone provided immediately
wait 2 seconds, then proceed with CCV #X step#Y.
wait 2 seconds, then proceed with IVR Announcement
0 seconds, next instruction processed immediately
0 seconds, next instruction processed immediately
wait X seconds (1 to 999) then proceed with next instruction
0 seconds, next instruction processed immediately
Wait 2 seconds, then proceed with Ring Delay
New Priority
Pause X
Queue to Split
Ring Delay
Skip Percent
0 seconds, first or second instruction processed immediately based on
percentage
Transfer To
Up Priority
If transfer succeeds, CCV processing is complete, otherwise wait 2 seconds
and process next instruction.
0 seconds, next instruction processed immediately
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 227
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL CONTROL VECTOR - ACD
A list of the available CCV instructions and their associated variables follows.
1. QUEUE TO SPLIT #n
This instruction directs a call to the specified split. The calling party will be connected to an agent within
the split, if an agent is available. If an agent is not available to accept the call, the call will be placed in a
queue of calls waiting to be serviced by an agent at a priority level determined by the Pilot Number dialed.
If the target split’s queue is full, the call will be handled by the next step in the CCV. The next step could
provide alternate routing (refer to item #4).
A call can only be queued to four splits simultaneously. If a call encounters a Queue to Split instruction and
the call is already successfully queued to four splits, the call will be connected to an agent in the target split,
if an agent is available. If an agent is not available, the call will not be placed in the queue for that split. The
call will be handled by the next step in the CCV.
When a Queue to Split instruction points to a split that is in Night Mode or is forwarded, the call will follow
the target split’s night routing of forward routing only if the call is not already in a queue. If the call is
already in a queue (or queues), the Queue to Split instruction will be ignored. The call will be handled by
the next step in the CCV.
2. CONDITIONAL QUEUE TO SPLIT #n
This instruction directs a call to the specified split. The split will not accept the call unless a predefined
condition (to be explained) is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the calling party will be connected to
an agent within the split, if an agent is available. If an agent is not available to accept the call, the call will
be placed in a queue of calls waiting to be serviced by an agent. If the condition is not satisfied, the call will
be handled by the next step in the CCV. The next step could provide alternate routing (refer to item #4).
The condition serves to control the traffic that the split will accept. The condition is a property of the split,
and is defined in the ACD database. There are three options for imposing a condition. The conditions are
mutually exclusive; therefore, only one of the following three conditions can be selected.
a. Agents Available [minimum]
The ACD system will ascertain the number of available agents in the split at the time the call is pre-
sented. If the number of available agents is greater than or equal to the minimum specified, the call is
accepted and connected to the longest-waiting available agent. For example, if the minimum agent
threshold is set at “3”, then calls are connected if there are three or more available agents. If there are
two or fewer available agents, the call will be handled by the next step in the CCV.
b. Calls in Queue [maximum]
The ACD system will ascertain the number of calls in the split’s queue at the time the call is presented.
If the queue depth is less than the maximum specified, the call may be queued, or connected if agents
are available. For example, if the maximum queue depth is set at “3”, and there are fewer than three
calls in queue, calls will be queued, or connected to an available agent. If there are three or more calls
in queue, the call will be handled by the next step in the CCV.
CHAPTER 5
Page 228
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL CONTROL VECTOR - ACD
c. No Calls Accepted
The split will not accept any call that is directed to the split by a Conditional Queue to Split instruction.
The split will only accept calls that are presented through a Queue to Split instruction.
A call can only be queued to four splits, simultaneously. If a call encounters a Conditional Queue to Split
instruction and the call is already successfully queued to four splits, the call will be connected to an agent
in the target split, if an agent is available. If an agent is not available, the call will not be placed in the queue
for that split. The call will be handled by the next step in the CCV.
When a Conditional Queue to Split instruction points to a split that is either in Night Mode or forwarded,
the call will be handled by the next step in the CCV.
3. DEQUEUE #n
This instruction removes a call from a specified queue or from all the queues in which the call cur-
rently resides.
4. IF NOT QUEUED GOTO CCV #x STEP #y or BUSY
This instruction provides an alternate routing option if a call cannot be queued for one of the following
reasons.
a. The target split of a Queue to Split instruction has a full queue.
b. The target split of a Conditional Queue to Split instruction does not satisfy the preimposed condition.
c. The call is already successfully queued to four splits.
d. The target split of a Queue to Split instruction is in Night Mode or forwarded, and the call is already
queued to other split(s).
e. The target split of a Conditional Queue to Split instruction is in Night Mode or forwarded.
If none of the above reasons exists, then alternate routing is not implemented and the call will be handled
by the next step in the CCV.
If one of the above reasons exists, then alternate routing is implemented in one of the following manners.
a. If a CCV number and a step number are included in the If not Queued instruction, then processing will
continue at the specified CCV number and step number.
b. If a CCV number and a step number are not included in the If not Queued instruction, and the call is
not queued to other split(s), then busy tone will be returned to the calling party. The CCV processing
will be halted, and the calling party must hang up.
c. If a CCV number and a step number are not included in the If not Queued instruction, and the call is
queued to other split(s), then the call will be handled by the next step in the CCV.
The If not Queued, Goto or Busy instruction will be performed only if it follows a Queue to Split or a
Conditional Queue to Split instruction. If it does not follow one of the queuing instructions, the If not
Queued, Goto or Busy instruction will be ignored and the call will be handled by the next step in the CCV.
5. PAUSE #n
This instruction delays the processing of the CCV for the specified period of time. During that period of
time, the call will remain in the same state it was in when the Pause step was encountered. After the spec-
ified period of time has elapsed, the processing of the CCV will resume at the step which follows the Pause
step.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 229
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL CONTROL VECTOR - ACD
6. ANNOUNCEMENT #n
This instruction connects the caller to the beginning of the specified announcement.
Incoming callers with held parties cannot be connected to an announcement, although this will not affect
their CCV processing.
An announcement may be used in any CCV and announcements can be shared among splits.
Announcements can be used in any order and can be repeated as often as desired, although each should be
followed by a pause step with a pause time at least as long as the announcement.
7. GOTO CCV #x STEP #y
This instruction invokes a pause of two seconds before the processing of the CCV continues at the specified
step, in the specified CCV. The specified CCV can be the CCV that is currently handling the call, or it can
be a different CCV in the same tenant.
8. SKIP %
This instruction causes the next CCV step to be bypassed by a percentage of the calls that reach this step.
The indicated percentage of calls will skip the next step and continue immediately with the CCV step that
is two steps after the SKIP instruction. The remaining calls will not honor the SKIP instruction and will
process the next CCV step. Thus, the SKIP instruction acts as a filter to distribute calls, on a percentage
basis, between two consecutive steps in the CCV.
9. HANG UP
This instruction disconnects the call by breaking the station or trunk connection. CCV processing is
terminated after this instruction. The Hang Up step is designed to provide positive forward disconnect on
a supervised trunk circuit particularly after having heard an announcement. Station users who encounter a
Hang Up step while calling into an ACD pilot number may receive mixed results based on their exact call
scenario at the time as well as the PBX software level in use. The possible results include busy tone, reorder
tone or the inadvertent completion of a transfer. Because of these variations for station users the feature is
best described as “unpredictable” for stations and should be avoided if possible.
10. TRANSFER TO PBX #n
This instruction transfers the call to the specified Transfer Index Number (1-10). A Transfer Index Number
is associated with a telephone number; the telephone number can have a maximum of twenty-two digits.
The telephone number can be associated with an internal extension, an operator, a UCD group, voice mail,
an outside number via Least Cost Routing (LCR), or a system speed dial code. This instruction removes
the call from every queue in which it currently resides.
With the exception of transfers across CCIS, if the specified telephone number is not busy, this instruction
will complete the CCV call processing. If the specified telephone number is busy, CCV processing will
resume at the next step following a two-second delay. If the transfer is across CCIS, this instruction will
complete the CCV processing whether the specified telephone number is busy or not.
If the transfer is to a local UCD group with all members busy UCD queuing will not take place even if the
feature is enabled. The call will continue processing the CCV in an all-busy UCD group.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 230
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL CONTROL VECTOR - ACD
11. NEW PRIORITY #n
This instruction is used to change the current priority associated with a call to a different priority in all the
splits to which the call is currently queued. The priority that is specified in the instruction can be either
higher or lower than the present priority.
The variable associated with the instruction is a priority. If a call with a priority of “8” encounters the in-
struction “New Priority 15”, the call’s priority will change to “15” in all splits it is currently queued to.
12. UP PRIORITY #n
This instruction is used to change the current priority associated with a call to a higher priority in all the
splits where the call is currently queued.
The variable associated with the instruction is the amount by which to increment the priority. If a call with
priority of “14” encounters the instruction “Up Priority 4”, the call’s priority will change to “10”. A priority
of “10” is four levels higher than a priority of “14”.
13. BLANK
This instruction does not invoke any call processing action. The call will immediately process the next step
with no delay.
The Blank instruction is used to simplify future modifications to a CCV. If a CCV is constructed without
Blank instructions, and new instructions are added to the CCV at a later time, then the changes could force
a major restructuring of the CCV. If a CCV is constructed with Blank instructions, and new instructions are
added to the CCV at a later time, then the new instructions can take the place of Blank instructions.
14. IVR ANNOUNCEMENT #n
This instruction will connect a caller to an IVR port for the purpose of playing a customized announcement.
The IVR equipment will be notified via an Infolink message which announcement has been requested (1
to 99) and which port was used for connection. It will be up to the IVR to speak the desired announcement
and inform the ACD when the announcement is complete.
15. IVR DN #n * Available since PBX software Series 7400 and ACD software Release 3.
Before this enhancement only one IVR can be used on a tenant basis.
A PBX directory number that enables the ACD to access a port on an Interactive Voice Response Unit
(IVR). Each IVR port should have a corresponding IVR directory number. All such numbers should be set
up on the PBX as members of a ICD group and can be accessed via the UCD pilot number. This UCD pilot
number should be entered as the IVR pilot number using the ACDTN command.
This step must be assigned before Item 10 “IVR Announcement #n”. If not, IVR announce step will be ex-
ecuted by the IVR port number programmed in ACDTN.
16. ETA Greater Than / ETA Less Than
This instruction checks all queues a caller is waiting in and determines the best estimated time to answer
(ETA). Using this ETA in a comparison with the parameter to the ETA > or ETA < instruction determines
whether the next CCV instruction should be skipped.
If result of ETA comparison is TRUE, next instruction is PROCESSED.
If result of ETA comparison isFALSE, next instruction is SKIPPED.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 231
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL CONTROL VECTOR - ACD
Imagine this small CCV example:
3. Queue to
1. this is the regular split queue
4. ETA Greater
5. Goto CCV step
6. Queue to
120
8.
3. this could be the standard overflow split
7. === End ===
8. Queue to
4. this could be the message center split
9. === End ===
If a caller is queued to Split 1 and finds that his ETA for that split is greater than 120 seconds (2 minutes)
then the call will goto Step 8 and will queue to Split 4, the message center. If the current ETA is less than
or equal to 120 seconds (ETA tests FALSE) then Step 5 will be skipped and the call will continue with Step
6 and queue to the standard overflow split.
* ETA less than 11 seconds will be considered as 0 second.
ETA steps should be used with some amount of leeway since they can only be approximations of an esti-
mated time to answer. Many events could occur to cause the ETA estimate to be incorrect by a considerable
amount of time.
QUEUE TO SPLIT #n (Item 1) or CONDITIONAL QUEUE TO SPLIT #n (Item 2) step must be assigned
before ETA Greater/Less step. When queuing to more than one split,ETA in the originally queued split is
compared with the threshold value of ETA Greater/Less step.
17. Split ETA > (Greater Than) /Split ETA < (Less Than) *Available since the PBX software Series 7400 and
the ACD software R3.
This instruction allows CCV processing to be decided based on the Estimated Time to Answer (ETA) for
a specified split, as opposed to being based on the ETA of a call in queue. It then compares that calculated
Split ETA with a specified number of seconds. If the greater than (>) or less than (<) comparison is met,
the next CCV step is processed. The next step is skipped if the comparisons are not met. This allows the
CCV to determine the ETA of a split before queuing a call to the split, thus allowing the decision of whether
or not to queue a call, for example, to be determined by the current split traffic level.
ETA less than 11 seconds will be considered as 0 second.
18. Ring Delay #n * Available since the PBX software Series 7400 and the ACD software R3.
This instruction must appear prior to any Queue to Split steps in the CCV in order for it to have the desired
effect. The Ring Delay feature is intended to slow down the connection of incoming calls to agents and give
a window of opportunity for a host computer to paint an appropriate screen of information for the agent
which may aid in proper answering of the call.
Ring Delay specifies a number of seconds to wait after selecting which agent should receive the next call
in queue. The actual ringing of the agent’s phone will be intentionally delayed by ‘n’ seconds. An Infolink
application can send a command to the ACD to terminate the artificial delay before time expires if it has
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 232
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL CONTROL VECTOR - ACD
19. END
This instruction terminates the processing of the CCV. The call remains in any queue or queues in which it
currently resides, and the caller will be connected to an agent when one is available.
The call processing in a CCV will terminate, without an End instruction, when the entire twenty steps of
the CCV have been executed. If the CCV has fewer than 20 instructions, the steps without instructions are
treated as Blank instructions.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
The desired Call Control Vectors are created through ACD MAT assignments.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. The programming of CCVs is not examined by the ACD system. It is the responsibility of the user to
provide a logical sequence of instructions, which produces the desired call handling, in every CCV.
2. An announcement is not guaranteed to be available from its beginning, when an Announcement instruction
is encountered. An additional Pause instruction may need to be programmed in order to provide proper
3. The If not Queued Goto or Busy instruction is applicable to DID & Tie type trunks. In the case of ringdown
trunks, ringback tone is controlled by the C.O.; therefore, busy tone cannot be given to the caller.
4. A “Transfer To” step in the CCV may send a caller off to any number within the number plan established
for the PBX system. It is not feasible to describe the exact operation of such a transfer to all possible
numbers under all possible conditions. Many of the cases are described below.
a. When the target is a UCD pilot number in the PBX: If a member of the UCD is available, the call will
be transferred. If there are no members available in the UCD, the call remains in the ACD side and
continues the CCV with the step following the “Transfer To”. The call will not queue to the UCD
group even if queuing in the UCD is enabled.
b. If the overflow destination is an ordinary station: If the station at the overflow destination is a member
station of a station hunting group:
c. If transfer service is set for the station at the overflow destination:
d. When the station at the target is busy, the Transfer-To instruction may be retried with a Goto
instruction.
e. When the station at the target is in make-busy state or lockout state, no transfer takes place.
f. If the overflow destination is an attendant console: Transfer is executed only when the attendant
console group is in Day mode, or when a night attendant console is provided and is in service during
Night mode.
g. No transfer will take place when the attendant console group is in Night mode and no night attendant
console is provided.
h. If the transfer target is an external line:
i. To designate the external line number for the overflow destination, an abbreviated code for SPEED
CALLING - SYSTEM [S-3] is used.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 233
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL CONTROL VECTOR - ACD
j. A maximum of 1000 abbreviated codes can be assigned for the ACD.
k. For selecting external routes, LCR can be used.
l. When an overflow has encountered all external trunks busy, it may be retried with a Goto instruction.
m. When an overflow has encountered all senders busy, it may be retried with a Goto instruction.
n. Once an ACD call has been connected to an external trunk, it may not be distributed to agent positions
at the overflow origination side even if the destination distant office happens to bebusy.
o. Tandem connections which release on both the incoming route and the outgoing route cannot be
supervised and should be restricted by means of System Data programming.
p. A transfer to step will not be executed if it is programmed directly after an announcement step. A
Pause step, the length of the previous announcement must be programmed after the announcement.
PROGRAMMING
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 234
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL WAITING LAMP WITH CHIME - ACD
C-110A CALL WAITING LAMP WITH CHIME - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
An optional chime is available, on a split-wide basis, as a companion audio signal to the visual signals offered
by the CW lamp (Call Waiting). The CW lamp can be programmed to light or flash when a given quantity of
calls reside in a split queue. There are separate thresholds for lighting the lamp and for flashing the lamp. Refer
to Call Waiting Indication - LCD Display/CW Lamp - ACD [C-68A] for related information. If the chime is
selected, the chime will sound at each agent position which is in the Work mode at the time the CW lamp is lit,
and at the time the CW lamp begins to flash.
The chime is composed of two half-second beeps, which are separated by a half-second of silence.
780 Hz. tone
0.5 sec.
silence
780 Hz. tone
OPERATING PROCEDURE
None
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. The chime will sound only at a position where the agent is in Work mode.
2. The volume of the chime is controlled by the ringer volume switch on the D
term
instrument.
3. The use of the chime is indicated through an ACD MAT command. The command data is on a split-wide
basis.
PROGRAMMING
ACDSPL - Make the CW lamp with chime service available for each split.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 235
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING - SPLIT - ACD
C-127A CALL FORWARDING - SPLIT - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature provides alternate routing for calls destined for a particular split. When split call forwarding is in
effect and a call attempts to queue for that split, the call is routed to a pilot number instead of being queued. At
this point, the call is handled by the Call Control Vector (CCV) associated with the new pilot number.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. The supervisor presses the NIGHT key while logged onto the ACD.
2. ENTER NIGHT/FWD? is displayed at the position. The individual enters the digit 0, a pilot number, and #.
3. At this point, the split goes into call forwarding, incoming calls are routed to the call forwarding number
entered, and the NIGHT lamp flashes at all the positions in the split.
4. Split call forwarding may be canceled by pressing the NIGHT key again. EXIT FWD? is displayed at the
position and the supervisor enters 1# to confirm.
5. At this point the split exits split call forwarding and the NIGHT lamp is extinguished at all the positions in
the split.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Only pilot numbers may be used as the split call forwarding destination.
2. The pilot number used for split call forwarding may not contain a “*” or a “#”.
3. The pilot number for split call forwarding may invoke either aWeek Schedule or a CCV.
4. The MIS is not informed when split call forwarding is activated.
5. When a split enters Night mode automatically using the MIS, split call forwarding is canceled.
6. When a call attempts to queue to a split using a Queue to Split instruction in a CCV and the split has call
forwarding activated, the new pilot number routing for the split is only followed if the split is the primary
split for the call. If the split is a secondary split, the Queue to Split instruction is ignored. A primary split
is the split specified in the first queuing instruction in a CCV. Splits specified in subsequent queuing
instructions in the CCV are referred to as secondary splits.
7. When a call attempts to queue to a split using the Conditional Queue to Split instruction in a CCV and the
split has call forwarding activated, the Conditional Queue to Split instruction is ignored.
8. When alternate routing is required by a split, night service may be used to provide a more static choice of
pilot numbers used for the new routing (see Night Service - ACD [N-12A] for additional information).
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: ACDCCV - Assign the pilot number of Night destination to the CCV
CHAPTER 5
Page 236
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING - SPLIT - ACD
Step 2: ACDPLT - Designated the CCV for alternate route
Step 3: ARRC - Release the route restriction between the ACD line and the tie line.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 237
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL RECOVER - ACD
C-191A CALL RECOVER - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The call recover feature allows an ACD call to ring at an ACD position for a preprogrammed length of time and
if unanswered the call will be directed to another available agent or replaced in all of the queues it was originally
in at the highest possible priority. If the call is requeued it will be the highest possible priority and will be
answered by the next available agent.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. An incoming ACD call rings at an agent’s position. The agent is either unavailable to answer the call or
chooses to not answer the call.
2. When the “Call Recover” timer expires the call is removed from the agent’s position. The agent’s position
is placed in a “Penalty Work” mode and the display will showCALL RECOVERED until a key is pressed.
3. The caller will be immediately directed to another available agent if one exists.
4. If there are no available agents the call will be replaced in all of the queues it was originally queued to at
the highest possible priority. The call will also continue to process the CCV beginning with the step where
it left off.
5. The call will be assigned to the next available agent.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. The time used for the Time In Queue display when the call is assigned for the second time will be the
cumulative time starting when the call first arrived at the ACD.
2. If a recovered call had been directed via the agent’s personal queue the call will be redirected according to
the Forward / Full CCV programmed for the agent’s logon ID.
PROGRAMMING
ACDSPL - Assign the time for Call Recover activating.
Call Recover time (1-255)
CHAPTER 5
Page 238
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTION DISPLAYS - ACD
C-199A CONNECTION DISPLAYS - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature allows each agent to specify the exact sequence of displays to be delivered to the LCD display at
the time of an incoming ACD call connection. There are several displays available providing a variety of
information pertaining to the call being connected. Different styles of operation give rise to different needs
regarding what information is presented first. Now each agent can specify how much information they want and
in what order.
The setup for the custom connection displays is controlled by each agent through the entry of a special Tally-
Oh code designed for this purpose. By entering the proper codes and durations the agent can customize the
sequence and timing of the displays received when an incoming ACD call commences ringing at the agent
position and when the agent answers the call. Only one sequence is specified and the same set of displays will
be generated at time of ringing and answer.
The following table indicates which displays can be selected and the Display ID Code for each:
Connection Display Codes
Display ID Code
Display Description
Time in queue (merged display)
3
4
Time in queue (stand-alone display)
Pilot number text (gate ID)
ANI digits received
5
6
7
Customer entered digits (via IVR)
Answering split name
8
9
Current queue depth and longest call time
reserved
10 thru 29
A maximum of five displays may be selected. A duration from 3 to 9 seconds is assigned to each display and is
specified using the setup Tally-Oh code. As an option, the final display can be set to display for the remainder
of the ACD call be entering a time of 0 seconds. A Tally-Oh code exists which can reset the permanent display
and allow the standard conversation timer to display.
Three Tally-Oh codes have been added to support the Connection Displays feature. These codes are available
to all ACD agent positions and cannot be restricted. The Connection Display sequence and timing is stored on
a per-agent-logon ID basis and will be retained from one logon session to the next as long as a Personal
Emergency Supervisor has not been specified for this agent. Those agents with an assigned Personal Emergency
Supervisor will need to setup their Connection Displays each time upon logging onto the system.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 239
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTION DISPLAYS - ACD
Connection Display Tally-Oh Codes
Description
Code
Format
Setup the display sequence and timing for the current agent.
D = single-digit display code (3 thru 9)
DD = double-digit display code (10 thru 29)
S = number of seconds to display (3 thru 9 seconds, or 0 for
021
021DS# -or- 021DDS# permanent display)
The DS or DDS pairs may be repeated up to 5 times, the ‘#’ digit
must follow the final entry. A very long entry might look like:
Tally+021-44-54-64-74-84# (pluses and minuses are not actually
entered, they are shown here for visual separation only)
On-line help to show a series of 4-second displays describing the
available displays codes.
022
023
022#
Demand display of the specified code.
D = single-digit display code (3 thru 9)
023DS# -or- 023DDS# DD = double-digit display code (10 thru 29)
S = optional number of seconds to display (3 thru 9 seconds, default
= 4)
When using display code 3, time in queue merged display, the actual time in queue will be merged with the
previous display if possible. The previous display must be 11 characters or shorter for the merge to be allowed
(10 or shorter if the time in queue was over 10 minutes). For example, if the agent entered Tally “021-58-38#”
the request is to display the Pilot number text for eight seconds and merge the time in queue on the end of the
display. If the Pilot number text was “SALES” then the display would show “SALES 0:48” for eight seconds.
On the other hand, if the Pilot number text was “APPLICATIONS” (12 characters) then the first display would
be “APPLICATIONS” for eight seconds followed by “TIME IN Q 0:48” for eight seconds.
Use display code 4 to force the time in queue display to always be displayed alone, that is, not merged with the
previous display even when space permits.
Use a time code of zero seconds to indicate that the final display should remain on the display for the duration
of the ACD call. Tally-Oh code 021# can be entered at any time to reset the display to the default information.
For example, if the agent entered Tally “021-42-60#” the time in queue will be displayed (alone) for two seconds
(code 42) followed by the ANI digits being displayed for the remainder of the ACD call (code 60). All digits
beyond the permanent display will be ignored.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 240
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTION DISPLAYS - ACD
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Connect displays are saved after logoff for each agent unless the agent is using a Personal Emergency
Supervisor. Those agents using Personal Emergency Supervisor must setup their connection displays each
time after logging onto the ACD system.
2. A maximum of five displays may be setup with each display being from three to nine seconds.
3. A permanent display (time code of zero seconds) must be the last display in the setup string. Any
subsequent codes entered will be ignored.
4. When more than five displays are coded only the first five will be displayed, the remaining entries will be
ignored.
5. The same display sequence and display timing is provided both when the agent position begins ringing with
an incoming ACD call as well as when the agent answers the incoming ACD call. The permanent display
is only supported after the agent answers the phone and will be provided as a nine-second display when
displayed during the ringing phase. This is a security feature so that potentially private numbers are not left
on display at an unoccupied position.
6. Even a permanent display will be automatically reset at the conclusion of the ACD call.
7. This feature is available to all agents via Tally-Oh codes. The feature itself cannot be restricted.
8. Display timing accuracy is limited to ±2 seconds from the time indicated for each display.
PROGRAMMING
Assign the name for incoming call identification by following commands.
Step 1: ACDPLT - Assign name corresponding to the pilot number.
NAME:
up to 20 characters
Step 2: ACDTG - Assign name corresponding to the route number.
NAME: up to 20 characters
Step 3: ACDSPL - Assign the name corresponding to the split.
NAME: up to 20 characters
Note 1: Since NAME programmed in ACDPLT and in ACDTG may be duplicated to display the trunk incoming call,
assign NAME in one of those two commands, and skip NAME parameter in the other command.
Note 2: When MIS is used, name corresponding to the pilot number and name correspondind to the split are
programmed from MIS terminal.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 241
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DO NOT DISTURB - SPLIT - ACD
D-133A DO NOT DISTURB - SPLIT - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Do Not Disturb feature disables queuing when there are no agents logged onto the split. When the last agent
logs off the split will be automatically placed in the Do Not Disturb mode. Although similar to Night Mode in
some respects this feature does not activate the NIGHT lamp. Incoming calls cannot queue to this split as long
as it is in the Do Not Disturb mode. As soon as an agent logs in the Do Not Disturb mode is cancelled and
queuing is enabled. See also Stranded Call Routing - ACD [S-108A] for how to process calls which were left
behind in queue when the last agent logs off.
If the Do Not Disturb mode is active any Call Control Vector (CCV) step that would cause a call to be queued
to the split is ignored. The CCV processing will continue until a queuing or transfer step is reached. Any Pause
and Announcement steps that are encountered, between the ignored queuing step and the subsequent queuing/
transfer step, are also ignored.
After the call is queued to another split or transferred to a PBX number, the CCV processing will continue in a
normal fashion, with every Pause and Announcement step processed normally.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
The DO NOT DISTURB option is implemented through ACDSPL. The command data is on a split-wide basis.
The following example illustrates how the feature functions.
Do Not Disturb CCV Example
CCV INSTRUCTION
(CCVACT)
DETAIL DATA
(CCVACT DATA)
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
10 (QUEUE TO SPLIT)
5
15
3
1 (PAUSE)
2 (ANNOUNCEMENT)
1 (PAUSE)
22
12
4
8 (CONDITIONAL QUEUE TO SPLIT)
2 (ANNOUNCEMENT)
1. Split 5 has been programmed to be placed in DO NOT DISTURB mode when agents are not logged onto
the split. There are no agents logged onto Split 5.
2. A call to an ACD pilot number processes the CCV shown above.
3. The Queue to Split 5 in Step 1 is ignored, because Split 5 is in DO NOT DISTURB mode.
4. The Pause in Step 2 is ignored because the call was not queued during Step 1.
5. Also the Announcement in Step 3 and the Pause in Step 4 will be ignored since the call was not queued.
6. The conditional Queue to Split 12 is processed. The conditions for queuing are satisfied, and the call is
queued to Split 12.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 242
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DO NOT DISTURB - SPLIT - ACD
7. The processing of this CCV will continue from Step 6 in a normal fashion, with all Pause and
Announcement steps processed.
8. The first agent logs onto Split 5 and is in Work mode. A call to an ACD pilot number now enters the same
CCV. The call will queue to Split 5 even though the agent is not yet available. The caller will also perform
the pause from Step 2 and hear announcement 3 assuming the agent is not available.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Both a Queue to Split and a Conditional Queue to Split instruction will be ignored if the target split is in DO
NOT DISTURB mode.
PROGRAMMING
ACDSPL - Make Do Not Disturb - Split service available for each split.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 243
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCY/RECORDER - ACD
E-6A
EMERGENCY/RECORDER - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
In an emergency, this feature allows a conversation between an agent and an incoming ACD caller to be
recorded, using a customer-provided recording device, and simultaneously permits a monitor connection
between the ACD call and a supervisor. Activation of this feature, while on an ACD call, automatically places
a call to a pre-programmed number. This number can be any station in the PBX, an individual supervisor, or a
pilot number for a split of supervisors. If the target extension of the emergency request has display capabilities,
then display information will accompany the call, identifying it as an emergency call.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
To place an emergency request:
The following example assumes that an emergency request is sent to the pilot number of a split of supervisors.
* The destination, the pilot number of a split of supervisors, is allowed since the PBX software Series 7400 and
1. While engaged in an ACD call, the agent presses the EMER key, the agent’s display shows EMERG [SUPV
PILOT#], and the associated lamp is lit. “SUPV A” is the name associated with the split of supervisors.
2. If no supervisor is available to take the call, a call waiting indication is provided to each supervisor position.
The first supervisor to respond will silently monitor the agent and the calling party.
3. Upon the assignment of the call, the supervisor’s display shows AGENT [EXT#], or if agent names are used,
EMERG [NAME].
4. When a supervisor answers, the agent’s display will show EMERG ANSWERED and the associated lamp
will wink. When the agent releases from the call, or the supervisor releases from the monitor, the agent’s
lamp will be extinguished.
5. The agent and the calling party are never disconnected while the supervisor’s position is ringing.
6. An emergency recorder is connected as soon as the supervisor starts ringing and is disconnected if the
supervisor joins the call in a three-way conference by pressing the MON/BARGE key. The recorder is also
disconnected if the supervisor releases from the monitor using the RELEASE key. Note
7. If the agent releases from the call while the call is being recorded, Reorder Tone is sent out to the ACD
trunk.
Queuing of emergency requests: Valid since the PBX software Series 7400 and the ACD software R3.
1. Emergency requests may be routed to a split of supervisors or an individual supervisor. In the case of a split
of supervisors, multiple emergency requests can be queued. Recording starts from the moment the ACD
call terminates to the supervisory position (not recorded while the call is in queue).
2. For emergency split queuing, to ensure the fastest processing, the only CCV steps that will be executed are
Queue to Split, Conditional Queue to Split, and Goto (the steps are followed by Pause, End CCV), and the
request will be queued at the highest priority. All other CCV steps will be ignored.
CHAPTER 5
Page 244
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCY/RECORDER - ACD
Note: When the supervisor presses the MON/BARGE key, BARGE? is displayed. By pressing 1# a three-way
conference is established.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. This service requires the three-conference trunk.
2. During an emergency, either the agent or the supervisor can display the identification of the original ACD
call and the queue depth by pressing the LOGON key. Refer to Calling Party Identification - ACD [C-70A]
for additional information.
3. The directory number used for emergency requests may not contain a “*” or a “#”.
4. Supervisors are always rung in Manual Answer for the EMERGENCY/RECORDER feature, regardless of
their answer mode. This is to guard against unattended supervisor positions being left in Ready mode.
5. Supervisors may be members of a split when it is necessary for them to handle regular split calls. In this
case, emergency requests should be routed to one supervisor’s non-ACD line. However, the supervisor will
not be able to barge. Barge attempts are only allowed from the ACD line.
6. Emergency requests are only allowed while talking on an ACD line. Requests while on a non-ACD line
will be ignored.
7. Emergency requests are not allowed during an assist call.
8. If the emergency request is sent to an individual line and that line is busy, the agent’s display will show
EMERG BUSY and the emergency lamp will be turned off. The agent may try to send the emergency request
as many times as necessary during the call.
9. The supervisor’s monitor will not be updated for transfers or subsequent calls as in the Monitoring - ACD
released.
10. If an agent presses the EMER key, while already being monitored by a supervisor for a non-emergency
situation, the supervisor will be released from the monitor and the emergency will continue as usual.
Emergency requests are not allowed during a supervisor’s three-way barge or any other three-way
connection in progress at the agent’s position.
11. Emergency requests cannot be routed to operators, or destinations over CCIS. Pilot numbers for group
hunts is available as the destination of Emergency requests call, but the request call is not hunted to the
other members.
12. The emergency recorder is customer-provided equipment.Typically, it is a dictation machine with remote
playback capabilities. This equipment is optional and all other feature operations work even if a recorder
is not provided.
13. Due to the emergency nature of the call, audible beeps are not provided to the parties even though the call
is being recorded.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 245
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCY/RECORDER - ACD
14. The emergency call is still routed to the supervisor even if the recording equipment is not available. The
recording equipment must be idle at the beginning of the emergency call.
The recording equipment will not be connected in the middle of the emergency call if the equipment was
busy at the beginning of the emergency call and then subsequently became idle. One circuit is required as
an i7tween the emergency recorder and the PBX; this circuit can be Port 0 or Port 1 of an 8 COTBF or 16
COTBD circuit card or one circuit of a 8 TLTR circuit card.
15. When the trunks connecting the recording equipment are all busy, the trunk is not seized, but the emergency
call is still routed to the supervisor.
16. The playback controls of the recorder normally require DTMF signals.
17. Any trunk-side connectable recording device may be provided, but a device which has playback controls is
strongly recommended.
18. Most recording devices impose some mechanical delay before recording begins.
19. Even when the recording equipment is not available, reorder tone is sent out to the ACD trunk when the
agent is released.
20. The recording equipment can be shared among agent position splits, but it is recommended to prepare
several pieces of equipment per system.
21. For the agent position where MONITORING - ACD SUPERVISOR [M-28] is available, the directory
number used for emergency request can be programmed individually on each agent position.
22. Recording type number is assigned on an agent position split basis.
23. When Emergency requests is routed to an individual supervisor, the call is distributed to the supervisor in
Work Mode or Break Mode. While, Emergency call to a split of supervisors is not distributed to the
supervisors in those modes.
CAUTION: The use of a monitoring, recording or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor or record telephone
conversations or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with its transmission, may be
illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Legal advice should be sought before implementing any
practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require the
monitoring party to use beep tones, to notify all parties to the telephone conversation, or to obtain the
consent of all parties to the telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: ACDSPL - Assign the destination of Emergency request call.
EMERGENCY The ACD line of a supervisory position/the pilot number of a split of supervisors
Step 2: ARTD - Assign the route class data for Emergency/Recording trunk.
CDN2:
CDN6:
ONSG = 2 (PB), 60 msec. interval
TCL = 4 (Tie Line/Announcement Trunk)
Step 3: ATRK and ALRTN- Assign the trunk data of COT used for interface with the recording machine.
When Paging Trunk is available, two circuits (0, 1) are required for connecting paging equipment.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 246
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCY/RECORDER - ACD
Step 4: AADTN - Assign the related data of recording machine.
TYPE:
NO.:
RT:
2 (Recording Trunk)
1~5
Route number for recording machine
Trunk number for recording machine
TK:
Step 5: MBTK - Make the interface trunk (COT) idle.
Step 6: ARRC - Release the route restriction between the ACD route and the route for the recording machine.
Step 7: AKYD - Assign EMER key to a function key.
Note: When the destination of Emergency request call that is programmed in ACDSPL is busy, the request call is
not connected. In another word, this service is available for one agent only per split when the destination
is only one. For preventing the above-mentioned case, the destination of Personal Emergency Request call
(both the ACD line of a supervisory position and the pilot number of a split of supervisors are allowed) can
be programmed for each ID code in ACDLOG.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 247
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUNCTION GROUPS (SPLITS) - ACD
F-10A FUNCTION GROUPS (SPLITS) - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Please refer to Splits - ACD [S-91A] for a full description of how splits are used with this product.
CHAPTER 5
Page 248
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLEXIBLE ID CODES - ACD
F-25A FLEXIBLE ID CODES - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ID codes are used by agents and supervisors to access the ACD system. A considerable amount of information
is programmed for each agent’s ID code and this information is used by the ACD system to determine which
calls the agent will be handling after logging in and which features the agent will have access to.
Some of the parameters programmed in ACDLOG for each logon ID are described in the table below.
Logon ID Characteristics
Logon ID:
From 2 digits to 9 digits
LANG (Default Language):
English
Japanese
Spanish
Italian
French
German
NAME (Agent Name):
Specify a name for use in displays
SPLIT (Available Split or Splits to logon): Specify a maximum of 16 split Nos. (1-250)
PRIORITY:
Priority for the split assigned in SPLIT (1-250) or Agent’s
Preference level (1-99)
Multi-split Allowed:
Allow or Restrict multiple simultaneous splits
Specify a directory number for Personal Queue
from 0 to 999 calls may be in queue
Specify a CCV for alternate handling
from 1 to 9999 seconds
Personal Pilot Number:
Personal Queue Depth:
Personal Queue Forward CCV:
Personal Queue Timeout:
Personal Queue Timeout CCV:
Personal Queue Chime:
Personal Assist:
Specify a CCV for alternate handling
Call Waiting in queue chime On or Off
Specify destination for Assist
Personal Emergency:
Specify destination for Emergency
Refer to Multi-Split Agent - ACD [M-90A] and Split Selection - ACD [S-98A] for information on how an ID
code determines the split.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
None
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 249
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLEXIBLE ID CODES - ACD
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. The maximum length for an ID code is nine digits, and only the digits “0” through “9” are allowed.
2. Leading zeros are permitted, but are not meaningful, in logon ID codes. For example, “0017” is acceptable;
however, this code is identical to the code “17”.
3. Each split determines whether ID codes are required for access to the ACD system.
4. An ID code can only be assigned once in the ACD system regardless of which tenant the ID code is used for.
5. An ID code can only be used in the tenant in which it is assigned.
6. An ID code can only be used at one position at any given time. Multiple logons with the same ID code are
not permitted.
PROGRAMMING
ACDLOG
CHAPTER 5
Page 250
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOLIDAY SCHEDULING - ACD
H-20A HOLIDAY SCHEDULING - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Holidays may be programmed up to 365 days in advance. On a holiday, special call routing is in effect for up to
eight time-of-day changes. Three different holiday schedules, one of which is used on any particular holiday,
may be programmed for each tenant.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Holiday schedule routing takes place only for those pilot numbers which route to week routing. If a pilot
number routes directly to a Call Control Vector (CCV), its routing is not affected on a holiday even if
holiday routing has been programmed.
2. All incoming ACD traffic must follow the same routing (CCV handling) on a holiday.
PROGRAMMING
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 251
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOT SPLIT - ACD
H-31A HOT SPLIT - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature was designed to accommodate “Automatic” agents of “Hot” agents. That is to say, agents who never
log on, never log off and never take breaks. As soon as the ACD is online these “agents” are automatically
logged on to the ACD and placed in the Ready Mode to take incoming calls. Actually, these agents are more
accurately described as “machines” because the feature was intended for use with answering machines, dictation
machines, voice mail machines, etc.
The feature is named “Hot Split” because all members of the split must be automatic agents. There cannot be a
mixture of standard agent positions and hot agent positions in the same split.
Due to the nature of the equipment expected to be used for this feature it was designed to accommodate only
term
analog station equipment, or TEC = 3 for those familiar with PBX database assignments. D
stations in
particular cannot be used for members of a Hot Split. A member of a Hot Split is called a Hot Position.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. A Hot Position is idle and, therefore, in the Ready Mode. This station is the only assigned member of a
particular Hot Split. Let’s say it is an answering machine.
2. A call arrives to the Pilot Number for this Hot Split and immediately rings the Ready “agent”.
3. The “agent” (answering machine) automatically answers and does what answering machines do.
Meanwhile, another call arrives for the Hot Split and is placed in queue.
4. The Hot Split is programmed for 15 seconds of After Call Work Mode Timeout. This allows the answering
machine sufficient time to rewind or reset before the next call rings through.
5. The first caller hangs up. The “agent” enters After Call Work Mode for 15 seconds.
6. After 15 seconds the Hot Position is automatically placed in the Ready Mode and since a caller is waiting
in queue it immediately rings the position.
7. The Hot Position (answering machine) answers the next call.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. A Hot Position is allowed to go off-hook and originate outgoing calls. It will be placed in a Break Mode
for incoming ACD calls until it goes onhook.
2. Hot Positions are assumed to be in the Ready Mode upon ACD startup. If, in fact, the position is offhook
and busy the ACD will make only one attempt to connect a call and then, upon noticing its busy status, will
correctly mark the position as Unavailable and wait for its onhook.
CHAPTER 5
Page 252
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOT SPLIT - ACD
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: ACDPSN
LINE NUMBERS = ACD and PBX are the same
ANALOG AGENT POSITION = No
Step 2: ACDSPL
HOT SPLIT = Yes
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 253
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INFOLINK DATA MESSAGES - ACD
I-99A INFOLINK DATA MESSAGES - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Infolink Data Messages provides a two-way communications link between the ACD and external computer
equipment. Typical examples of external computer equipment includes but is not limited to:
•
•
•
•
Mini and Mainframe Host Computers (IBM, DEC, Honeywell, Borroughs, Hewlett Packard)
Desktop Workstations (Sun, IBM, Hewlett Packard, DEC)
Personal Computers (IBM, Compaq, Dell, Gateway, AST, et.al.)
Interactive Voice Response (IVR) systems (Centigram, Periphonics, InterVoice, Syntellect)
The first three categories are obvious examples of computer equipment but what about the fourth? The Infolink
message set was specifically designed to support features which are best performed by IVR equipment in
addition to several obvious applications which can be done from a host computer. IVRs can provide customized
announcements, collect digits (account numbers, billing reference codes, etc.) from customers and provide voice
menuing, “Press ‘1’ for Sales, ‘2’ for Service or ‘3’ for Billing Inquiry”.
Three message sets have been designed for Infolink. External computers may use as little or as much of the data
from any of the three sets as needed in order to implement their application. Unnecessary messages may be
turned off to reduce transmission bandwidth. Just as there are many words which can be derived using the 26
letters of the alphabet there are also many applications which can be invented using the messages available in
the Infolink message sets. We can guess what some of the obvious applications might be but there is no way to
predict how far developers can go given the information available from Infolink.
Some of the possible applications which Infolink clients could perform include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Agent Screen Pop-Up
Agent Screen Correlation and Screen Transfer
Outbound Calling Campaigns
Electronic Call Transfer
Customized Announcements
Host Directed Routing - Host Directed Priority Changes
Customer Callback
Predictive Dialing Enhancements
Phone-In-A-Drawer
Position In Queue Announcements
Estimated Time To Answer Announcements
Leave A Message vs. Stay In Queue Options
CHAPTER 5
Page 254
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INFOLINK DATA MESSAGES - ACD
The following tables lay out the names of the messages currently available:
Inbound Messages from Infolink Client to ACD
Tag Message Description
IA
IB
IC
ID
IE
IF
Dialed digits
Manage Call
Split Status/Caller Status Request
Announcement Request
Outbound Call Request
Route Call Request
IG
IH
IL
Call Manipulation Request
State Change Request
Message Subscription
Outbound Messages from ACD to Infolink Client
Tag
Message Description
ANI/DNIS Information
IM
IN
IO
IP
Port Release
Play Announcement
Split Status Notification
Incoming Call Notification
Report IVR Dialed Digits
Agent Ringing
IQ
IR
IS
IT
Agent Answer
IU
IV
IW
IX
IY
IZ
Call Disconnect
Call Transfer
Agent State Change
Party Acknowledgment
Sequence Acknowledgment
Outbound Call Disposition
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 255
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INFOLINK DATA MESSAGES - ACD
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Depending on the usage of each application.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Each feature is defined by the detail specification of each application.
2. Lower layer protocol of Infolink supports TCP/IP + DIX Ethernet Version 2.
3. Infolink Data Messages are provided to the ACD tenant programmed in ACDTN.
4. Two-way communications link is provided simultaneously.
5. One link controls one ACD tenant.
6. OAI transmission is also provided via the same link.
7. An IVR equipment may be accommodated per ACD tenant.
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: ASDT
TN:
Tenant number (1-10)
STN:
TEC:
Station number of the IVR (maximum 5 digits)
1-4
Step 2: ASHU
Assign the UCD group organized by the station number accommodates the IVR port
Step 3: ACDTN
IVR PILOT NUMBER : IVR Pilot number for UCD service programmed in ASHU
: Outbound Answer Timer (0-60 sec.)
Step 4: ACDIVR - Assign the desired IVR port number for all station numbers to access IVR programmed
in ASDT
DIRECTORY NUMBER:IVR station number programmed in ASDT
PORT:
IVR port number (1-255)
Step 5: ACDCCV - when IVR announcement service is provided. Note 1
ACTION: IVR ANNOUNCEMENT: Note 2
ARGUMENT: IVR announcement equipment number (1-99) Note 3
Announcement ID for announcement order via Infolink to the IVR
Note 1: When this command data has already been programmed for OAI features, it is not necessary to program
the data again.
Note 2: It is not necessary to programa Pause step after the IVR Announcement.
Note 3: The announcement number varies depending on each IVR Specifications.
CHAPTER 5
Page 256
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOGON/LOGOFF POSITION - ACD
L-19A LOGON/LOGOFF POSITION - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Access to the ACD system is controlled either with or without logon ID codes. A logon ID code is used to
identify individual agents or supervisors, to the ACD, for statistics gathering purposes. An agent is only
permitted to be logged onto the system at one position at a time. Flexible ID Codes can be employed to log onto
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Logon Procedure:
This procedure varies depending on whether or not logon ID codes are used. The cases are described separately.
1. When logon ID codes are used:
a. The display shows VACANT.
b. The agent presses the LOGON key. The display shows LOGON ID?.
c. The agent enters a logon ID code, using the DTMF keypad, and presses the “#” key after the logon ID
code is entered.
d. If an invalid logon ID code is entered, the display returns to LOGON ID? and the agent must enter a
correct logon ID.
e. If the entered logon ID code is currently in use, the display briefly shows ID IN USE and then returns
to LOGON ID?.
f. If a valid logon ID code is entered, the LOGON lamp is lit, a greeting is provided, and the split the
user logged onto is displayed.
g. The console is placed in theWork mode with the Manual/Auto answer mode set to the split’s default.
h. The WORK key must be pressed before the agent can begin taking calls.
2. When logon ID codes are not used:
a. The display shows VACANT.
b. The agent presses the LOGON key; the LOGON lamp is turned on, a greeting is provided, and the split
the user logged onto is displayed.
c. The console is placed in theWork mode with the Manual/Auto answer mode set to the split’s default.
d. The WORK key must be pressed before the agent can begin taking calls.
Logoff Procedure (with or without ID codes):
1. The agent or supervisor may log off the system while in Break mode, Work mode, or while ready to take
calls.
2. The agent presses the LOGON key at this time. Several displays will cycle on the display for four seconds
each:
a. A farewell greeting; for example, GOODBYE RENEE.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 257
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOGON/LOGOFF POSITION - ACD
b. The time since logon in hours, minutes, and seconds; for example, SHIFT 6:38:08.
c. The number of incoming calls handled; for example, ACD CALLS 138.
d. If any calls were handled, the average time spent with each call in minutes and seconds; for example,
AVG TALK 1:30.
e. The cumulative amount of time spent in Work mode during the shift in hours, minutes, and seconds;
for example, WORK 2:07:25.
f. The cumulative amount of time spent in Break mode during the shift in hours, minutes, and seconds;
for example, BREAK 1:02:41.
g. Finally, the display shows VACANT.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. When a vacant position displays R.I.P. (Reset In Progress), it indicates that the system is unable to
communicate with the telephone instrument. If the LOGON key is pressed and the connection is
established, the display will show VACANT within five seconds. If the connection cannot be established,
R.I.P. will continue to be displayed.
PROGRAMMING
[When ID code is used]
Step 1: ACDSPL - Set the ID code is required to logon for each split.
Step 2: ACDLOG - Assign the ID code to logon
LOGON ID:
(9 digits maximum)
Note: “0” is not recognized as the first digit.
AGENT NAME: Logon ID name (14 characters at the maximum)
ABBR NAME: Abbreviated ID code name (5 digits maximum)
[When ID code is not used]
Step 1: ACDSPL - Set the ID code is not necessary to logon for each split.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 258
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LANGUAGE DEFAULT - ACD
L-48A LANGUAGE DEFAULT - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature allows the selection of a language, applicable to an entire tenant, for use in messages displayed at
positions where an agent is not logged onto the ACD system. The following are examples of messages that will
appear in the selected language:
1. The VACANT message, displayed when an agent is not logged on at the position;
2. The messages used during the logon procedure, such as LOGON ID?, (if logon ID codes are used);
3. The messages giving split information (name, queue depth, time of longest waiting call) that are displayed
at a vacant position when the agent presses the AUTO/MAN key.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
None
This feature is implemented through an ACD MAT command. The command data is on a tenant-wide basis.
PROGRAMMING
ACDTN
DEFAULT LANGUAGE: English
Japanese
Spanish
Italian
French
German
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 259
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOGOFF WARNING - ACD
L-92A LOGOFF WARNING - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature is programmed on a per-split basis via the ACDSPL MAT command. When a split is marked for
Logoff Warning agents will receive the display “LOGOFF WARNING” for a few seconds if they try to logoff
while there are still calls in queue. In order to actually logoff the agent must press the Logoff Key a second time
after having received the warning message. In other words, the warning message is intended to encourage the
agent to continue taking phone calls and, in fact, the agent remains logged on if the key is pressed only one time.
A value is set for the Logoff Warning feature from 1 to 9 or ALL. The value 1~9 describes the maximum number
of agents still logged onto the split when the warning is given. If the setting is at 5 then only the last five agents
to logoff from the split will be given the warning message.
The “LOGOFF WARNING” display is shown only when the number of callers waiting in queue for the agent’s
split is greater than or equal to the number of agents still logged on in addition to the value set for Logoff
Warning. That is, if the setting is at 5 and there are five agents logged on but only three calls are in queue then
an agent will be allowed to logoff and will not receive the warning message. In fact, two agents may logoff and
neither will receive the message. However, when there are only three agents remaining and three calls in queue,
if one of those agents attempts to logoff the warning will be provided.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. For multi-split agents the logoff warning is calculated for each split that the agent is a member. If any split
falls into the logoff with warning threshold then the warning will be provided and the agent’s logoff will be
restricted. No indication is given as to which split or splits has remaining calls to be answered.
2. When an agent wishes to logoff when Logoff Warning is enabled it will be required that the agent press the
LOGON/LOGOFF KEY two times in succession (no intervening keypresses) and that there must be at least
a 2 second pause between the two keypresses.
This should ensure that the agent was given an opportunity to see the “ LOGOFF WARNING” display and
has chosen to ignore it and logoff anyway.
PROGRAMMING
ACDSPL -
LOGOFF WARNING CRITERIA: Assign the threshold value (necessary number of agents logged onto the
split) for LOGOFF WARNING.
0 = LOGOFF WARNING is out of service
1-9 = Maximum number of agents to be logged on
ALL = Number of agents equal to or less than the number of calls in queue
CHAPTER 5
Page 260
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MONITORING - ACD SUPERVISOR - ACD
M-28A MONITORING - ACD SUPERVISOR - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature allows the supervisor to select an agent position and to monitor the calls on both the ACD line and
the non-ACD line at that position. The agent and calling party are not aware that their call is being monitored.
As the agent concludes one call and begins another, switches from one line to another, or transfers, the
supervisor’s monitor is applied to the current call. If both lines are idle when the monitoring is established, the
supervisor will hear quiet tone until the agent either answers a call on one of the lines or places a call from the
non-ACD line. At that time, the supervisor will be able to hear both parties.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Monitoring an agent’s position:
1. While in Work mode, Break mode, or Ready mode, the supervisor presses the MON/BARGE key and the
display shows MONITOR NUMBER?.
2. The supervisor enters either the ID code of the agent or a “0” followed by the extension number of the
position the supervisor wishes to monitor and “#”. For example, to monitor the agent whose ID code is
“101” and who is at extension “4301”, the supervisor presses either 101# or 04301#. Either a PBX or ACD
extension can be used.
3. If the ID code or extension number is valid and the agent has a call in progress on either line, the MON/
BARGE lamp will flash and the supervisor will hear a Zip Tone before silently listening in on the agent’s
call.
4. If no ACD call is in progress, the MON/BARGE lamp will be steadily lit and the supervisor will hear
nothing.
5. As calls are handled by the agent, the supervisor will alternate between the two states described previously.
6. If the agent transfers to a third party, the supervisor will hear the conversation between the agent and the
third party. When the agent returns to the original caller, the supervisor will again hear the agent and the
original caller.
7. While monitoring a conversation, the monitor function is terminated either by releasing or by pressing the
MON/BARGE key. The ACD system will respond by displaying the prompt BARGE? (Note 1). To barge,
the supervisor enters 1#. To exit from the monitor mode and return to the previous mode, the supervisor
enters # or presses the MON/BARGE key again.
8. While listening the quiet tone, the monitor function is terminated by pressing the MON/BARGE key once.
term
Note: To use this feature, the supervisor must be off-hook and must not use the SPEAKER key of a D
to monitor
term
an agent. If the SPEAKER key is used, the SPEAKER lamp on the supervisor’s D
is extinguished when
the call is released by either the agent or the ACD calling party. If the supervisor presses the SPEAKER
key before another call is routed to that agent, monitoring will continue. If the agent receives another call
before the supervisor’s SPEAKER key is pressed, the monitor function is terminated.
Note 1: After supervisor presses 1 # A, three-party conference is established.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 261
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MONITORING - ACD SUPERVISOR - ACD
Barging in on the monitored call:
1. Set up the monitor function as described in the preceding section.
2. While the agent is engaged in a conversation on the ACD line and the supervisor is monitoring, the
supervisor may press the MON/BARGE key. The ACD system will respond by displaying the prompt
BARGE?. To barge, the supervisor enters 1#. A three-way conference connection is now established.
3. Intrusion tones are provided to both the agent and the calling party prior to the conference connection, and
the supervisor’s MON/BARGE lamp will wink.
4. At this time one of two things is likely to happen:
a. The supervisor may press the RELEASE key or the MON/BARGE key to terminate the conference
connection (barge) and return to the monitor connection.
b. The agent may press the RELEASE key and relinquish control of the call to the supervisor. In this case,
the supervisor will continue to talk to the incoming caller until the call is completed, either by the su-
pervisor pressing the RELEASE key or the MON/BARGE key, or by the caller releasing first. The su-
pervisor will then return to a monitor connection, either listening to the agent on a new call, or quiet
tone if there is no call.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. While monitoring or barging, the supervisor can display the identification of the originalACD call and the
additional information.
2. During three-party calls such as transfers and conferences, the supervisor will not be able to barge in, but
will continue monitoring the agent and one of the other two parties. The monitoring will be updated to
follow assist calls.
3. A supervisor can only monitor agents that are currently logged onto the ACD system. If a supervisor barges
into a monitored call, and the agent releases and logs off, the supervisor will return to the previous mode at
the completion of the call.
4. While monitoring an agent’s PBX (non-ACD) line, the supervisor cannot barge into the conversation.
Barges can only be done while monitoring ACD lines.
5. While the supervisor is monitoring, if the agent being monitored begins an emergency request, the
supervisor will be released. This allows the supervisor to answer the emergency if necessary.
6. When requesting an agent to monitor, if the agent is not logged on, is on an emergency call, or is being
monitored by another supervisor, the supervisor will be prompted again.
7. This feature is restricted to ACD positions. There is no capability to monitor voice connections, conducted
by non-ACD users, among the remaining (non ACD) station equipment connected to the switch. The intent
of this feature is to provide a secure, ACD-only, performance appraisal function.
8. If the agent places a call on hold or performs switch hook flash and is reconnected with the call, the
supervisory position will release from monitoring for a moment. But the system will automatically
reconnect the monitor again.
CHAPTER 5
Page 262
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MONITORING - ACD SUPERVISOR - ACD
CAUTION: The use of a monitoring device to eavesdrop may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Legal
advice should be sought before implementing any practice that monitors a telephone conversation.
Some federal and state laws require the monitoring party to use beep tones, to notify all parties to the
telephone conversation, or to obtain the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation. Some of
these laws incorporate strict penalties.
PROGRAMMING
AKYD - Assign MON/BARGE function to a feature key.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 263
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MULTIPLE CUSTOMER GROUPS - ACD
M-29A MULTIPLE CUSTOMER GROUPS - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The system can be arranged to independently service more than one ACD customer (tenant). Ideally all
components of the ACD system should be duplicated for each tenant but in reality some components can be
shared.
Using multiple tenants in an attempt to circumvent limitations imposed at a per-tenant level does not work since
too many components end up being shared. Tenant limitation exists for a reason often related to software design
considerations. Assigning a second tenant to take advantage of a tenant parameter may appear to work at first
but blending all the other components of a multi-tenant ACD can present several difficulties.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
No manual operation is required.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Multiple tenants were designed to serve separate groups within one ACD system. Each group should have
separate telephone facilities, MIS systems and personnel.
2. Attempts to share resources will typically result in inaccurate statistics since calls which cross tenant
boundaries cannot be adequately tracked by either system.
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: ASYD-
Assign the tenant development table data.
Separate or Common Tenant Data table development for the respective commands.
0/1=Separate/Common
Note: When data “1”is assigned, data must be assigned forTenant 1 (TN=1) in the respective commands.
SYS1, INDEX92,
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
System Data-2 (“ASYD” command)
Special Access Code Data (“ASPA”,“AASP”,“AGSP” commands)
Numbering Plan Data (“ANPD”, “AANP”, “AGNP’ commands)
Station Data (“ASDT”, “AAST”, “AGST”, “ALDN”, “ASAT” commands)
Route Restriction Class Data (“ARSC” command)
Call Forwarding Restriction Data (“ACFR” command)
SYS1, INDEX93,
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
Service Feature Restriction class Data (“ASFC” command)
Call Forwarding Data (“ACFO” command)
TAS Data (“ATAS” command)
Speed Calling Data (“ASPD” command)
Route and Selection Translation Data (OG, Tandem) (“ASTP”, “AFRS” commands)
Route and Selection Translation Data (IC) (“ASTP”, “AFRS” commands)
CHAPTER 5
Page 264
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MULTIPLE CUSTOMER GROUPS - ACD
b6:
b7:
Maximum Necessary Digit Data (“AMND” command)
Announcement Equipment Data (“AAED” command)
SYS1, INDEX94,
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
Tenant Restriction Class Data (“ATNR” command)
EPN Facility Restriction Data (“AEFR” command)
Primary Call Restriction Data (“APCR” command)
Authorization Code Data (“AATC” command)
Step 2: ACDTN- Assign the ACD tenant data.
TN:
ACD tenant (1-10)
NAME:
Name corresponding to the ACD tenant data (max. 20 digits)
SPLITS: Maximum Split for Tenant (1-250)
DEFAULT LAUGUAGE
English
Japanese
Spanish
Italian
French
German
OPERATOR ACCESS CODE: Enter the operator access code programmed in the ASPA or
ASPAN
IVR PILOT NUMBER:
Number to access IVR directory numbers used by ACD
OUTBOUND ANSWER TIME: Time (in seconds) after which an outbound call is assumed to have
been answered.
AGENT PERSONAL QUEUE: Personal Announcement Number (0-58) or SPACE: feature not
used
PRIORITY:
Priority to use for split queuing after overflow or call forwarding
(1 to 255) or
SPACE: feature not used.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 265
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MULTIPLE SUPERVISOR GROUPS (SPLITS) - ACD
M-79A MULTIPLE SUPERVISOR GROUPS (SPLITS) - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Multiple supervisors can be grouped together to form a split when it is necessary for more than one supervisor
to serve a split of agents. Assistance and emergency requests can be routed to a split of supervisors, but a split
of supervisors does not normally receive incoming call traffic unless it has been programmed as a secondary
split to be queued to in a Call Control Vector (CCV). Refer to Call Control Vector - ACD [C-108A] for more
detailed information. All aspects of an agent split, such as call waiting indication and queuing, also apply to a
split of supervisors.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. This feature is released since the PBX software Series 7400 and the ACD software R3.
2. Assistance and emergency calls with this feature can not be taken by the supervisor in Work Mode or Break
Mode (Assistance and emergency call to a individual supervisor can be taken by supervisors in those
modes).
3. The followings are differences between assistance/emergency requests to an individual supervisor and
Destination
Individual Supervisor
Split of Supervisor
Service
Assistance-ACD Agent
Assistance call terminates to PBX
line for the supervisor
Assistance call terminates to the
pilot number of the split
Emergency/Recorder
Emergency call can be distributed to Emergency call can not be
the supervisor in Work Mode/Break distributed to the supervisor in Work
Mode.
Mode/Break Mode.
4. CCV data programmed for a pilot number of a split of supervisors as the destination of Assistance call or
•
•
•
STEPn
Queue Assign, Conditional Queue Assign, Goto
STEPn+1 Pause (Valid for CCV data for Assistance only)
STEPn+2 End CCV
5. Since DAY/NIGHT CLASS OF SERVICE [D-15] cannot be used for the split of supervisors, do not set the
data that ACD call excluding Assistance and Emergency calls terminated to the split directly.
6. When using dictation trunk for EMERGENCY/RECORDER, recording starts from the moment the call
terminates to the supervisory position (It is not recorded while the call is in queue).
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 266
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MULTIPLE SUPERVISOR GROUPS (SPLITS) - ACD
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: ACDSPL - Assign assistance and emergency request destinations per split.
ASSIST - pilot number of a split of supervisors
EMERGENCY - pilot number of a split of supervisors
Step 2: ACDLOG - Assign assistance and emergency request destinations per ID code.
ASSIST REQUEST -
pilot number of a split of supervisors
EMERGENCY REQUEST -pilot number of a split of supervisors
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 267
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIS OPERATOR SELECTION - ACD
M-88A MIS OPERATOR SELECTION - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature permits the selection of an access code for an operator, for an entire tenant. Certain MIS change
commands permit the operator to be selected as the destination when routing ACD calls.
In the extreme case where the ACD traffic has exhausted all available call records (too many simultaneous ACD
calls either connected or in queue) all new incoming ACD traffic will be diverted to the code specified for the
MIS Operator Selection. Once diverted the caller should be encouraged to call back at a later time when the
ACD system is not so congested.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
This feature is implemented through an ACD MAT command. The command data is on a tenant-wide basis.
PROGRAMMING
ACDTN - OPE NO: Operator access code (Maximum 5 digits)
CHAPTER 5
Page 268
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MONITOR ME - ACD
M-89A MONITOR ME - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
During an ACD call, an agent can request to be monitored by a specific supervisor. When the agent presses the
ASSIST key or presses the TALLY key and dials 006#, a monitor request is sent to the designated supervisor.
Upon answering, the supervisor is in a silent monitor connection listening to the agent and the calling party.
The number (personal assist request number) associated with the supervisor is programmable for each agent.
The ASSIST key and the personal assist request number can be used for either the MONITOR ME feature or
the ASSISTANCE - ACD AGENT feature. The choice is made for each split. Regardless of which feature the
key and number are dedicated to, if an agent personal assist number and a split assist request number are both
defined, the personal assist request number will always be used. If an agent is in multi-split mode and a personal
assist request number is defined, the quantity of splits which have an assist request number defined is
meaningless; the personal assist request number will be applied. Please refer to Multi-Split Agent - ACD
[M-90A] for more information.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
The following example illustrates how the feature functions.
1. An agent is logged onto a position; the extension is 4281.
2. The agent requests to be monitored by pressing the ASSIST key.
3. While the supervisor’s position is being rung, the agent and the calling party remain connected and can
continue to converse.
4. The ASSIST lamp at the agent’s position is lit, and the display shows the individual supervisor’s name. An
example of the display is MONITOR JAMES.
5. When the destination supervisor is idle, the MON/BARGE lamp at the destination supervisor’s position is
lit and the display provides the extension of the agent who is requesting the monitor activity and the trunk
type and number to which the agent is connected. The display appears when the monitor request is ringing
and when it is answered.
6. The supervisor answers the request and begins monitoring the agent and the calling party.
7. The ASSIST lamp at the agent’s position starts to flash and the display changes to MONITOR ANSWERED.
8. At this point, the supervisor is able to release the call or to barge. The latter option results in a three-way
call involving the supervisor, the agent, and the calling party.To initiate the barge, the supervisor presses
the MON/BARGE key; the ACD system responds with a BARGE? prompt. The supervisor can enter 1# to
affirm the barge, at which point the agent and calling party are sent an intrusion tone. The supervisor can
cancel the monitor activity by either pressing the MON/BARGE key or by entering #.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 269
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MONITOR ME - ACD
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. This service requires the three-conference trunk.
2. During the barge (three-way conversation), any of the three parties may release themselves from the call;
the other two parties remain connected.
3. The monitor activity, which is silent, is automatically canceled if the agent transfers to another party.
4. If the connection between the calling party and the agent is terminated prior to the supervisor’s response to
the monitor request, the request is automatically canceled.
5. While the supervisory position handles the ACD call, the LCD display for the service indication for
“MONITOR ME” (see OPERATING PROCEDURE for details of indication) and the chime informs the
supervisory position with the request. On the LCD of agent position, “MONITOR BUSY” is displayed.
6. When the supervisory position is logged off or in BREAK mode, the service indication of “MONITOR
VACANT” or “MONITOR BREAK” is displayed on the agent position’s LCD at each time. However, the
supervisor can not find the service request via its LCD display.
CAUTION: The use of a monitoring device to eavesdrop may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Legal
advice should be sought before implementing any practice that monitors a telephone conversation.
Some federal and state laws require the monitoring party to use beep tones, to notify all parties to the
telephone conversation, or to obtain the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation. Some of
these laws incorporate strict penalties.
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: ACDSPL - Assign the ACD line’s number of the supervisory position as the assistance call’s desti-
nation and the service activated with ASSIST key.
ASSIST: ACD line of the supervisory position
ASSIST Key or MONITOR ME
Step 2: AKYD - Apply “ASSIST” key to the function key.
KYN =
KYI =
FKY =
7 (as an example)
1
41 (ASSIST)
CHAPTER 5
Page 270
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MULTI-SPLIT AGENT - ACD
M-90A MULTI-SPLIT AGENT - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature allows an individual agent to handle calls from a maximum of four (ACDP software R1 or R2)/
sixteen splits (ACDP software R3). The agent’s logon ID is programmed to specify whether the agent is
permitted to handle calls from a single split (single-split mode) or from multiple splits (multi-split mode).
The agent’s logon ID is programmed to specify which splits the agent can service. The logon ID permits one to
four/sixteen specific splits to be listed, or access to any split to be indicated. If specific splits are listed, then a
priority (or preference level) is assigned to each split. There are 99 priority levels (1>99); splits can be assigned
the same level.
An agent who is servicing multiple splits will have calls assigned based on a two-level algorithm. The first level
of assignment is based on the priorities of the splits. Calls from the split with the highest priority will always be
connected before calls from splits with lower priorities. The second level of assignment is the amount of time
that the longest waiting call has been in queue. This level is only used if two or more splits have the same
priority. If splits have the same priority, then the call with the longest time in queue will always be connected
before calls that have spent less time in queue. The following examples, where an agent is servicing four queues,
illustrate the two-level algorithm.
Table 5-3 Call Distribution Algorithm - I
SPLIT
NUMBER
PRIORITY
LEVEL
CALLS IN
QUEUE
LONGEST
WAITING CALL
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
3
1
4
7
3
15 seconds
45 seconds
20 seconds
50 seconds
In this case, the call in Split 1 will be connected to the agent. Split 1 has the highest priority of the splits that the
agent is serving. Thus, the fact that Split 1 has the fewest calls and the call with the shortest time in queue is not
a consideration.
Table 5-4 Call Distribution Algorithm - II
SPLIT
NUMBER
PRIORITY
LEVEL
CALLS IN
QUEUE
LONGEST
WAITING CALL
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
3
0
4
7
3
60 seconds
35 seconds
65 seconds
In this example, the next call that is connected to the agent will be the longest waiting call from Split 2. The split
with the highest priority, Split 1, does not have any calls in queue. Split 2 and Split 3 have the same (and next
highest) priority. Thus, the longest waiting call will be selected, and that call resides in Split 2 (60 seconds as
opposed to 35 seconds).
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 271
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MULTI-SPLIT AGENT - ACD
The splits that an agent can handle are not based solely on the agent’s logon ID. A combination of three factors
determines which splits a specific agent, at a specific position, can handle. These factors and their associated
variables are:
1. The splits allowed by the agent’s logon ID, which can be a list of one to four/sixteen specific splits, or any
split.
2. The splits allowed by the position, which can be one specific split or any split.
3. The split mode allowed by the agent’s logon ID, which can be single-split or multi-split.
The ensuing paragraphs describe the scenarios associated with each possible combination of the three factors.
While examining these scenarios, it would be beneficial to reference Table 5-5. The table’s horizontal axis
describes the agent’s logon ID (split mode and allowed splits) and the vertical axis describes the position’s
allowed splits. The intersection presents the split mode in which the agent will operate and the split or splits the
agent will service (indicated with lower-case letters in parentheses).
The single-split mode scenarios will be examined first.
An agent, in single-split mode, whose logon ID lists one to four/sixteen allowable splits can log on to a position
with a single specified split (which matches one of the agent’s logon ID splits) or a position with any split
allowed. As an example, an agent’s logon ID specifies the splits 2, 5, 8 and 12. The agent can log on at a position
that specifies one of those splits (2, 5, 8 or 12). Alternatively, the agent can log on to a position that allows any
split. During the logon procedure, the splits in the logon ID list are displayed sequentially. The agent indicates
the single split of choice by entering 1#; entering # indicates that this is not the split of choice. The agent’s split
defaults, such as the after-call mode and the answer mode, will be the defaults associated with the single split
that is chosen.
An agent, in single-split mode, whose logon ID permits any split can only logon at a position that permits a
single specified split. The agent will take calls from the single split and the agent’s split defaults will be the
defaults associated with that split.
An agent, in single-split mode, whose logon ID allows any split is not permitted to log on at a position that
allows any split. This combination would force the ACD system to begin to sequentially prompt the agent with
the name of every split in the system, until the agent selected the single split in which they wish to work. This
is not an effective use of agents’ time.
The multi-split mode scenarios will now be examined.
An agent, in multi-split mode, is not permitted to have a logon ID which allows any split. This combination
would force the ACD system to begin to sequentially prompt the agent with the name of every split in the
system, until the agent selected the splits in which they wish to work. As in the previous case, this is not an
effective use of agents’ time.
If taken together, the last scenario of the single-split mode (an agent’s logon ID allows any split, the agent is not
permitted to log on at a position which allows any split), and the first scenario of the multi-split mode (an agent’s
logon ID which allows any split is not permitted), the following ACD condition is the result. If an agent’s logon
ID allows any split, then the agent will automatically be put into single-split mode and will not be allowed to
log on at a position which allows any split.
CHAPTER 5
Page 272
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MULTI-SPLIT AGENT - ACD
An agent, in multi-split mode, whose logon ID allows a list of specific splits can log on at a position that allows
a single specified split (where the split matches one of the allowed splits in the agent’s logon ID list) or at a
position that allows any split. In both cases, the agent will automatically be allowed to handle calls from every
split in the agent’s logon ID list. As an example, the agent’s logon ID list allows splits 2, 5 and 8. The agent logs
on at a position that allows Split 5. The agent will be allowed to handle calls from splits 2, 5 and 8. The same
agent logs on at a position that allows any split. The agent will be allowed to handle calls from splits 2, 5 and 8.
The agent’s split defaults, such as the after-call mode and the answer mode, will be the defaults associated with
the agent’s logon ID attribute split. The attribute split is the first split in the list of allowable splits.
The CW lamp (Call Waiting), for an agent in multi-split mode, reflects the status of every split that the agent is
servicing. The CW lamp serves as a visual indication for changes in the depth of each split queue. Thresholds
for each split queue, based on the quantity of calls in the split queue, are programmed to force the CW lamp to
light or flash. There are two separate thresholds. Please refer to Call Waiting Indication - LCD Display/CW
Lamp - ACD [C-68A] for related information. Since the CW lamp is related to multiple splits, the lamp is used
to indicate the most “severe” case at any given time. For example, the CW lamp reflects the status of the first
split that has either reached a threshold, the first to reach a higher threshold (flashing), or the status of the split
which has exceeded a threshold by the greatest amount of calls.
The NIGHT lamp, for an agent in multi-split mode, reflects the night mode of the attribute split. The agent is
allowed to put the attribute split into Night mode, or remove the attribute split from Night mode.
Table below summarizes the valid combinations of an agent’s split mode, the splits allowed to the agent, and
the splits allowed to the position. Recall that a logon ID which allows the agent to operate in multi-split mode
and service any split is not permitted. The intersection of the rows and columns presents the split mode in which
the agent will operate and the split or splits the agent will service (indicated with lower-case letters in
parentheses; (a), (b), (c), (d)).
Table 5-5 Valid Logon ID/Position Combinations
Agent’s Logon ID-ACDLOG
Split Mode - single split or multi split:MULTS=0/1
Allowed Splits - List (a, b, c, d) or Any Split:SPLIT
Position’s Allowed
Splits-ACDPSN
Single-Split List
(a, b, c, d)
Single-Split
Any Split
Multi Split List
(a, b, c, d)
Single (a):SPLC=1
Any:SPLC=0
Single (a)
Single (a)
Multi (a, b, c, d)
Multi (a, b, c, d)
Single (a, b, c, d)
Not Allowed
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 273
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MULTI-SPLIT AGENT - ACD
The splits allowed to a position or an agent can be changed by using the ACD MAT, the MIS, or a Supervisor
Tally-Oh Code. These changes can be implemented while agents are logged on at positions. The impact on the
agent’s call handling and the agent’s ability to log on at the same position in the future are described by the two
general statements which follow.
1. If the changes to the splits allowed the position and/or the splits allowed the agent produce a situation which
is not a valid combination, the agent will be allowed to continue handling calls as before until the agent logs
off.
2. If the changes to the splits allowed the position and/or the splits allowed the agent produce a situation which
is not a valid combination, the agent will not be allowed to log on at the same position after the agent logs
off.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
This feature is implemented through ACD MAT assignments. The three critical areas which underpin the feature
are:
1. The split mode of the agent, which is part of the agent logon ID, is programmed on an agent basis.
2. The splits that an agent can service, which is part of the agent logon ID, is programmed on an agent basis.
3. The splits allowed at a position are programmed on a position basis.
PROGRAMMING
ACDLOG -
SPLIT:
Split no. which an agent belongs to (1-250)
four splits - when using PBX software R4~Series 7300 and ACD software R1, R2
sixteen splits - since PBX software Series 7400 and ACD software R3
PERFORMANCE: Priority order to handle ACD calls terminated to each split (1-99)
When the priority is not taken, assign all “1” here.
MULTI-SPLIT:
Multi Split or Single Split
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 274
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NIGHT SERVICE - ACD
N-12A NIGHT SERVICE - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature provides alternate routing for calls destined for a particular split. When Night mode is in effect for
a split and a call attempts to queue to that split, the call is routed to a programmed pilot number (night pilot
number), used by the split, instead of being queued. At this point, the call is handled by the Call Control Vector
(CCV) of the new pilot number. Refer to Call Control Vector - ACD [C-108A] for related information. Night
mode is invoked manually by pressing the NIGHT key, or automatically by the MIS.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
[Manual Change-over]
Night Mode Engage:
1. The supervisor presses the NIGHT key while logged onto the ACD system.
2. ENTER NIGHT/FWD? is shown on the display and the agent presses 1# to confirm entering Night mode.
3. At this point, the split goes into Night mode, the NIGHT lamp is lit at all the positions in the split, and
incoming calls are routed to the night pilot number programmed from the ACD Screens.
Night Mode Cancel:
1. Night mode may be canceled by pressing the NIGHT key again. EXIT NIGHT? is shown on the display and
the agent presses 1# to confirm entering Day mode.
2. At this point, the split exits night service and the NIGHT lamp is extinguished at all the positions in the
split.
[Automatic Change-over]
Automatic change-over from Day mode to Night mode and vice versa is accomplished from the MIS system.
See the manual described on the MIS functions.
Note: MIS cannot change split from day to night mode when night pilot involves a week schedule.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. The pilot number used for Night mode cannot contain a “*” or a “#”.
2. The pilot number for Night mode may invoke either aWeek Schedule or a CCV.
3. The NIGHT lamp shows the current night status regardless of whether the night status was changed
automatically or manually.
4. When a call attempts to queue to a split using a Queue to Split instruction in a CCV and the split is in Night
mode, the Night mode routing for the split is only followed if the split is the primary split for the call. If the
split is a secondary split, the Queue to Split instruction is skipped. A primary split is the split specified in
the first queuing instruction in a CCV. Splits specified in subsequent queuing instructions in the CCV are
referred to as secondary splits.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 275
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NIGHT SERVICE - ACD
5. When a call attempts to queue to a split using the Conditional Queue to Split instruction in a CCV and the
split is in Night mode, the Conditional Queue to Split instruction is skipped.
6. When alternate routing is required by a split, Call Forwarding - Split - ACD [C-127A] may be used to
provide a more dynamic choice of the pilot number used for the new routing.
7. When a split enters Night mode automatically, using the MIS, Call Forwarding - Split - ACD [C-127A] is
canceled.
8. For multi-split positions the NIGHT key activates night mode for the agent’s attribute split only. The
attribute split is the first split assigned for the agent’s logon ID. Refer to Multi-Split Agent - ACD [M-90A]
for related information.
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: ACDPLT - ALTERNATE NIGHT CCV:
INDEX:
STEP:
CCV index number to be routed in the night mode
CCV step number to be routed in the night mode
Step 2: ACDSPL - Assign the pilot number of the Night mode destination.
DIR NUMBER NIGHT: 5 digits maximum
Step 3: AKYD - Assign “Night” key to a supervisory position when DAY/NIGHT mode is changed over
by the supervisory position.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 276
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NON-ACD CALL - ACD
N-14A NON-ACD CALL - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature allows agents and supervisors to receive calls from and place calls to other ports in the system (e.g.,
PBX stations, attendants, trunks). When and agent or supervisor position is called using their PBX directory
number, the call appears on the PBX line provided for that purpose. The same PBX line also permits agents and
supervisors to place outgoing calls.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
The operation to place and receive calls on the PBX line is like any other PBX line with all the associated
privileges and restrictions.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. The PBX line is not essential to ACD operation. Both agents and supervisors can operate without a PBX
line. Agents and supervisors would only lose the ability to place non-ACD calls.
2. Direct incoming calls to PBX lines are permitted. When a call is received, or placed, on a PBX line, it is
tagged as a non-ACD call by the MIS.
PROGRAMMING
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 277
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OVERFLOW - ACD
O-10A OVERFLOW - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature allows an ACD incoming call, which queues to a split for the predetermined period, queue to
another SPLIT automatically and simultaneously. The agents capable of attendance, ther earlier connection may
be achieved.
The overflow destination can be a split, extension, announcement, IVR, trunk, attendant console, etc. "Overflow
- ACD" feature indicates overflow to another split.
Operation Procedure
None
Service Conditions
1. When a call overflow to another split, the call is queued to the original split and the overflowed split
simultaneously. The overflowed call can be overflowed again to another split. Likewise a call can be queued
onto four (4) splits simultaneously. If simultaneous queuing is not required, a queue done by overflow can
be denied (de-queued) by the office data.
2. Simple overflow (by the predetermined period) and conditional overflow are available. You can choose
simple overflow, or one kind of conditional overflow by the office data. The applicable conditional
overflows are below:
•
Queued call reaches the predetermined period and the number of queuing calls reaches the threshold (1-
99)
•
Queued call reaches the predetermined period and the number of vacant agents becomes the threshold
(1-250)
3. When an ACD call (which is not an overflowed call) and an overflowed call are in queue, the call
termination priority can be assigned by office data. The system computes the priority of an ACD call (1-
250 determined by ACDPLT) and overflowed call (1-250 determined by the ACDCCV "Up Priority"
setting), the the prior party (the smaller priority number is given) to be terminated to the available agent. If
priority data for the calls are the same, the call termination by the FIFO orders.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 278
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIORITY QUEUING - ACD
P-21A PRIORITY QUEUING - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The ACD system supports 250 different queue priorities for every split. Priorities in a split queue are assigned
such that priority “1” calls have the highest priority and priority “250” calls have the lowest priority. Calls with
a higher priority will be serviced, in the order in which they were queued, before calls with a lower priority,
regardless of the waiting time of the calls with a lower priority.
A particular call’s priority is determined by the following factors:
1. Call origination (incoming trunk or internal station).
2. Call transfer (by attendant or station).
3. Pilot number dialed.
4. CCV priority change steps.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
When implementing a system which will use multiple priorities for incoming callers there are several important
concepts to keep in mind:
[HIGHEST PRIORITY CALLERS ALWAYS GO FIRST]
Callers with a higher priority are always serviced before those with lower priorities. As a result of this a low
priority call could remain in queue forever or at least as long as higher priority calls continue to arrive. This
situation can be rectified by proper CCV programming. After a low priority call has been in queue for some
amount of time a “New Priority” step in the CCV can change a call’s priority. It should be changed to something
at least as high as, if not higher than, the highest priority in use for other calls.
In this way a low priority caller is only penalized (kept at a low priority) for a certain amount of time after which
it will be treated similarly to the higher priority calls coming in.
[DETERMINING TRUNK CALLER PRIORITY]
The priority of an incoming trunk call is determined by checking two places.
•
•
A priority assigned to the trunk group (route)
A priority assigned to the pilot number dialed
The higher of these two priorities will be used for the call.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Calls transferred into the ACD by PBX stations and calls transferred by attendants have the same priority.
CHAPTER 5
Page 280
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIORITY QUEUING - ACD
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: ACDTG -
Assign the priority order to each ACD route.
PRIORITY: Queue priority of ACD route (1-250) (1>250)
Step 2: ACDPLT - Assign the priority order for ACD calls terminated to each pilot number
TRUNK: Priority order of ACD calls from a trunk (1~250)
INTERNAL: Priority order of ACD calls from a station (1~250)
TRANSFER: Priority order of ACD calls to be transferred (1~250)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 281
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PILOT NUMBERS - ACD
P-40A PILOT NUMBERS - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Pilot numbers are the access codes to ACD functions. They are programmed into the PBX-side database
according to the numbering plan in effect for the system. Pilot numbers do not correspond to any line
appearances, either physical or virtual, in the system. No physical equipment is required to assign a pilot
number.
Although pilot numbers are often thought of as ringing into a particular split, pilot numbers are associated with
a Call Control Vector (refer to Call Control Vector - ACD [C-108A]) which in turn controls the handling of the
ACD call. Since most Call Control Vectors will present a call to a split as one of their first functions, the pilot
numbers appear as if they are connecting the ACD call to a split.
An ID can be associated with a pilot number. This ID will be displayed at an agent’s position when the agent
accepts a call that entered the system via that pilot number. An example of this display is TECH SUPPORT.
If an incoming ACD call enters the system through a pilot number and the receiving agent uses a pilot number
to transfer the call to an agent in another split, the transferred call will be identified by the ID associated with
the former pilot number. If an ID is not associated with the former pilot number, the call will be identified by
the ID associated with the latter pilot number. For example, an agent in Split A receives a call via a pilot number
with an associated ID of “SERVICE”, resulting in SERVICE being displayed at the agent’s position. The agent
uses a pilot number to transfer the call to Split B. Split B has an associated ID of “PARTS”. The agent who
receives the transferred call in Split B will have PARTS n displayed at his position. If an ID was not associated
with the original pilot number, the agent in Split B will have PARTS displayed at his position.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Only the digits “0” to “9” may be used (“*” and “#” are not allowed) with a minimum of two digits and a
maximum of five digits in each Pilot Number.
PROGRAMMING
CHAPTER 5
Page 282
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PERSONAL EMERGENCY AND ASSIST - ACD
P-45A PERSONAL EMERGENCY AND ASSIST - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature allows an agent to have a designated individual supervisor’s number as the destination for an assist
request (personal assist request number) and a designated individual supervisor’s number as the destination for
an emergency request (personal emergency request number). If these personal numbers are defined for an agent,
then these numbers will be used instead of the emergency and assist numbers that are defined for a split. If these
personal numbers are not defined, then the request (emergency/assist) will be directed to the supervisor who was
designated for the split. In the latter case, the split is the split in which the agent received the call. This is true
for an agent working in single-split or multi-split mode. Please refer to Multi-Split Agent - ACD [M-90A] for
related information.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
For these examples, the agent’s name will be Molly and the supervisor’s name will be Kathey.
To place a personal assistance request:
1. While on an ACD call, Molly at extension is 4302 presses the ASSIST key. The ASSIST lamp turns on and
ASSIST KATHEY is displayed on the agent’s position indicating whose supervisor position is receiving the
call.
2. The ACD call is placed on hold and an automatic transfer to the designated supervisor is initiated.
3. The agent hears ringback tone and the supervisor’s position is rung.
4. The assistance call will connect on the supervisor’s ACD line and the supervisor’s position will display
either ASSIST MOLLY or ASSIST 4302, depending on whether the agent’s name is programmed with his or
5. After consulting with the supervisor, one of three things may occur:
a. The agent may release from the call thereby completing the transfer of the ACD call to the supervisor.
b. The supervisor may release from the call. This will reconnect the agent and the ACD call.
c. The agent may press the CONF key and invoke a three-way conference between the supervisor, the
agent and the ACD calling party.
6. When either the agent or the supervisor disconnects from the assistance call, the ASSIST lamps are
extinguished and the displays return to their original status.
To cancel a personal assistance request:
1. After initiating an assistance request and before being answered by the supervisor, the agent may cancel
the request by pressing the TRANSFER key.
2. The ASSIST lamp will be extinguished, the agent will be reconnected with the ACD call, and the display
will return to its original status.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 283
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PERSONAL EMERGENCY AND ASSIST - ACD
To place a personal emergency request:
1. While engaged in an ACD call, the agent presses the EMERGENCY key, the agent’s display shows EMR
KATHEY, and the associated lamp is lit.
2. The supervisor’s phone rings with the emergency displays shown below.
3. The supervisor will silently monitor the agent and the calling party.
4. The supervisor’s display shows EMR 4302 DDD 28, where 4302 is the agent position’s extension and DDD
28 is the trunk type and trunk circuit number to which the agent is connected.
5. When the supervisor answers, the agent’s display will show EMERG ANSWERED and the EMERGENCY
lamp will wink. When the agent releases from the call, or the supervisor releases from the monitor, the
agent’s lamp will be extinguished.
6. The agent and the calling party are never disconnected while the supervisor’s position is ringing.
7. An emergency recorder is connected as soon as the supervisor’s position answers and is disconnected if the
supervisor joins the call in a three-way conference by pressing the MON/BARGE key. The recorder is also
disconnected if the supervisor releases from the monitor using the RELEASE key.
To cancel a personal emergency request:
1. If the request is routed to an individual supervisor’s ACD or PBX line, the request can be canceled by
pressing the EMERGENCY key.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. The ASSIST key and the personal assist request number are dedicated to one of two features; either the key
and the number are used for the ASSIST feature or they are used for the Monitor Me - ACD [M-89A]
feature. The choice is indicated through an ACD MAT command on a split-wide basis.
2. When a Personal Emergency or Personal Assist call destination is a station which has Call Forward All,
Busy or Don’t Answer set the call will not be forwarded.
PROGRAMMING
Step 1: ACDLOG - Personal Assist Request number
Personal Emergency Request number
Step 2: ACDSPL - ASSIST key or MONITOR ME
CHAPTER 5
Page 284
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
QUEUING - ACD
Q-1A
QUEUING - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
There are two queues for every split. One queue contains a prioritized list of callers waiting to be connected to
agents and the other queue contains a list of agents waiting to be connected to callers starting with the agent who
has been ready the longest. A queue will be empty when there are no waiting callers or no waiting agents.
If agents are available to handle a call, the agent queue contains a list of the agents, starting with the highest
priority (preference level) agent who has been waiting the longest period of time for a call, and ending with the
lowest priority agent who has been waiting the shortest period of time for a call. Refer to Call Distribution to
If callers are waiting to be connected to agents, the call queue contains a list of the calls, starting with the highest
priority calls which have been waiting the longest period of time to be connected to an agent, and ending with
the lowest priority calls which have been waiting the shortest period of time to be connected to an agent.
Callers may be suspended in queue while conducting certain voice transactions with IVR equipment. At this
time it is possible to have a (suspended) caller in the call queue while at the same time have available agents in
the agent queue.
There are two distinct ways to present a call to a split. Each way provides a different algorithm for connecting
the call to an agent or placing the call in queue.
1. Standard queuing:
Standard queuing always connects a call with an available agent or queues the call when an agent is not
available. Calls are queued according to their priority. The only limit to standard queuing is the split’s max-
imum depth. Upon finding the queue full, alternate routing may be invoked, if alternate routing has been
programmed. Please refer to the If not Queued, Goto or Busy instruction, under Call Control Vector - ACD
[C-108A], for additional information.
A split’s maximum queue depth may be specified in one of two ways:
•
As an absolute number. This count defines the maximum number of callers who may wait in queue for
the split.
•
As a percentage of the number of working agents. This percentage is specified in 5% increments from
5% to 1000%. Working agents are those agents in theWork Mode or on an ACD call. When the queue
depth is specified as a percentage of working agents the depth will change up and down as agents logon,
take breaks and logoff. There may be occasions when there are more calls in queue than the queue depth
might appear to permit. No new calls may queue until the current depth is reduced below the current
maximum allowed.
If the percentage is set to 150% and there are 18 agents working then the queue depth for that moment
will be set at 27.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 285
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
QUEUING - ACD
2. Conditional queuing:
One of the two following conditions (programmed on a split-wide basis) will be checked before a call is
either connected to an agent or queued.
a. Minimum Agent Availability
The system will check for a minimum number of available agents before connecting the call. If the
number of available agents is greater than or equal to the minimum specified, the call is accepted and
connected to the longest-waiting available agent. For example, if the minimum agent threshold is set
at “3”, then calls are connected if there are three or more available agents. If there are two or fewer
available agents the call will be processed by the next step in the Call Control Vector (refer to “Call
b. Maximum Queue Depth
The system will check for a maximum number of calls in the split’s queue, at the time the call is pre-
sented. If the queue depth is less than the maximum specified, the call may be queued or connected if
agents are available. For example, if the maximum queue depth is set at “3”, then calls are connected
if there are fewer than three calls in queue. If there are three or more calls in queue the call will be
processed by the next step in the Call Control Vector (refer to Call Control Vector - ACD [C-108A]).
A Call Control Vector (CCV), which is assigned to a Pilot Number, allows certain calls to queue to a split, and
specifies standard or conditional queuing. When conditional queuing is used, the type (condition) and threshold
must be selected for the split. A split may receive standard queuing calls from one CCV while receiving
information.
The following types of calls are permitted to queue to an ACD split when agents in the split are not available to
handle calls:
1. Calls to the C.O. trunk assigned to the ACD split.
2. A DID or Tie trunk call that dialed the Pilot Number associated with the split.
3. Automatic Ringdown Tie trunk terminations.
4. Calls transferred by the attendant.
5. Calls overflowed from other splits.
6. Calls forwarded by the split supervisor of another split.
7. Calls transferred by PBX stations or ACD agents.
8. Calls transferred by Night mode.
9. Direct station calls.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
This feature is implemented through the programming of CCVs.
CHAPTER 5
Page 286
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
QUEUING - ACD
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Queuing Limitations:
a. An incoming ACD call can follow a set of instructions in the CCV, associated with the pilot number,
and encounter many different splits. If all the splits are busy, the call is allowed to queue to the first
four splits it encounters. Additional splits may be programmed in the CCV, but no queuing is permitted
if the splits are busy. A Dequeue instruction removes the call from one or all of the queues it currently
occupies. After dequeuing, additional splits may be programmed and queuing will take place.
b. A limited number of queue sports are available in the ACD system. If a call is queued to four different
splits, it has absorbed four queue spots. In the unlikely event that all the queue spots in the ACD system
are in use, the split queue will not accept additional calls even though its queue depth limit has not
been reached.
2. Queue Size Restrictions:
a. Queues are basically unlimited in size; however, a maximum queue depth may be specified when
designing the database. For example, a small split having only six agents should not allow 220 queued
calls. This would result in numerous abandoned calls. A maximum queue size of 15 would be more
appropriate for this particular split. Once full, additional calls would get busy tone or endless ringing,
depending on CCV programming. Each split’s queue is programmed with a maximum size which may
be an absolute number (1 to 700) or may be stated as a percentage of logged on agents (5% to 1000%).
b. The total number of all calls waiting in all queues combined with the total number of all calls currently
connected to agents is limited to the maximum number of Call Records. Refer to the ACD Job
Specification for the quantity of Call Records allocated for each ACD system.
3. Queue Timing Restrictions:
a. There is no limit on how long a call may remain in queue. There are ways of removing calls from
queues including the caller disconnecting, a successful transfer to a PBX number, a Dequeue
instruction in the CCV, or the call being answered by an agent from another queue. Encountering an
END instruction in a CCV does not remove the call from the queue.
PROGRAMMING
ACDSPL - Assign the maximum number of queued calls
1-700 calls
5% - 1000% (in increments of 5)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 287
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RELEASE - ACD POSITION - ACD
R-19A RELEASE - ACD POSITION - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature allows an agent who is using a headset to release from a call by pressing the RELEASE key, rather
than for the other party to disconnect.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. While engaged in a call, the agent or supervisor presses the RELEASE key.
2. The calling party is immediately disconnected and the agent or supervisor becomes idle with after-call
availability set accordingly. Refer to Availability - ACD Position - ACD [A-37A] for related information.
PROGRAMMING
AKYD - Assign RELEASE function to a feature key.
CHAPTER 5
Page 288
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RING DELAY - ACD
R-145A RING DELAY - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature is programmed in a Call Control Vector (ACDCCV) using the Ring Delay step followed by a
parameter of from one to 15 seconds. Once a call has traversed a Ring Delay step then the ring delay feature will
be applied to that call when it ultimately connects to an agent.
The effect of the Ring Delay feature on a call is that once an agent has been selected to receive this call there
will be a delay in connection of up to 15 seconds. This delay is intentionally inserted to provide a window during
which a host computer could paint information on the agent’s screen which is pertinent to the call. The Host
Computer is allowed to shorten the Ring Delay cycle by sending an appropriate Infolink command to the ACD.
This message (IHx) will cause the call to immediately ring through to the agent’s position.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. The accuracy of the timing on the Ring Delay feature is +/- 2 seconds.
2. For a Ring Delay step in a CCV to be effective it must appear before the Queue To (Queue Assign or
Conditional Queue Assign) step, otherwise the Ring Delay step may not be reached if calls ring in and go
directly to a waiting agent.
3. When the agent position is turned into the Work Mode or Break Mode while on Ring Delay step, the
position goes in Work Mode or Break Mode after the communication ends as in the manner that the position
presses the WORK/BREAK key while handling the ACD call (The ACD call is terminated to the position
after Ring Delay step as normal processing).
4. When the call is distributed to execute more than one Ring Delay step, Ring Delay step which is
programmed the longest time will be executed.
5. While RING DELAY is executed, the MIS displays “READY”. The call abandoned during Ring Delay step
is counted as “Abandoned Call before Announcement”, “Abandoned Call after the First Announcement”,
or “Abandoned Call after the Second Announcement” in the static report.
PROGRAMMING
ACDCCV -
CCV ACTION: Ring Delay
ARGUMENT: 1-15 seconds
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 289
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPLITS - ACD
S-91A SPLITS - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A Split is a basic building block of a call center and is generally thought to consist of a group of agents
performing a similar task, a prioritized queue for incoming callers and possibly a supervisor position to oversee
the caller and agent activity within the split. The supervisor may have a sophisticated statistics program
available to monitor the caller and agent activity which will provide both realtime as well as historical
information.
Many features are provided on a per-split basis and applied equally to all agents in the split or all callers in the
split’s queue. Here is a brief summary of the features available for a split. Most of these are discussed in detail
on their respective pages and are included here for summary information only.
After ACD Call Mode
At the conclusion of each call an agent can be automatically either available or in wrap up mode depending on
this setting. Straightforward key presses at the agent instrument allows individual agents to override this feature
on a call-by-call basis.
Agent Queueing Options * Available since the PBX software Series 7400 and the ACD software R3.
An option exists where the agent’s preference levels can be checked in order to decide which agent should
receive the next incoming call. When preference levels are not being checked then the call will go to the longest
waiting agent. If preference levels are being checked then the agent with the highest preference level is located
and if there are more than one with the same preference level then the longest waiting one will be assigned the
call.
The Agent preference level data for this feature is also used to decide the preference level of incoming ACD call
when using Multi-Split Agent - ACD [M-90A] (Preference levels 1 through 99 (1>99) can be programmed using
feature, there are the following conditions.
a. if there are no ACD calls waiting in the queue:
Agent Queueing Options is available for the ACD call to be routed to the split where
Agent Queueing Options is effective (when multiple splits are allowed for Agent Queueing Options,
the agent may have different preference level for each split).
b. if there are ACD calls waiting to be queued in multiple splits:
Analog Work Timeout
Analog positions within a split may utilize a different after-call-work timeout than digital station users.
Answer Mode
By default, agent phones may be setup for auto answer which provides zip tone and an automatic connection or
manual answer in which case the agent’s position will ring and the incoming call should be answered in the
normal fashion. Straightforward key presses at the agent instrument allows individual agents to override this
feature on a call-by-call basis.
CHAPTER 5
Page 290
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPLITS - ACD
Assist Destination
A destination to receive calls when an agent presses the Assist Key can be specified for each split.
Auto Ready after PBX Call
A feature may be setup such that an agent’s position will be automatically replaced in the Ready Mode at the
conclusion of a call on their PBX line.
Auto Work with PBX Answer
ACD positions may be automatically placed in the Work Mode when an agent answers an incoming call on their
PBX line.
Auto Work with PBX Ringing
ACD positions may be automatically placed in the Work Mode when an incoming call begins to ring on their
PBX line.
Auto Work with PBX Dialing
ACD positions may be automatically placed in the Work Mode when an agent receives dial tone in order to place
an outgoing call on their PBX line.
Break Types
By simply pressing a digit ‘1’ through ‘9’ when entering the Break Mode the MIS systems can track more
closely how an agent’s time is being spent.
Call Recover Timer
After a call has been assigned to an agent’s position it is expected to be answered within a certain short period
of time. If the call is not answered it can be programmed to be recovered and placed back in queue. At this time
it will be connected immediately to another agent if one is available or will wait as the highest priority call to
be connected as soon as one is available.
Call Waiting Chime On
The Call Waiting feature includes an optional chime which sounds only at ACD positions which are in the Work
Mode at the moment the CW light turns on or begins flashing.
Call Waiting Threshold
The Call Waiting LED can be programmed to light when ‘X’ calls are in queue and begin flashing when there
are ‘Y’ calls in queue. The thresholds are programmed independently for each split.
Conditional Threshold
Certain splits may be programmed to only accept overflow calls from other splits only if certain thresholds have
not been exceeded. Either too many calls in queue or not enough available agents can prevent conditionally
queued incoming calls from reaching this split.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 291
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPLITS - ACD
Do Not Disturb Mode
When a split is unstaffed it operates in a Do Not Disturb Mode. Calls may be either allowed or restricted from
queueing during this mode.
Emergency Destination
A destination to receive calls when an agent presses the Emergency Key can be specified for each split.
Emergency Recorder
A recording device can be specified to record calls in the event of an emergency. The agent must operate the
Emergency Key before a call can be recorded.
Headset Jack Out Mode
When an agent’s headset jack is removed from the telephone this can either automatically log the agent out or
place the agent in break mode. Additionally the agent will have keys available to effect either of these conditions
as well.
Hot Split
When a split is specified as a Hot Split then all ACD positions which are programmed for that split are
automatically logged on when the ACD is initialized. This is most useful for ports which are typically staffed
with machines like dictation equipment, answering machines, voice mail, etc.
Logoff Warning * Available since the PBX software Series 7400 and the ACD software R3.
When logoff warning feature is enabled agents will receive a visual display and their logoff key will be ignored
(one key press only is ignored) if an agent attempts to logoff while there are still calls in queue.
Logon ID
Agents are expected to use a logon ID to gain access to an ACD position. It is via this ID that the ACD becomes
aware of what kind of calls should be assigned to this position.
Queue depth
The number of calls waiting to be answered in a split’s queue can be limited as an absolute value or as a
percentage based on the number of agents logged in and working. Of course the limits can be set to such a level
as to be virtually unlimited.
Monitor Me Destination
A destination to receive calls when an agent dials the Monitor Me code can be specified for each split. A
supervisor is alerted to the agent’s request for monitoring and should commence a silent monitor to that station.
Night Destination
A destination pilot number can be specified to receive incoming ACD calls when a split goes to Night Mode.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 292
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPLITS - ACD
Stranded Calls CCV
If there are calls remaining in queue even after the last agent has logged off they will be forwarded automatically
to the Stranded Calls CCV if on has been specified.
Tally Code Required * Available since the PBX software Series 7400 and the ACD software R3.
When per-call tally is enabled an agent is required to enter a tally code for each ACD call received before a new
call will be assigned. The tally code may be entered either during the call or during the wrap up mode.
Work Mode Restriction
The ability for agents to selectively enter the work mode can be restricted. In such an environment agents will
normally be forced to take one incoming call after another or enter the break mode.
Work Mode Timeout
The amount of time allocated for after call work mode wrap up can be set for each split. At the conclusion of
that time period the agent will be automatically placed in the ready mode in order to receive a new incoming
ACD call.
By properly assigning these features each split can customize the method of operation to suit the needs of the
agents and clients. Additionally, it may be advantageous for an agent to be a member of multiple splits at one
The Supervisor Concept
The concept of a supervisor or a supervisor position has no formal definition within this ACD. Some of the
traditional ideas of a supervisor are described below and in all cases these features or attributes may be applied
to any agent or agent position.
Can utilize the Performance Appraisal/Silent Monitor feature.
This feature is activated through the use of the MON/BARGE key and is available to any agent position
equipped with such a key. It is not hard to imagine an environment where a senior agent may be responsible for
doing some of the performance appraisals but not be considered the “Supervisor”. Every position may be
equipped with a MON/BARGE key.
Has access to the Realtime and Historical Report MIS Information.
This capability is provided by external computer (PC) equipment. It is a management decision that determines
who will be provided with such computer equipment. We would expect most “Supervisors” to have access but
certainly other individuals may have a need for such information as well.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Every position in the ACD may be a member of the same split.
PROGRAMMING
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 293
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPLIT DISPLAY - ACD POSITION - ACD
S-97A SPLIT DISPLAY - ACD POSITION - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The name of the split that a position belongs to can be displayed while the position is in Vacant mode. This
maintenance feature helps the user determine which positions belong to which splits.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. While the position is Vacant, press the AUTO/MAN key or the WORK key.
2. Two four-second displays will follow each other providing some brief statistics pertaining to the split this
position belong to.
•
the current queue depth and wait time of the longest caller is displayed first:
Q = 1 WAIT = 4:38
•
the name of the split and an estimated time to answer (ETA) for a call just arriving is shown second:
SALES: 5:45
3. The display returns to VACANT.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. This feature is only available when the position is unoccupied.
2. The agent’s display will show SPLIT: ANY if the position is programmed as an any split position and an
attempt is made to use this feature.
PROGRAMMING
None
CHAPTER 5
Page 294
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPLIT SELECTION - ACD
S-98A SPLIT SELECTION - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Split selection is determined by the position in use and the logon ID in use. A logon ID indicates whether the
agent can service a single split (single-split mode) or a maximum of 16 splits concurrently (multi-split mode).
A logon ID can access a maximum of 16 specified splits or any split. A position can access a single specified
split or any split.
When an agent logs on, a validation procedure compares the split assignment of the position with the split
assignment and the split mode of the logon ID. The three factors (position split assignment, logon ID split
assignment, logon ID split mode) determine the split(s) that the agent works in and that are displayed during the
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Split selections are performed automatically by the ACD system when an agent logs on.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. One combination of a position’s split assignment and a logon ID is not allowed. One combination of a split
mode and a split assignment, within the same logon ID, is not allowed. Both combinations are denied
because the determination of the appropriate split(s) would be an ineffective use of ACD system resources
and agent’s time. The two combinations which are not permitted are:
a. A logon ID which allows any split, in combination with a position which allows any split;
b. A logon ID which indicates multi-split mode and allows any split.
2. Changes to the position’s split assignment and/or the logon ID, entered at the ACD MAT or the ACD MIS
terminal, will take effect immediately when the agent logs on.
3. Split assignments for positions and logon IDs are accomplished through ACD assignments.
PROGRAMMING
None
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 295
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STRANDED CALL ROUTING - ACD
S-108A STRANDED CALL ROUTING - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A stranded call is defined as a call left unanswered in queue at the time when the last agent in the split logs off
the ACD system. If this call is not queued to any other split which still has agents logged on then it becomes
“stranded” at the moment the last agent logs off and is a candidate for Stranded Call Routing.
Some call centers operate by placing a split into Night Mode some number of minutes prior to their actual
closing time or more precisely prior to the time when the last agent will log off. This will stop new incoming
calls from being queued while the remaining agents handle the calls which are still in queue. The Stranded Call
Routing feature is not affected by Night Mode and will still be invoked to reroute any calls remaining in queue
when the last agent logs off.
When Stranded Call Routing is invoked each caller remaining in queue will be directed to a new Call Control
Vector and step and continue their ACD processing from that new point. Any CCV sequence may be specified
at this time.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. A caller remains in queue for the Customer Service split.
2. One agent is still working, handling another call and all other agents have logged off and gone home.
3. The last agent finishes the call and enters After Call Work Mode.
4. After some time, and without answering the last call in queue, this agent logs off the system.
5. Since the caller in queue is only in the Customer Service queue and there are no agents remaining in this
split the caller will be immediately rerouted to the Stranded Call CCV destination specified for this split.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Assist and Emergency calls will not be rerouted by the Stranded Call Routing feature.
PROGRAMMING
ACDSPL
CCV index number for Stranded Call Routing (1-900)
CCV step number for Stranded Call Routing (1-20)
CHAPTER 5
Page 296
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRUNK TROUBLE REPORT - MIS - ACD
T-24A TRUNK TROUBLE REPORT - MIS - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature allows an agent to indicate a trouble condition affecting a trunk (e.g., poor transmission) which is
encountered during a call. The system will log the agent’s position number and the number of the connected
trunk. This information is printed out on the ACD MAT and provided to the MIS.
Although this feature is designed primarily to aid in the reporting of defective trunk circuits it does also report
the connected party information even when the connected party is not a trunk such as in a station-to-station call.
Bad Call Notification
The trunk trouble report is logged to the MAT printer under the 6-H heading, Bad Call Notification. A special
code within the 6-H report indicates the occurrence of the trunk trouble report. Additional codes used within the
6-H report are described in detail under Section 3.2.3, "Message Detail Data of System Message “6-H”" in
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. The operations at the ACD agent position and the supervisory position are as follows:
a. The agent is engaged in an ACD call.
b. The TRK TRBL key is pressed on the ACD agent position.
c. TROUBLE REPORTED is displayed on the position for four seconds and the trouble is reported to
both the ACD MAT and the MIS terminal.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
There is no LED indication when the TRK TRBL key is pressed.
PROGRAMMING
AKYD - Assign TRK TRBL function to feature key.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 297
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TALLY COUNT - ACD
T-49A TALLY COUNT - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature allows agents to register the occurrences of several specific events using the dial keypad, such as
responses to various advertising method, sales campaigns, or calls from particular locations.
The MIS system is responsible for keeping a record of each event and may keep additional statistics for the
various Tally Count events such as call duration. If a particular Tally Count pertains to a specific phone
conversation that Tally Count will need to be entered either during the phone call itself or during the After Call
Work time following that call and definitely prior to the beginning of the next ACD call. Once the next call has
begun a Tally Count entry at that time would be associated with the new call. There is no way to associate a
Tally Count with a previous call once a subsequent call has begun.
Multiple Tally Counts may be entered for a single phone call.
This feature is activated by the operation of the TALLY key on the agent position.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. The agent presses the TALLY key at any time. The displays shows TALLY NUMBER?.
2. The agent enters up to 22 digits from the telephone keypad and presses # when finished.
3. The displays shows TALLY ENTERED, for a short time, and then reverts to the previous display.
4. Pressing the TALLY key a second time before pressing the “#” key cancels theTally Count feature.
5. All digits must be entered within a 30-second period or the Tally Count feature will timeout. After timeout,
the feature is reset and all digits will have to be reentered.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Tally Count items are entered by pressing one of the dial keypad digits, “0” through “9” (however, leading
digit “0” is not allowed).
2. The length of tally numbers is variable, to a maximum of 22 digits.
3. The “*” key and the “#” key cannot be used as tally numbers since they are used to erase and enter input.
4. The keypad number “0” cannot be used as the leading digit ofa Tally Count code.
PROGRAMMING
Program the data followed by the manual described MIS functions.
CHAPTER 5
Page 298
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIME OF DAY/WEEK ROUTING - ACD
T-50A TIME OF DAY/WEEK ROUTING - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The routing of incoming calls is controlled by the time of week. A week can be divided into 50 time segments,
with different call handling performed during each segment. Segments must begin and end on whole minutes;
no fractional minutes are allowed. Each segment will specify a Call Control Vector (CCV) number and step
number where call handling will commence (refer to Call Control Vector - ACD [C-108A]). This routing
specification is referred to as a Week Schedule.
Week routing can be interrupted during pre-programmed holidays, at which time a special 24-hour override
table is available with up to eight time segments to provide routing on that day. The override table is referred to
as a Holiday Schedule (refer to Holiday Scheduling - ACD [H-20A]). Holidays may be programmed up to 365
days in advance.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Week Schedule routing is activated by programming a pilot number to invoke a Week Schedule instead of a
CCV.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. This feature uses the PBX system clock to determine the current time. It is the user’s responsibility to
ensure that the clock is accurately set for week routing to make accurate transitions from one time segment
to another.
2. In processing the CCV for a particular time of the week, a Queue to Split instruction in the CCV may find
a split in Night mode or in split call forwarding. In this case, the Night mode or split call forwarding will
take over the routing of the incoming call. See Night Service - ACD [N-12A] and Call Forwarding - Split
PROGRAMMING
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 299
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TALLY-OH CODES - ACD
T-51A TALLY-OH CODES - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Tally-Oh Codes are reserved for special use by agents or supervisors in the ACD system and are not reported to
the MIS. These codes invoke various actions, such as statistical displays and mode changes. Tally-Oh Codes
always begin with the digit zero, “0”. This trait of always using a leading digit of “0” differentiates the Tally-
Oh Codes from the Tally Codes which are reported to the MIS system for statistical analysis.
The Tally-Oh Codes are divided into three categories which are suggestive of the types of users who are most
likely to need those codes. Only the Supervisor Codes can be restricted on a per-position basis. All other codes
may be used at any ACD position.
The following three tables illustrate the purpose and usage of the Tally-Oh Codes for Agents, Supervisors, and
Technicians.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. The agent/supervisor presses the TALLY key at any time. The displays shows TALLY NUMBER?.
2. The agent/supervisor enters the Tally-Oh Code from the telephone keypad and presses “#” when finished.
3. Pressing the TALLY key a second time before pressing the “#” key cancels theTally-Oh Code entry.
4. The Supervisor Tally-Oh Codes must be explicitly enabled on a per-position basis as specified in ACDPSN.
Agent Tally-Oh Codes
Code
Description
Replay agent’s statistics: shift time, number of ACD calls answered, average talk time, total time in work
mode since logging on, and total time in break mode since logging on. Can be used from any mode. After
logging off, statistics can be replayed as many times as necessary until an agent logs onto the position.
All statistics are reset upon logon.
Sample Displays:
SHIFT 3:12:48
000#
(hours, minutes, seconds)
(one to three digits)
(minutes and seconds)
ACD CALLS
AVG TALK
22
3:11
T-WORK 0:55:19
T-BREAK 1:04:31
(hours, minutes and seconds)
(hours, minutes and seconds)
Display queue depth for current split. If used from a vacant position, the position’s split is used. If used
while logged on, the agent’s split is used. For agents working in Multi-Split mode, the queue depths of
001# all of the agent’s splits are displayed, one at a time.
Sample Displays:
ORDERS
10
Display time of longest waiting caller for current split. If used from a vacant position, the position’s split
is used. If used while logged on, the agent’s split is used. For agents working in Multi-Split mode, the
002# longest waiting callers of all of the agent’s splits are displayed, one at a time.
Sample Displays:
SERVICE
1:50
(minutes and seconds)
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 300
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TALLY-OH CODES - ACD
Agent Tally-Oh Codes (Continued)
Description
Code
Display number of working agents in split. A working agent is one that is logged on, and not in break
mode. (Either on an ACD call, in work mode, or ready mode) If used from a vacant position, the
position’s split is used. If used while logged on, the agent’s split is used. For agents working in Multi-
Split mode, the number of working agents for all of the agent’s splits are displayed, one at a time.
Sample Displays:
003#
DOMESTIC
151
(1 to 3 digits)
Display number of agents on break in split. If used from a vacant position, the position’s split is used. If
used while logged on, the agent’s split is used. For agents working in multi-split mode, the number of
004# agents on break for all of the agent’s splits are displayed, one at a time.
Sample Displays:
INTERNAT’L
8
(1 to 3 digits)
Display time passed since entering current mode.Valid for all modes:Vacant,Work, Break, Ready, or
on an ACD call.
Sample Displays:
BREAK 0:41:06
005#
006#
007#
008#
(hours, minutes and seconds)
Monitor Me request. An agent asks a supervisor to monitor the conversation. Only valid while on an
ACD call.
Sample Displays:
MONITOR JAMES
Temporarily disableWork mode time limit.Valid only from Work mode, and disabled only until agent
exits Work mode.
Sample Displays:
TIMEOUT DISABLED
Display time and date for four seconds. Can be used from any mode, including modes such as Ready
and Break where the display normally shows a constant display.
Sample Displays:
4:58 PM MON 28
009# Clear permanent display such as “READY”, “ON BREAK”, or “VACANT”.
028# Unlock an agent’s own position (Emergency use only).
029# Force an agent’s own position to logoff (Emergency use only).
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 301
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TALLY-OH CODES - ACD
Supervisor Tally-Oh Codes
Description
Code
Display statistics for a given agent: shift time, number of ACD calls answered, average talk time, total
time in Work mode since logging on, and total time in Break mode since logging on.
Press: 030aaaaa#
Sample Displays:
SHIFT 3:12:48
ACD CALLS 122
AVG TALK 3:11
T-WORK 0:55:19
T-BREAK 1:04:31
(aaaaa = agent’s ACD or PBX extension)
030
(hours, minutes, seconds)
(one to three digits)
(minutes and seconds)
(hours, minutes and seconds)
(hours, minutes and seconds)
Display a given agent’s current mode and the time passed since entering that mode. Valid for all modes:
Vacant, Work, Break, Ready, or on an ACD call.
031
Press: 031aaaaa#
Sample Displays:
BREAK 0:41:06
(aaaaa = agent’s ACD or PBX extension)
(hours, minutes and seconds)
Force a given agent to Break mode. (FromWork or Ready modes)
Press: 032aaaaa# (aaaaa = agent’s ACD or PBX extension)
032
033
034
Force a given agent to Ready mode. (From Break or Work modes)
Press: 033aaaaa# (aaaaa = agent’s ACD or PBX extension)
Force a given agent to Work mode. (From Break or Ready modes)
Press: 034aaaaa# (aaaaa = agent’s ACD or PBX extension)
Change a given agent’s split or Multi-Split mode. Prompts are displayed to prompt for split number and
035
036
approval.
Press: 035aaaaa# (aaaaa = agent’s ACD or PBX extension)
Display queue depth for a given split.
Press: 036ss#
Sample Displays:
(ss = one or two digit split number)
DOMESTIC
36
Display time of longest waiting caller for a given split.
Press: 037ss#
Sample Displays:
INTERNAT’L 4:06
(ss = one or two digit split number)
(minutes and seconds)
037
038
Display number of working agents (on an ACD call, in Work or Ready modes) for a given split.
Press: 038ss#
Sample Displays:
(ss = one or two digit split number)
CRUISES
9
CHAPTER 5
Page 302
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TALLY-OH CODES - ACD
Supervisor Tally-Oh Codes (Continued)
Description
Code
Display number of agents on break for a given split.
Press: 039ss#
Sample Displays:
(ss = one or two digit split number)
039
SKY-DIVERS
Change Night mode of a given split.
Press: 040ss# (ss = one or two digit split number)
2
The prompt NIGHT MODE? will be displayed to ask for approval to put the specified split into Night
mode.
040
To approve, press “1#” and the display split name = NIGHT will be shown.
To disapprove and put the split into day mode, press “#” and the display split name = DAY will be shown.
Sample Displays:
AWARDS = NIGHT
AWARDS = DAY
Unlock a given agent’s position. (Emergency use only)
068
069
Press: 068aaaaa#
(aaaaa = agent’s ACD or PBX extension)
Force a given agent’s position to logoff. (Emergency use only)
Press: 069aaaaa#
(aaaaa = agent’s ACD or PBX extension)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 303
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TALLY-OH CODES - ACD
Technician Tally-Oh Codes
Description
Code
Turn Bad Call Notification MAT print-outs on or off
Press: 075rrs#
(rr = Reference number. s = state: 0 (off) or 1 (on))
075
To turn all print-outs on or off use the reference number “00”.
Example: 075000# (all off) or 075001# (all on).
See “BAD CALL NOTIFICATIONS [B-21]” on page 80 for additional detail.
Display error counts.
Press: 076n#
076
077
080
081
082
(n = error count number 0-99)
Reset all error counts.
Press: 0770#
Display ACD version number and release date.
Press: 080#
Unlock given logon id.
Press: 081n#
(n = logon id number)
Display current location of buffer trace pointer.
Press 082#
Display (clear) debugging call counters.
To display, press: 084#
To clear counters, press: 0840#
084
085
Turn st_driver() debugging on or off. Usually used with call processing trace.
Press: 085s#
(s = state: on = 1, off = 0)
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Tally-Oh Codes are entered by pressing one of the dial keypad digits, “0” through “9”.
2. The “*” key and the “#” key cannot be used asTally-Oh Code numbers since they are used to erase and
enter input.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 304
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TALLY REQUIRED - ACD
T-85A TALLY REQUIRED - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature is programmed on a per-split basis via the ACDSPL command. When a split is marked for Tally
Required an agent will not be able to answer a new incoming ACD call until a Tally entry has been made for
the previous call. If an agent attempts to enter the Ready Mode to receive a new call but has not yet entered a
Tally Code from the previous call a message will display “TALLY NEEDED” for a few seconds.
The Per-Call Tally field on the ACDSPL command may be set independently for each split in the ACD. Even
if an agent is using the multi-split agent feature the per-call tally feature will be checked as each call is assigned
based on the split that call is coming from. The Tally Code may be entered while the call is in progress or during
the after-call work mode. If the after-call work mode is timed and the timer expires before the Tally Code has
been entered a Permanent Work Mode will result (The key lamp status is changed from flash to steady light).
Once in Permanent Work Mode an agent will be required to press the Work Key in order to receive the next
incoming call and, of course, this will only be effective after the required Tally Code has been entered.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Agents who are determined to get around the requirement of entering a Tally Code after each and every call
may find that they are not even allowed to logoff the ACD system until they have entered a tally code for
the most recently completed call. This is not a bug. The “TALLY NEEDED” display will serve as a strong
reminder to the agent that they have not yet completed the requirements for the previous call.
2. An agent is not permitted to go to Break Mode until a requiredTally Code has been entered for the previous
call. The usual display will remind the agent that the tally code is still needed.
3. Tally-Oh codes to Force Logoff a position will work even though a final Tally Code has not been entered.
4. Even though Tally Codes are required it is still possible for counts of Tally Codes and calls handled to differ.
There are a few reasons for this, not the least of which is that multiple Tally Codes for a single call are
always permitted.
5. When the communication with the ACD call ends withoutTally Code entry, the position forced into Work
Mode. At that time, WORK/BREAK/LOGOFF key is ineffective and the LCD display shows “TALLY
NEEDED”. Operation for the status change to Ready Mode, Break Mode, Logoff using IVR is also
ineffective.
6. This feature is not available when programming to restrict the Work Mode (ACDSPL, WORK MODE
RESTRICTED).
7. When the communication ends withoutTally Code entry, the agent position goes into the Work Mode even
if the after-call work mode is Unavailable.
PROGRAMMING
ACDSPL -
Require Tally Per Call.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 305
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VARIABLE QUEUEING
V-10
VARIABLE QUEUEING
General Description
This feature allows the ACD caller to be queued to a split, depending on the number of working agents at the
time that the ACD call is presented to the split.
Operating Procedure
Variable queueing is programmed by splits in the ACDSPL command in ACDMAT.
Service Conditions
Variable queueing is activated by a percentage of working agents (a working agent is logged on and not in Break
mode). This percentage is specified in increments of 5 percentage points up to 1000%. This percentage is
programmed in ACDSPL at maximum queue depth.
Example:
Maximum Queue Depth = 150%
There are four working agents.
The number of calls that will be allowed to queue to the split = 6.
1.50 (or 150% max queue depth)
x 4 (working agents)
6 calls allowed to queue
CHAPTER 5
Page 306
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WORK MODE - ACD
W-5A WORK MODE - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature offers the choice of allowing the agents within a split to enter and exit Work Mode. Calls waiting
in queue cannot be connected to agents in the Work Mode. Since the Work Mode inhibits agents from receiving
calls it is sometimes beneficial to limit Work Mode use or restrict it altogether. Two features have been provided
which limit the agent’s ability to be in the Work Mode.
After Call Work Mode Timeout
This feature sets a timer which limits how much time an agent may remain in the Work Mode at the conclusion
of each ACD call. This mode is sometimes called the Wrap-Up Mode as well. When the timer expires the agent
is automatically placed in Ready Mode and a new ACD call will be connected immediately if there is one
waiting in queue.
Work Mode Restriction
The Work Mode can be restricted altogether for a specified split. Any attempt to enter the Work Mode is
overridden according to the following conditions:
•
•
The agent presses the WORK key. The ACD system ignores the request.
The agent logs on to the ACD system. The agent is automatically placed in Ready mode and will receive
calls immediately if calls are queued.
•
•
•
The agent concludes an ACD call. The after call work mode of the split is ignored by the ACD system and
the agent is automatically placed in Ready mode. If the agent requested to enter Break mode, while on the
ACD call, the request will be honored and the agent will not be placed in Ready mode at the conclusion of
the ACD call.
The agent is placed in Work mode automatically if an assigned ringing ACD call has not been answered and
the Recover Call feature has been activated and removed that call from the agent’s position. The WORK
lamp flashes to visually inform the agent of the forced entry into Work mode. This prevents the agent from
receiving another ACD call.
If the split is also setup for Automatic Work Mode with PBX Call and Work Mode Restriction is set then
the position will be placed in the Break mode instead of the Work mode when PBX calls are assigned.
If the agents within a split are allowed to enter Work mode, the mode can be entered given the following
conditions.
•
•
The agent from the Ready Mode presses the WORK key.
The agent is placed in Work mode automatically upon logon. This prevents a call from being connected be-
fore the agent is prepared to handle the call.
•
•
The agent is placed inWork mode automatically at the conclusion of an ACD call, if the after call mode of
the split is set to “Work”.
The agent is placed in Work mode automatically if an assigned ringing ACD call has not been answered and
the Recover Call feature has been activated and removed that call from the agent’s position. The WORK
lamp flashes to visually inform the agent of the forced entry into Work mode. This prevents the agent from
receiving another ACD call.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 307
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WORK MODE - ACD
OPERATING PROCEDURE
This feature is an inherent feature of the ACD programs. Agents use the WORK key on their ACD position to
set the Work Mode appropriately. Work Mode restrictions and timeouts are programmed using the command
ACDSPL for each split.
PROGRAMMING
ACDSPL -
WORK MODE RESTRICTED
CHAPTER 5
Page 308
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WORK MODE TIME LIMIT - ACD
W-6A WORK MODE TIME LIMIT - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This feature allows the specification of a maximum time limit for an agent to be in Work mode at the conclusion
of an ACD call before being automatically placed in Ready mode. Once in Ready mode, the agent will be
connected to a call if calls are queued. The time limit applies to all the agents within a split.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. This feature is implemented through an ACD command. The command data is on a split-wide basis.
2. The following example illustrates the operation of the feature.
a. The Work mode time limit is set at 45 seconds for Split A.
b. After-call Work mode is set for Split A.
c. An agent in Split A completes an ACD call, and is automatically placed in Work mode.
d. One of three different scenarios could follow:
• The agent does not press any keys in the next 45 seconds. The agent is automatically placed in Ready
mode and is connected to a caller if there are calls in queue.
• The agent presses the BREAK key or LOGON key within the next 45 seconds. The agent is placed
in the appropriate mode.
• The agent chooses to return to Ready mode in less than 45 seconds, and presses the WORK key. The
agent is connected to a caller if there are calls in queue.
PROGRAMMING
ACDSPL
Work mode timer timeout (0-9999 sec.)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 5
Page 309
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ZIP TONE - ACD
Z-1A
ZIP TONE - ACD
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
When an agent is operating in Automatic Answer - ACD [A-35A] mode, the system will provide an audible
burst of tone to the agent’s receive audio path before connecting an incoming ACD call.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
The operation of this feature from the agent or supervisory position is as follows:
From Manual Answering status:
1. The AUTO/MAN key is pressed.
2. AUTO ANSWER is displayed.
3. The AUTO/MAN lamp lights steadily.
4. The agent hears Zip Tone when an ACD call is connected.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
1. Tones:
a. Normal ACD calls are introduced by a single burst of tone.
b. Calls which may require special handling, calls which have overflowed from another split, calls which
were call forwarded from another split by that split’s supervisor, and calls transferred by agents or
other business stations are introduced by two bursts of tone.
PROGRAMMING
None
CHAPTER 5
Page 310
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
After the installation test following by “Installation Manual”, test the ACD service features following the flowchart
below. The names listed within of each NAP are the names of the ACD services. Also refer to the detailed
START
ACD service feature names tested in each NAP
ACD Incoming
Automatic Answer (A35)
Calling Party Identification
(Character Display for ACD) (C70)
Log-on/Log-off (L19)
Release-ACD Position (R19)
Split Section (S98)
Zip tone (Z1)
Call Distribution to Agents
Priority Processing
Call Distribution to Agents (C35)
Call Waiting Indication-LCD Display/CW
Lamp (C68)
Priority Queuing (P21)
Queuing-ACD (Q-1)
Automatic Call Distribution
Automatic Call Distribution
Delay Announcement
A
Announcements (A80)
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 6
Page 311
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
A
Center Closed Announcement
Overflow
Announcements (A80)
Overflow Outside-ACD (O19)
Emergency Recorder
Emergency/Recorder (E6)
After Call Work (Manual)
After Call Work (Automatic)
Availability-ACD Position
(After Call Work) (A37)
Assistance
Auxiliary Work
Assistance-ACD Agent (A34)
Break Mode (B21)
Monitoring-ACD Supervisor
Monitoring-ACD Supervisor (M28)
Announcements (A80)
Night Service
Call Control Vector (C108)
Call Forwarding Split (C127)
Night Service-ACD (N12)
B
CHAPTER 6
Page 312
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
B
Abandoned Call Search
Abandoned Call Search (A31)
Trunk Trouble Report
Trunk Trouble Report-MIS (T24)
For the following services, refer to the manual
described MIS functions.
Tally Count (T49)
MIS Terminal Functions
END
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 6
Page 313
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
NAP-215-101
Agent Position
ELC/DLC
LC
Sheet 1/2
ACD Incoming
COT
A
B
START
Set up a loop-back connection between COT for ACD trunk group to be tested and station line.
Log off agent positions and supervisory positions.
ACD Agent/Supervisory Position Incoming Test
•
Test all agent positions and supervisory positions with following flow chart.
Log on the agent position or supervisory position to be tested, and release the AfterCall Work Mode.
•
Use the AUTO/MAN key to set to the Automatic Answer mode. (If the answering mode at logon is
the Automatic Answer mode, this operation is not necessary for the Automatic Answer mode has
already been set.)
C.O. trunk call incoming.
•
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A to station B.
Incoming at ACD agent position.
•
•
Check that a Zip Tone is generated when the call is incoming.
Check that the incoming route is displayed on the LCD of the agent position.
Answering by ACD agent position.
Check that conversation can be started at the same time as the Zip Tone (without any operation).
Note: When ACD system is used in a Fusion Network, test that the incoming call terminated to C.O.
trunk in other nodes can be picked up.
A
CHAPTER 6
Page 314
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
NAP-215-101
Sheet 2/2
ACD Incoming
A
ACD Agent/Supervisory Position Trunk Incoming Call
•
Test all agent and supervisory position trunks with the following procedure.
Log on to all agent and supervisory positions and release the After Call Work Mode.
•
Use the AUTO/MAN key to set to the manual answer mode. (If the answering mode at logon is the
Manual Answer mode, this operation is not necessary for the Manual Answer mode has already been
set.)
Set up a loop-back connection between COT to be tested and station line.
C.O. trunk incoming test.
•
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A to station B.
Incoming at ACD agent position.
•
Check that the call is incoming to the ACD split where the trunk tested is set.
Answering by ACD agent position.
•
Check that conversation can be held normally after answering.
END
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 6
Page 315
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
NAP-215-102
Sheet 1/1
Call Distribution to Agents
COT
Agent Position
ELC/DLC
LC
START
A
B
C
Log off all ACD agent/supervisory positions.
C.O. trunk incoming.
D
E
F
•
Place C.O. trunk calls from station A, B
and C to stations D, E and F.
Log on at agent position.
•
•
The incoming call trunk groups are
distributed in the split.
One of the agent positions in the split releases the after call work mode.
Incoming at ACD agent positions.
Answering by ACD agent positions.
•
Check that conversation can be held normally after answering.
Release at ACD agent positions.
•
The agent positions should not be in the Automatic After Call Work mode.
Check that the calls are distributed in the incoming order.
Apply the test procedure above to all splits.
END
CHAPTER 6
Page 316
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
NAP-215-103
Sheet 1/1
NPQ (Non Priority
Queuing) Route
Priority Processing
COT
Agent Position
ELC/DLC
LC
COT
COT
NPQ
PQ
START
Log off all ACD agent/supervisory positions.
C.O. trunk incoming to the non-priority queue.
A
B
PQ (Priority
Queuing)
Route
•
Place C.O. trunk calls from station A to
station D and from station B to station E, and
let them terminate in the routes for the non-
priority queue.
C
D
E
F
C.O. trunk incoming to the priority queue.
•
Place C.O. trunk call from station C to station
F, and let it terminate in the route for the
priority queue.
Log on and After CallWork mode release at ACD agent position.
Log on one of the agent positions in the split where calls queued in the non-priority queue and priority
queue are terminated, and release the After Call Work mode.
Incoming at ACD agent position.
Answering by ACD agent position.
•
Check that the first communication can be held with the originator of the call in the priority queue (sta-
tion C).
•
•
Check that the CW lamp on the agent position illuminates during queuing.
Check that the number of waiting calls is indicated on the MIS terminal of the supervisory position
during queuing.
Release of ACD agent position.
•
After the above, confirm the originators of the calls in the non-priority queue (station A, then station
B).
Apply the test procedure above to all splits.
END
Note: The priority of C.O. trunk call incoming queue is determined depending on the queue priority set with the
Assignment of Trunk Group data (ACDTG) command.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 6
Page 317
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
NAP-215-104
Sheet 1/1
ELC/DLC
Automatic Call Distribution
Agent Position C
COT
Agent Position D
Agent Position E
START
LC
A
Log off all agent and supervisory positions.
Log on agent positions in sequence.
B
•
Log on agent positions in order
of C→D→E.
C.O. trunk incoming.
•
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A to station B.
Incoming at ACD agent position.
•
Check that the call is terminated at agent position C.
Answering and release by ACD agent position.
C.O. trunk incoming.
•
Place C.O. trunk call from station A to station B.
Incoming at ACD agent position.
•
Check that the call is terminated at agent position D.
Answering and release by ACD agent position.
C.O. trunk incoming.
•
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A to station B.
Incoming at ACD agent position.
•
Check that the call is terminated at agent position E.
Answering and release by ACD agent position.
Repeat the test procedure above for every agent position and supervisory position of each split.
END
CHAPTER 6
Page 318
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
NAP-215-105
Sheet 1/1
Delay Announcement
Announcement
Machine
COT
LC
START
A
B
Log off all agent and supervisory positions.
C.O. trunk incoming.
C
D
E
F
•
Place C.O. trunk calls sequentially from stations A, B
and C to stations D, E and F respectively.
First delay announcement.
•
Stations A, B and C shall hear the first delay
announcement after the predetermined period of time.
Music on hold.
Stations A, B and C shall hear the music on hold until the second delay announcement.
•
Second delay announcement.
Music on hold.
Release.
•
Check that the incoming trunk is cleared automatically after the second delay announcement, then
release stations A, B and C.
Apply the test procedure above for each trunk group.
END
Note: This test does not use the Overflow service.
Related commands: AADT, ACDCCV
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 6
Page 319
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
NAP-215-106
Sheet 1/1
Center Closed Announcement
(a) If the weekly schedule No. is set as the incoming path:
START
Announcement Machine
COT
C.O. trunk call origination.
ELC/DLC
LC
Group
Supervisory
Position
•
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A
to station B.
A
Check that station A hears the center
closed announcement.
B
LC
END
(b) If the call control vector is set as the incoming path:
START
Set the ACD system to the night mode by pressing the NIGHT key on the supervisory position or by
operating from the MIS terminal.
C.O. trunk call incoming.
•
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A to station B.
Check that station A hears the center closed announcement.
END
CHAPTER 6
Page 320
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
ELC/DLC
NAP-215-107
Sheet 1/1
Overflow
G
Designation
H
Split
Overflow
COT
Overflow
I
Origination
J
Split
START
LC
A
B
C
Log on the ACD agent and supervisory
positions of the overflow origination
split.
Log on the ACD agent and supervisory
positions of the overflow destination
split.
D
E
F
C.O. trunk incoming.
•
Place C.O. trunk calls sequentially
from stations A, B and C to stations
D, E and F respectively.
(Overflow period elapsed).
Call termination at overflow destination split.
Answering by ACD agent position.
•
At the moment an agent position answers, it hears the ACD call transfer identification tone, after
which the communication can be started.
Release of ACD agent position.
Apply the test procedure above to each trunk group for which Overflow has been set.
END
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 6
Page 321
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
Announcement
Trunk
Recorder
NAP-215-108
Sheet 1/1
ELC/DLC
ELC/DLC
Emergency Recorder
COT
Supervisory position
Agent position
START
LC
LC
A
B
C.O. trunk call incoming.
•
Place a C.O. trunk call from station
A to station B.
Incoming at ACD agent position.
Answering by ACD agent position.
Emergency recording operation.
•
Press the EMER key on the agent position.
Incoming at supervisory position.
•
When the ACD calls is terminated at the supervisory position, the LCD on the supervisory position
indicates the emergency recording request and the MON lamp also illuminates.
At the same time, the recorder starts recording.
•
•
In the period above, the agent position and C.O. trunk is in the communicating status.
Answering by supervisory position.
•
The supervisory position answers the call as an ACD call and monitors it (three-party conference call
does not occur).
•
The agent position can confirm the answering of the supervisory position by the change of the lamp
indication on the agent position (flashing steady) as well as from the LCD display.
Confirmation of recording.
Check that the call is recorded by the recorder.
•
The supervisory position presses the MON key to start three-party conference call. Note
Release by ACD agent position.
•
When the agent position releases the incoming C.O. trunk call, it is transferred to the supervisory
position.
Confirmation of communication.
Check that the supervisory position is communicating with the C.O. trunk.
•
Release by supervisory position.
Apply the test procedure above to all splits.
END
Note: After MON key is pressed, “BARGE?” is displayed. At that time, monitoring is abandoned by one of the
following operations.
•
•
Dial “1” + “#” (Three-party conference will be established.)
Press MON key again
CHAPTER 6
Page 322
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
ELC/DLC
NAP-215-109
Agent Position
COT
Sheet 1/1
LC
A
After Call Work (Manual)
B
C
D
START
Log off all ACD agent and supervisory
positions, then log on only one position.
C.O. trunk incoming.
•
Place C.O. trunk call from station A to station C.
Incoming at ACD agent position.
Answering by ACD agent position.
After Call Work activation.
•
Press the WORK key so that the WORK lamp illuminates.
C.O. trunk incoming.
•
Place a C.O. trunk call from station B to station D.
Release by ACD agent position.
•
The agent position can end communication with station A by pressing the RELEASE key.
Confirmation of After Call Work mode.
•
Check that, when the agent position release, the next call is not terminated at it.
Release of After Call Work mode.
•
Press the WORK key again so that the WORK lamp goes out.
Incoming at ACD agent position.
Answering by ACD agent position.
•
The agent position starts communication with station B.
Release by ACD agent position.
Apply the test procedure above to all splits.
END
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 6
Page 323
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
ELC/DLC
LC
NAP-215-110
Agent Position
COT
Sheet 1/1
A
B
After Call Work (Automatic)
C
D
START
Log off all ACD agent and supervisory
positions, then log on only one position.
Office data change.
•
Using the ACDSPL command, assign 0 (Automatic After Call Work mode setting) to parameter
AFTER.
C.O. trunk incoming.
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A to station C.
•
Incoming at ACD agent position.
Answering by ACD agent position.
C.O. trunk incoming.
•
Place a C.O. trunk call from station B to station C.
Release by ACD agent position, automatic setting of After CallWork mode.
•
Check that, when the agent position release, the After Call Work mode is set automatically.
Release of After Call Work mode.
•
Press the WORK key so that the WORK lamp goes out.
Incoming at ACD agent position.
Answering by ACD agent position.
•
The agent position starts communication with station B.
Release by ACD agent position.
Release of office data.
Apply the test procedure above to all splits.
END
CHAPTER 6
Page 324
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
ELC/DLC
NAP-215-111
Sheet 1/1
Supervisory position
COT
ELC/DLC
LC
Agent position
Assistance
A
B
START
C.O. trunk incoming.
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A to station B.
•
Incoming at ACD agent position.
Answering by ACD agent position.
Assistance activation.
Press the ASSIST key on the agent position so that the ASSIST lamp illuminates.
Incoming at supervisory position.
•
The call is terminated as non-ACD call to the supervisory position.
Answering by supervisory position.
•
The communication between the agent position and supervisory position starts, while the C.O. trunk
call is held.
Three-party conference call.
Press the CONF key on the agent position to start three-party conversation.
•
Release by ACD agent position.
The communication takes place between the C.O. trunk (station A) and supervisory position.
•
Release.
Apply the test procedure above to all splits.
END
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 6
Page 325
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
Agent Position
ELC/DLC
LC
NAP-215-112
Sheet 1/1
COT
Auxiliary Work
A
B
START
Log off all ACD agent and supervisory positions.
Set one of the ACD agent positions to the
Auxiliary Work mode.
•
Press the AUX WORK key so that the
AUX WORK lamp illuminates.
C.O. trunk incoming.
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A to station B.
•
Confirmation of Auxiliary Work mode.
Check that the incoming call is not distributed to the agent position.
•
Release of Auxiliary Work mode.
Press the AUX WORK key again so that theAUX WORK lamp goes out.
•
Incoming at ACD agent position.
Answering by ACD agent position.
Release by ACD agent position.
Apply the test procedure above to all splits.
END
CHAPTER 6
Page 326
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
ELC/DLC
NAP-215-113
Supervisory Position
Sheet 1/1
COT
ELC/DLC
LC
Monitoring–ACD Supervisor
Agent Position
A
B
START
C.O. trunk incoming.
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A to station B.
•
Incoming at ACD agent position.
Answering by ACD agent position.
Monitoring Activation from Supervisory Position
(1) Press the MON key on the supervisory position.
(2) Dial Agent ID code+# or 0+Agent position station No. for non-ACD calls+#.
Monitoring.
•
•
The supervisory position can monitor the conversation between station A and the agent position.
The supervisory position can monitor the call but cannot join the conversation.
Supervisory Override Operation
•
•
Press the MON key on the supervisory position again. “BARGE?” is displayed. Note
The agent position and the call originator (station A) hear the warning tone.
Release.
Apply the test procedure above to all splits.
END
Note: If one of the following operation is performed at this time, monitoring is abandoned.
• Dial “1” + “#” (A three-party conference will be established.)
• Press MON key again
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 6
Page 327
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
Announcement Trunk
ELC/DLC
NAP-215-114
Sheet 1/2
Night Service
COT
Split C
ELC/DLC
ATI
D: ATT
START
LC
A
Use one of the following three methods to change
into the night mode.
B
(1) Automatic changeover into the night mode
based on the ACD call control vector (Night
Announcement setting using ACD CCV command).
(2) Pressing the NIGHT key on the supervisory position of split C; as this display confirmation message
Night Mode?, enter 1# to change over into the night mode.
(3) Changeover into the night mode by means of operation at the MIS terminal of the supervisory posi-
tion.
Night Announcement
•
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A to station B in the special night split.
Station A hears the night announcement.
Apply the test procedure above to all splits.
Using the ACD CCV command, change the night services of the split and test each of the following ser-
vices repeatedly.
Night Service Change
Using the ACD CCV command, change the night services of the split and test each of the following ser-
vices.
Night Transfer to Station
•
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A to station B.
Call incoming at transfer destination station.
A
CHAPTER 6
Page 328
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
NAP-215-114
Sheet 2/2
Night Service
A
Answering by station.
Release by station.
Apply the test procedure above to all splits.
Night Transfer to Attendant
•
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A to station B.
Call incoming at transfer destination attendant console.
Answering by ATTCON.
Release by ATTCON.
Apply the test procedure above to all splits.
Night Transfer to Outside
•
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A to station B.
Call incoming at transfer destination C.O. trunk.
Answering by C.O. trunk.
Release by C.O. trunk.
Apply the test procedure above to all splits.
END
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 6
Page 329
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
ELC/DLC
LC
NAP-215-115
Agent Position
Sheet 1/1
COT
Abandoned Call Search
A
B
START
Abandoned Call Search
C.O. trunk call origination.
•
•
Place a call from station A to station B and a C.O. trunk call is terminated to agent positions.
At this time, agent positions shall be in the manual answer mode.
After checking that the CW lamp on the agent position illuminates, station A releases the call.
•
Check that the CW lamp on the agent position goes out and that the call is released.
END
CHAPTER 6
Page 330
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE FEATURES FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
ELC/DLC
NAP-215-116
Sheet 1/1
Agent Position
COT
LC
Trunk Trouble Report
A
B
START
C.O. trunk call incoming.
•
Place a C.O. trunk call from station A to station B and a C.O. trunk call is terminated to agent posi-
tions.
The call is terminated to agent positions. An agent position answers the call.
While the agent position is busy, press the TRK/TRBL key on station B.
The connection information is output at the MIS terminal.
A system message is output.
Apply the test procedure above to all agent and supervisory positions of all splits.
END
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 6
Page 331
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is for your notes.
CHAPTER 6
Page 332
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 7
1. GENERAL
PBX AND ACD COMMAND PROGRAMMING
This chapter explains the commands which are used exclusively for the NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enter-
prise ACD system. For other related commands, refer to the NEAX2400 IMX Office Data Specification. When
engaging in command operations concerning the ACD system, ensure to use both this manual and NEAX2400
IMX Office Data Specification.
2. COMMANDS
2.1 NEAX2400 IMX COMMANDS
Table 7-1 NEAX2400 IMX Command List in Alphabetical Order
COMMAND
FULL NAME
NAME
Note: Assign “1” to parameter “OAI” of “MMNF” command prior to using OAI command.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 333
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASYD: ASSIGNMENT OF SYSTEM DATA
ASYD: Assignment of System Data
1. Function
This command is used to assign and change system data in the NEAX2400 IMX.
2. Precautions
1. ASYD is divided into three sections, as follows:
a. Assignment of System Data-1.
(SYS 1) - System-wide control parameters.
b. Assignment of System Data-2.
(SYS 2) - Service feature availability, on a tenant basis.
c. Assignment of System Data-3.
(SYS 3) - System-wide ringing patterns and hookswitch timing.
2. Only ASYD System Data-1 parameters relate to the functioning of ACD system.
3. System data must be entered using hexadecimal numbers. Refer to the ACD system Job Specification
for the applicable system data.
3. Parameters
SYS:
System Data Items
1: System Data 1
2: System Data 2
3: System Data 3
Tenant Number
TN:
INDEX:
System Data Index
SYS
INDEX
0-511
0-15
1
2
3
0-31
DATA:
System Data (Hexadecimal)
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282
Page 334
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASYD: ASSIGNMENT OF SYSTEM DATA
System Data-1 Programming Sheet
Note: This Data Programming Sheet is only for the data to be set in the ACD System. Be sure to use this Data
Programming Sheet together with the Data Programming Sheet for “ASYD” command described in the
NEAX2400 IMX Office Data Specification.
BIT
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
DATA
TYPE
DATA
(DATA)
00 ~ FF
(Hex)
CORRESPONDING
DATA
DATA
INDEX
(INDEX)
0 ~ 511
SYSTEM DATA CONTENTS
(SYS)
DATA
BIT
0/1
1=ACDP is used
(Assign 01 Hex) Note 1
2
01
04
1
b
0
ACD in Service (Fixed Data)
0 = In service; 1 = Out of service
27
31
42
0
1
b
b
b
4
2
2
Note 2
System Message “5-Q” is output.
0/1 = No/Yes Note 3
Traffic Measurement Indication
0/1 = CCS Indication/Erlang Indication
b
b
0
1
1
1
b b
1
2
1
TCFI timer: 0 0 = 2 sec. interval
Note 4 1 1 = Application Dependent
(Standard)
0 1 = 4 sec. interval
1 0 = 8 sec. interval
b
2
47
0 = Display last number for TCFD
1 = Display message Note 5
0
b
b
b
3
4
7
ACD Busy Tone Control
0/1 = No/Yes Note 6
Traffic Measurement for Terminal and Route Traffic
0/1 = Out/In Service
Note 1: For ACD system to be activated through Fusion network, this data is programmed in the node providing
ACDP only. Other system data than INDEX2 must be set to all nodes to be provided ACD trunk-Fusion
within Fusion network.
Note 2: When changing this index from 02 (normal setting for non- OAI/ACD system) to 04, you must back up DM
to the HDD of the system.
Note 3: Valid since the PBX software Series 7300 and the ACD software R1.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 335
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASYD: ASSIGNMENT OF SYSTEM DATA
Note 4: Terminal Control Facility Indirect is used for displays, LED functions, and chimes for ACD positions. The
standard choice has both bit 1 and bit 2 set to “1”.
Note 5: Terminal Control Facility Direct is used for certain ACDP entries and displays from ACD positions.
Note 6: ASYD, System Data 1, index 59, bit 2 must also be set to a 1 for this feature to operate.
System Data-1 Programming Sheet
BIT
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
DATA
TYPE
DATA
(DATA)
00 ~ FF
(Hex)
CORRESPONDING
DATA
DATA
INDEX
(INDEX)
0 ~ 255
SYSTEM DATA CONTENTS
DATA
BIT
(SYS)
0/1
DID busy condition
0/1 = No/Yes Note 1
59
70
b
b
b
b
2
6
4
6
ACD Announcement service 0/1=Out of service/In
service. Note 2
1
Warning tone sent to the monitored position.
0/1=No/Yes Note 3
1
79
80
OAI/ACD Service Note 4
0 = ACD In Service; 1 = ACD Out of Service
0
0
Line of the LCD for static ACD messages (Break, Ready,
etc.) display.
b
3
0/1=top line/second line
Note 1: Must be set to “1” for an “IF NOT QUEUED GO TO BUSY 11 step to return busy tone to a self-directing
trunk (CCV function on DIDs etc.). This does not work with ringdown type trunks.
Note 2: When the announcement service is used in Fusion network, this data is set to nodes that accommodates the
announcement trunk.
Note 3: Be sure to assign the data value “1” here (see Chapter 1, Section 1.3, “Precaution on Using the ACD Fea-
tures”).
Note 4: When changing the value of this data bit to “0”(OAI/ACD ServiceProvided)from “1”(OAI/ACD Service
Not Provided), system initialization must be executed.
CHAPTER 7
Page 336
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASYD: ASSIGNMENT OF SYSTEM DATA
System Data-1 Programming Sheet
BIT
CORRE-
SPONDING
DATA
SYSTEM
DATA
INDEX
(INDEX)
0 ~ 511
SYSTEM
DATA
TYPE
DATA
(DATA)
00 ~ FF
(Hex)
SYSTEM DATA CONTENTS
(SYS)
DATA
BIT
0/1
CPU ACT/ST-BY Change Function
0=Out of Service; 1=In Service
89
b
b
b
b
3
0
1
2
ACDP (No. 0 System) Mounting Status Indication
0/1 = Not Mounted/Mounted Note 1
207
ACDP (No. 1 System) Mounting Status Indication
0/1 = Not Mounted/Mounted Note 2
Call Event Processing
0/1 = Invalid/Valid (Always assign 1)
1
1
241
448
Details of SCF Error Notification
0/1 = Ineffective/Effective
1
1
b
b
b
3
1
0
Higher ACDP controlling capability
SCF Call origination from the first party notification
0/1 = Ineffective/Effective
449
Access to Announcement trunk is controlled:
0 = by the timer
b
2
1 = by the DAT Note 3
Note 1: This bit is always set to “1”.
Note 2: This bit is set to “1” for dual ACDP’s. If single ACDP, this bit is set to “0”. This bit is always set to “0”
for internal ACDP.
Note 3: The announcement service for fusion network, “1 = DAT control” is not available.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 337
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASYDL: ASSIGNMENT OF SYSTEM DATA INTO LOCAL DM (LDM)
ASYDL: Assignment of System Data into Local DM (LDM)
1. Function
This command is used to assign and change system data for the ACD activated via FCCS.
2. Precautions
ASYDL command is comprised with System Data-1, INDEX 512-1535.
3. Parameters
Refer to the programming sheet in the following pages.
CHAPTER 7
Page 338
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASYDL: ASSIGNMENT OF SYSTEM DATA INTO LOCAL DM (LDM)
System Data (LDM) -1 Programming Sheet
BIT
SYSTEM
DATA
INDEX
(INDEX)
512-1535
SYSTEM
DATA
TYPE
DATA
(DATA)
00 – FF
(Hex)
CORRESPONDING
DATA
SYSTEM DATA CONTENTS
DATA
BIT
(SYS)
0/1
LDM (Local Data Memory) usage. Assign data “1” (the
memory block is used) for the corresponding memory block.
Normally Assign “01”.
513
IP Address (Hex) for PBX over External LAN
Note: This data is valid when the PBX is connected to the
external PC LAN.
When default IP address (172.16.253.0) for the PBX is used,
this data setting is not necessary.
515
516
517
Example: IP Address: 133.206.8.1
INDEX
515
Set Hex
85
516
CE
517
08
518
518
01
Subnet Mask (Hex) for PBX over External LAN
Note: This data is valid when the PBX is connected to the
external PC LAN.
When default IP address (172.16.253.0) for the PBX is used,
this data setting is not necessary.
519
520
521
1
Example: Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
INDEX
Set Hex
519
FF
520
521
522
FF
00
00
522
523
524
525
526
Default Gateway Address of External LAN
Gateway Address (IP address of Router) of Network con-
necting PBX.
Note: This data is valid when the PBX is connected to the
external PC LAN.
If no Network Gateway, assignment data is 00 Hex.
in Index 523 through 526.
Example: Default Gateway Address: 133.206.8.254
INDEX
Set Hex
523
85
524
525
526
CE
08
FE
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 339
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASYDL: ASSIGNMENT OF SYSTEM DATA INTO LOCAL DM (LDM)
System Data (LDM) -1 Programming Sheet
BIT
SYSTEM
DATA
INDEX
(INDEX)
512-1535
SYSTEM
DATA
TYPE
DATA
(DATA)
00 – FF
(Hex)
CORRESPONDING
DATA
SYSTEM DATA CONTENTS
DATA
BIT
(SYS)
0/1
1
533
FPC of the node providing ACDP
1
b0
b1
Output the system message (4-R) when TCP-IP connection
is normally disconnected.
0/1 = Effective/Ineffective
0/1 = “AGENT ANYWHERE” is out of service/in service
b2
864
b3
b4
0/1 = “Multiple ACDPs” is not available/available Note 2
Assign number of ports of Status Monitoring for terminal
b4 = 0, b5 = 0 (2 ports)
b4 = 1, b5 = 0 (8 ports)
b5
1
FPC of the node providing IP.
(Assign 0 when the ACD service is activated in the self node
only.)
FPC: 1-253 (01 Hex – FD Hex)
865
866
FPC of the node providing ACDP
(Assign 0 when the ACD service is activated in the self node
only.)
FPC: 1-253 (01 Hex – FD Hex)
Note 1: For ACD system to be activated through Fusion network, this data is programmed in the node providing
ACDP only. Other data must be set to all nodes within Fusion network.
Note 2: Available since the PBX software Series 7400 and the ACD software R3.
Note 3: This data is used in the network providing multiple ACDPs.
Note 4: The identical data value must be assigned to all nodes.
Note 5: This data is necessary at all nodes. Assign the self FPC at the terminating node.
Note 6: For ACD service provided within Fusion network, the data value (FPC) in these indexes must be pro-
grammed the same.
CHAPTER 7
Page 340
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASYDN: ASSIGNMENT OF SYSTEM DATA IN NDM
ASYDN: Assignment of System Data in NDM
1. Function
This command is used to specify the system data for the Fusion Network.
2. Precautions
1. The data assigned by this command determines the service condition which affects the other nodes in
the Fusion Network.
2. Data for ASYDN assigned at Network Control Node (NCN) has priority over data for ASYDL assigned
at LN (Local Node) in the Fusion Network.
3. The ASYDN command consists of SYS1, INDEX 0 - 1535.
4. For more details, see the “Fusion System Manual”.
System Data (NDM) Programming Sheet
BIT
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
DATA
TYPE
DATA
(DATA)
00 – FF
(Hex)
CORRESPONDING
DATA
DATA
INDEX
(INDEX)
0-1535
SYSTEM DATA CONTENTS
DATA
BIT
(SYS)
0/1
Network Data Memory (NDM) usage. Assign data “1 (the
memory block is used)” for the corresponding memory block.
bit
Memory Block
Memory Block 0
Memory Block 1
Memory Block 2
Memory Block 3
Memory Block 4
b
b
b
b
b
0
1
2
3
4
514
533
1
FPC number of the node that has the standard VNDM (1-253).
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 341
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AOKC: ASSIGNMENT OF OAI KEY CODE
AOKC: Assignment of OAI Key Code
1. Function
term
This command is applied to define the usage of D
2. Precautions
buttons (line/feature key and flex key).
1. AOKC must be programmed before AKYD is programmed.
2. For station assignment, the OAI Key Codes correspond to the Function Key Code (FKY) range from 34
3. After the OAI key code data is changed or deleted by this command or the system initial is executed,
newly programmed data is invalid for the first operation.
4. OAI key code data programmed in this command must be set to all nodes to be provided ACD service
for Fusion network.
3. Parameters
KEY-CODE: OAI Key Code (1-31)
F-KIND:
Kind of Facility
1=
2=
3=
4=
(MSF) Terminal Mode Set Facility
(TMF) Terminal Multiple Information Transfer Facility
(OAC) OAI Access Code Request
(KTF) Key Code Transfer Facility
5~15= Not used
C-TONE:
Confirmation Tone
0 = Confirmation Tone
1 = No Tone
NND:
Number of Necessary Digits (available for F-KIND=3 only)
OP-CODE:
Operation Code
128 thru 191 (for F-KIND = 1)
192 thru 255 (for F-KIND = 2)
Note 1: The following operation codes are not available for OAI system when OAI system and ACD system are used
in the same Fusion network.
When F-KIND=1 (MSF) OP-CODE 185~191
When F-KIND=2 (TMF) OP-CODE 248~255
CHAPTER 7
Page 342
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AOKC: ASSIGNMENT OF OAI KEY CODE
OAI Key Code Data Programming Sheet
OAI KEY
CODE (KEY
CODE)
CONFIRMATION
TONE
KIND OF
FACILITY
(F-KIND)
1 ~ 15
OPERATION
CODE
(OP-CODE)
128 ~ 255
FUNCTION KEY
(FKY)
(C-TONE)
0/1
Note 2
1 ~ 31
Note 1
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
1
1
187
252
Break
Auto/Manual (AUTO/MAN)
Not used
253
2
1
1
1
Work
188
Night (NIGHT)
Trunk Trouble Report (TRK
TRBL)
6
2
1
250
7
8
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
189
254
Tally (TALLY)
Assistance (ASSIST)
9
255
Emergency Recorder (EMER)
Log on/off (LOG ON/OFF)
10
190
11
Not used
191
12
1
2
1
1
Monitor/Barge (MON/BARGE)
CW lamp
13
Not used
249
14
15 ~ 31
Not used
Note 1: For the quick reference table of KEY CODE and KYN, refer to AKYD command.
Note 2: Confirmation Tone (C-TONE)
0/1 = Confirmation Tone/No Tone
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 343
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASDT: ASSIGNMENT OF STATION DATA
ASDT: Assignment of Station Data
1. Function
This command is used to assign, delete and display station data. If the station number designated has al-
ready been assigned, the current data is displayed. If new data is to be assigned, the old data must be deleted
before the new data can be entered.
2. Precautions
1. The Route Restriction Class data (RSC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Route Restriction
Data command (ARSC).
2. The Service Feature Restriction Class data (SFC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Service
Feature Restriction Class command (ASFC).
3. When the station to be deleted is busy, an error indication is provided.
4. If station data is deleted, the data of the stations assigned by the AKYD command is also deleted.
3. Parameters
TN:
Tenant Number
STN:
LENS:
TEC:
Station Number
Line Equipment Number (6 digits)
Telephone Equipment Class (1 ~ 31)
3= DP/PB (for Hot position) / (Analog position)
term
12= D
(for My-Line)
18= Virtual Line Appearance (for ACD Line)
Route Restriction Class (0 ~ 15)
For assignment of RSC from ARSC command.
Service Feature Class (0 ~ 15)
RSC:
SFC:
For assignment of SFC from ASFC command.
Note: For the ACD lines (Virtual Lines), the SFC must be separate from all other SFCs in the system.
This does not apply to Hot Positions or Analog Positions.
Note: Stations must be programmed in the Network Node. Use ALGSN command.
CHAPTER 7
Page 344
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASDT: ASSIGNMENT OF STATION DATA
System Data Programming Sheet
TENANT
NUMBER
(TN)
LINE EQUIPMENT NUMBER
(LENS)
STATION
NUMBER (STN)
MAXIMUM
TELEPHONE
EQUIPT.
(TEC)
CLASS
1 ~ 31
MAKE BUSY
INFORMA-
TION
ROUTE
RESTRICTION
SERVICE
FEATURE
MG
U
G
LV
(RSC)
CLASS
CLASS
(SFC)
5 DIGITS
1 ~ 10
0 ~ 15
0 ~ 15
(MB) 0/1
0 ~ 3
00 ~ 23
0 ~ 7
SYSTEM
1IMG
MG
00, 01
4IMG
IMX-U
00 ~ 07
00 ~ 07
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 345
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASFC: ASSIGNMENT OF SERVICE FEATURE RESTRICTION CLASS DATA
ASFC: Assignment of Service Feature Restriction Class Data
1. Function
This command is used to assign and display Service Feature Restriction information according to the
Service Feature Restriction Class (SFC) of the Station.
2. Precautions
1. For the SFC of ACD line of an agent position, be sure to assign RES = 1 (A Direct call is restricted) for
SFI = 95 (Direct Call Restriction). Assign RES = 0 (A Direct call is allowed) for SFC of non-ACD-lines
2. For details of SFIs other than SFI = 95, refer to “ASFC” command table in NEAX2400 IMX Office Data
Specification
3. Service Feature Restriction Class data programmed in this command must be set to all nodes to be
provided ACD trunk for Fusion network.
3. Parameters
DAY/NIGHT:
Day/Night Mode
D= Day Mode
N= Night Mode
TN:
Tenant Number
SFC:
SFI:
Service Restriction Class (0 ~ 15)
Service Feature Index (1 ~ 255) (Enter 95.)
95= 1 Direct Call Restriction (for ACD)
118= Live Record (for AD-16/40 vm)
Restriction Data
RES:
0=
1=
Restricted
Allowed
Note: When WRT? = Y is entered the value of the SFC automatically increases by one.
CHAPTER 7
Page 346
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASFC: ASSIGNMENT OF SERVICE FEATURE RESTRICTION CLASS DATA
Service Feature Restriction Class Data Programming Sheet
SERVICE
RESTRICTION
CLASS
SERVICE FEATURE INDEX
DAY/NIGHT
MODE
(DAY/NIGHT)
D/N
(SFI)
1 ~ 255
Note 2
TENANT
NUMBER
(TN)
(SFC)
0 ~ 15
1
~
94
95
96
~
117 118 119
~
255
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note 1: Restriction Data (RES) is assigned in the squares where SFI and SFC cross. When unassigned, Restriction
Data is set as “0” (Restricted status). Allowed Status data is “1”, and must be assigned to allow the feature.
Note 2: Service Feature Index (SFI) 95.
•
For SFC of ACD line of Agent Position and Supervisory Position, assign RES = 1 (Allowed).
For SFC of Non-ACD line of Agent Position and Supervisory Position, assign RES = 0 (Restricted).
For SFC of Stations other than the Agent Position and Supervisory Position, assign RES = 0 (Restrict-
ed).
Note 3: SFI118 may be set to a 1 (for Live Record), when using an AD-16/40 vm system.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 347
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TERM
AKYD: ASSIGNMENT OF KEY DATA FOR D
AKYD: Assignment of Key Data for Dterm
1. Function
This command is used to assign, delete, and display the following key data corresponding to each line/
term
feature buttons of D . For details of this command, refer to “AKYD” command in NEAX2400 IMX
Office Data Specification.
•
•
Line Key Data
Function Key Data
2. Precautions
1. Before assigning the key data for D
term
by this command, be sure to assign the station data (TN, STN,
by ASDT command. The station number assigned by ASDT command
term
term
TEC = 12 (D )) of the D
is referred to as “My Line”.
Note: The “My Line” corresponds to the physical port associated with the LENS of a DLC/ELC card.
2. By assigning another station line to a function button by this command, an incoming call terminated to
a station line other than My Line can be answered or can be transferred to elsewhere as in the case of
the My Line. A station line other than My Line is referred to as a “Sub Line”. A “Sub Line” can be
term
assigned not only to a D
but to any conventional telephone. In addition, the station data for My Line
and Sub Line must be assigned via the ASDT command before the key data is assigned. When the Sub
Line and the My Line belong to different tenants, use the ATNR command and clear the “Tenant to
Tenant Restriction”.
term
3. A Multi-Line key (the key for My Line and Sub Line) on theD
can be assigned as “Prime Line”. If
the Prime Line is not assigned, the My Line will serves as the Prime Line. When the user goes off-hook,
term
the Prime Line is automatically connected to the D
.
term
4. A virtual line can be assigned as a Sub Line of the D . The virtual line can be used the same way as
the My Line for outgoing calls and other service operations.
Note: Virtual Line — A virtual LENS exists only in memory, but does not exist physically. Data can be assigned
but no hardware is provided for it; ex. LENS = 000311. The virtual LENS is assigned station data using the
ASDT command in the same way as for on ordinary line. (The telephone class is TEC = 18: Virtual Line)
5. When this command is used, the DLC/ELC card must be reinitialized (MB switch UP-DOWN).
6. Key data programmed in this command must be set to all nodes to be provided ACD service for Fusion
network.
term
Note: Use Command ADKS for Series E D
.
CHAPTER 7
Page 348
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TERM
AKYD: ASSIGNMENT OF KEY DATA FOR D
3. Parameters
TN:
STN:
Tenant Number (for My Line)
Station Number (for My Line)
KYI or KYI2:
1=
2=
Function Key
Multi-line
KYN or KYN2: Key number
term
TP:
Type of D
(Enter 2 or 3)
ACD Position (8/16 button + 8 Flex)
ACD Position (24 button + 8 Flex or 16-button with Add on Module + 8 Flex for
2=
3=
term
term
D
Series III/32 button type with Add on Module + 8 Flex for D
Series E)
PRI:
Priority of Answering a Call (0 ~ 4)
Must be programmed as 0.
LN PRE:
Line Preference (0/1):
Must be programmed as 0.
PLTN:
PLSTN:
S:
Tenant Number of the Prime Line.
Station Number of the Prime Line.
Off-hook suppression to Prime Line. Note 2
Note 1
0=
1=
Off-hook suppression disabled.
Off-hook suppression enabled.
Note: “WRT?” prompt is displayed after the function button data have all been assigned.
Note 1: The ACD Line Number must be programmed here (Virtual Line).
Note 2: Must be enabled to Prime Line (ACD Line).
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 349
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TERM
AKYD: ASSIGNMENT OF KEY DATA FOR D
FKY: Function Key (valid for KYI=1)
34=
35=
37=
38=
39=
40=
41=
42=
43=
44=
45=
47=
52=
59=
OAI Key 1 (Break)
OAI Key 2 (Auto/Man) Note 3
OAI Key 4 (Work)
OAI Key 5 (Night)
OAI Key 6 (Trk Trbl (Trunk Trouble))
OAI Key 7 (Tally)
OAI Key 8 (Assist (Assistance Key))
OAI Key 9 (Emer (Emergency Key))
OAI Key 10 (Log On/Off)
OAI Key 11 (Answer)
OAI Key 12 (Mon/Barge (Monitor/Barge))
OAI Key 14 (Call Waiting Lamp)
Speaker
Release
KD:
Kind of Line (Valid for KYI=2)
0= Line
TN:
STN:
RG:
Tenant Number (for Sub-Line
Station Number (for Sub-Line)
Ringing Information for Each Line (0 ~ 7)
)
Note 4
RG
RINGING DURING DAY MODE
RINGING DURING NIGHT MODE
DELAY TIME
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No Ringing
Ringing
No Ringing
Not used
Ringing
Ringing
Ringing
Ringing
No Ringing
No Ringing
Ringing
Not used
Ringing
Ringing
Ringing
Ringing
0 sec.
0 sec.
30 sec.
20 sec.
10 sec.
0 sec
Note 3: Automatic/Manual answer key, toggles between Automatic Answer Mode and Manual Answer Mode.
Note 4: The ACD Line Number must be programmed here (Virtual Line).
CHAPTER 7
Page 350
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TERM
AKYD: ASSIGNMENT OF KEY DATA FOR D
term
D
Series E Flexible Key Assignments
•
Standard
FEATURE
KYN
FKY
FUNCTION
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
13
8
CONFERENCE
REDIAL
RECALL
6
28
16
18
57
20
52
ANSWER
FEATURE
TRANSFER
RECALL
CONF
1
HOLD
REDIAL
SPEAKER
2
HOLD
TRANSFER
ANSWER
SPEAKER
7
5
3
8
•
ACD
LOG
KYN
FKY
FUNCTION
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
13
40
34
43
18
59
20
37
CONFERENCE
TALLY
RIS
6
BREAK
LOGON
CONF
TRANSFER
RELEASE
HOLD
1
TALLY
WORK
2
HOLD
TRF
BRK
WORK
7
5
3
8
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 351
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TERM
AKYD: ASSIGNMENT OF KEY DATA FOR D
term
D
Key Data Programming Sheet (1/2)
MY LINE
STATION NUMBER
TENANT
NUMBER
(TN)
(STN)
PRIME LINE
LINE
PREFER-
ENCE
FOR OUTGO-
ING
ALLOW
OG
FROM
PRIME
LINE
(S)
MESSAGE
LINE
PRIORITY
OF
ANSWERING
CALL
LINE
WAITING
LINE
PREFERENCE PREFERENCE
TYPE OF
DTERM
(TP)
DATA
DISPLAY
SELECTION
(MWD)
PREFERENCE FOR SPEAKER FOR ANSWER
(LN PRE)
0/1
TENANT STATION
NUMBER NUMBER
(PL TN) (PL STN)
BUTTON
(SPK)
0-3
BUTTON
(ANS)
0-2
(PRI)
0-4
BUTTON
(ORG)
0-3
0/1
0/1
0/1
MULTI LINE
INTERCOM
RING
INFORMATION
FOR
EACH LINE
(RG)
GROUP
ID
NUM-
BER
(G-ID)
1-50
KEY
NUM-
BER
SERVICE
CONDITION
(KYI)
FEATURE
KEY CODE
(FKY)
KIND OF
LINE
(KD)
KIND OF
INCOM
(ICM)
TENANT
NUMBER
(TN)
STATION
NUMBER
(STN)
(KYN)
0 – 2
1-320
0-2
0-2
0-7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
CHAPTER 7
Page 352
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TERM
AKYD: ASSIGNMENT OF KEY DATA FOR D
term
D
Key Data Programming Sheet (2/2)
MULTI LINE
INTERCOM
RING
INFORMATION
FOR
EACH LINE
(RG)
GROUP
ID
NUM-
BER
(G-ID)
1-50
KEY
NUM-
BER
SERVICE
CONDITION
(KYI)
FEATURE
KEY CODE
(FKY)
KIND OF
LINE
(KD)
KIND OF
INCOM
(ICM)
TENANT
NUMBER
(TN)
STATION
NUMBER
(STN)
(KYN)
0 – 2
1-320
0-2
0-2
0-7
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
Note 1: When KYI=0 (None), it is not necessary to assign any data.
When KYI=1 (FUNCTION), assign data for FKY only.
When KYI=2 (Multi-Line), assign data for multiple telephone only.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 353
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AMNO: Assignment of Monitored Number
AMNO: Assignment of Monitored Number
1. Function
AMNO is used to assign monitored numbers into the PBX database. The numbers programmed in AMNO
will also be programmed into ACDPLT (the ACD database). The monitored numbers programmed in
AMNO are the entry points for pilot numbers into the ACD system.
2. Precautions
1. When the monitored number (MNO) is deleted, delete MNO in ACDPLT prior to this command.
2. When UCD=1 is programmed in this command, UCD service should be programmed beforehand.
3. Parameters
TN:
MNO:
Tenant Number of Monitored Number
Monitored Number (maximum 5 digits. the number is the same as the pilot number
assigned in ACDPLT and must match the numbering plan of the NEAX2400 IMX.
Number Monitored Index (1 ~ 4095)
UCD degrade
NMI:
UCD:
0 – No
1 –Yes
STN:
A/G:
UCD Control Station Number (Available for UCD=1) Note 1
Station type of Hotel System Note 2
A: Administration Station
G: Guest Station
MFC:
G-2 Signal Data for MFC (0-3) Note 3
0 = ASFC, SFI 59 = 0 and SFI 60 = 0
1 = ASFC, SFI 59 = 1 and SFI 60 = 0
2 = ASFC, SFI 59 = 0 and SFI 60 = 1
3 = ASFC, SFI 59 = 1 and SFI 60 = 1
Note: Each monitored number must be assigned to different Monitored Number Index.
“0”cannot be assigned at the first digit of the monitored number.
Note 1: When a C.O. trunk is used for UCD control station, UCD controlling station number should be
programmed in ACSI in advance.
Note 2: For Business System, “A (Administration Station)” is assigned here.
Note 3: Valid for countries except Australia and North America.
CHAPTER 7
Page 354
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AMNO: Assignment of Monitored Number
Monitored Number Data Programming Sheet
TENANT
NUMBER
(TN)
ADMIN./
GUEST
(A/G)
MONITORED
NUMBER
(MNO)
NUMBER MONITORED
INDEX (NMI)
UCD DEGRADE
UCD CONTROL
STATION NUMBER
(STN)
(UCD)
0/1
1 ~ 4095
1 ~ 10
A/G
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 7
Page 355
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AMNOL: Assignment of Monitored Number for LDM
AMNOL: Assignment of Monitored Number for LDM
1. Function
AMNOL is used to assign monitored numbers into the PBX database. The numbers programmed in
AMNOL will also be programmed into ACDPLT (the ACD database). The monitored numbers
programmed in AMNOL are the entry points for pilot numbers into the ACD service to be activated over
FCCS. The monitored number programmed in AMNOL is available for only the self node.
2. Precautions
1. Prior to this command, Telephone number of the monitored number should be programmed in ALGNL.
2. When the monitored number (L_MNO) is deleted, delete L_MNO in ACDPLT prior to this command.
3. Parameters
UGN:
L_MNO:
User Group Number of Monitored Number (Fixed “1”)
Telephone number of Monitored Number (maximum 5 digits. the number is the same
as the pilot number assigned in ACDPLT and must match the numbering plan of the
NEAX2400 IMX).
L_NMI:
UCD:
Number Monitored Index (1 ~ 4095)
UCD degrade
0 – No
1 –Yes
TELN:
A/G:
UCD Control Station’s Telephone Number (Available for UCD=1) Note 1
Station type of Hotel System Note 2
A: Administration Station
G: Guest Station
MFC:
G-2-Signal Data for MFC (0-3) Note 3
0 = ASFC, SFI 59 = 0 and SFI 60 = 0
1 = ASFC, SFI 59 = 1 and SFI 60 = 0
2 = ASFC, SFI 59 = 0 and SFI 60 = 1
3 = ASFC, SFI 59 = 1 and SFI 60 = 1
Note: Each monitored number must be assigned to different Monitored Number Index.
“0”can not be assigned at the first digit of the monitorednumber.
Note 1: When a C.O. trunk is used for UCD control station, UCD controlling station number should be
programmed in ACSIL in advance.
Note 2: For Business System, “A (Administration Station)” is assigned here.
Note 3: Valid for countries except Australia, U.S.A and Canada.
CHAPTER 7
Page 356
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AMNOL: Assignment of Monitored Number for LDM
Monitored Number Data (LDM) Programming Sheet
LOCAL
MONITORED
NUMBER
(L_MNO)
MAX. 5 DIGITS
USER
GROUP
NUMBER
(UGN)
LOCAL NUMBER
MONITORED
INDEX (L_NMI)
1 ~ 4095
UCD CONTROL
TELN NUMBER
(TELN)
ADMIN./
GUEST
(A/G)
UCD DEGRADE
(UCD)
0/1
MAX. 5 DIGITS
A/G
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 7
Page 357
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AMNON: Assignment of Monitored Number for NDM
AMNON: Assignment of Monitored Number for NDM
1. Function
AMNON is used to assign monitored numbers into the PBX database. The numbers programmed in
AMNON will also be programmed into ACDPLT (the ACD database). The monitored numbers
programmed in AMNON are the entry points for pilot numbers into the ACD service to be activated over
FCCS. The monitored number programmed in AMNON is available for all nodes within Fusion network.
2. Precautions
1. Prior to this command, Telephone number of the monitored number should be programmed in ALGNN.
2. When the monitored number (N_MNO) is deleted, delete the number in ACDPLT prior to this
command.
3. When UCD=1 is programmed in this command, UCD service for Fusion network should be
programmed beforehand.
3. Parameters
UGN:
N_MNO:
User Group Number of Monitored Number (Fixed “1”)
Telephone number of Monitored Number (maximum 5 digits). The number is the same
as the pilot number assigned in ACDPLT and must match the numbering plan of the
NEAX2400 IMX.
N_NMI:
UCD:
Number Monitored Index (1 ~ 4095)
UCD-fusion degrade
0 – No
1 –Yes
TELN:
A/G:
UCD Control Station’s Telephone Number Note 1
Station type of Hotel System Note 2
A: Administration Station
G: Guest Station
MFC:
G-2-Signal Data for MFC (0-3) Note 3
0 = ASFC, SFI 59 = 0 and SFI 60 = 0
1 = ASFC, SFI 59 = 1 and SFI 60 = 0
2 = ASFC, SFI 59 = 0 and SFI 60 = 1
3 = ASFC, SFI 59 = 1 and SFI 60 = 1
Note: Each monitored number must be assigned to different Monitored Number Index.
“0”can not be assigned at the first digit of the monitorednumber.
Note 1: When a C.O. trunk is used for UCD control station, UCD controlling station number should be
programmed in ACSIL in advance.
Note 2: For Business System, “A (Administration Station)” is assigned here.
Note 3: Valid for countries except Australia, U.S.A and Canada.
CHAPTER 7
Page 358
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AMNON: Assignment of Monitored Number for NDM
Monitored Number Data (NDM) Programming Sheet
NETWORK
MONITORED
NUMBER
(N_MNO)
MAX. 5 DIGITS
NETWORK
NUMBER
MONITORED
INDEX (N_NMI)
1 ~ 4095
UCD CONTROL
TELEPHONE
NUMBER
(TELN)
MAX. 5 DIGITS
USER
GROUP
NUMBER
(UGN)
ADMIN./
GUEST
(A/G)
UCD DEGRADE
(UCD)
0/1
A/G
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 7
Page 359
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACNO: Assignment of Conversion Number Data
ACNO: Assignment of Conversion Number Data
1. Function
ACNO is used to direct a specified ringdown type trunk route to a specific monitored number (monitored
number is the same as a pilot number).
Note: This command does not apply to self-directing type trunks (i.e. DID, TIE Lines, etc.).
2. Precautions
1. Prior to this command, program the monitored number by AMNO and ACDPLT.
2. Do not program the Direct inTermination service data against the route assigned by this command.
3. Parameters
RT:
TN:
Route Number (Must be Ring Down Trunk)
Tenant Number of Monitored Number
MNO:
Monitored Number (as programmed in AMNO)
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 360
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACNO: Assignment of Conversion Number Data
Conversion Number Data Programming Sheet
ROUTE NUMBER
(RT)
TENANT NUMBER
MONITORED NUMBER
(MNO)
(TN)
1 ~ 255
1 ~ 10
Max. 5 digits
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 7
Page 361
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACNOL: Assignment of Conversion Number Data for LDM
ACNOL: Assignment of Conversion Number Data for LDM
1. Function
ACNOL is used to direct a specified ringdown type trunk route to a specific monitored number (monitored
number is the same as a pilot number) in Telephone number. The conversion number programmed in
ACNOL is available for the self node only.
Note: This command does not apply to self-directing type trunks (i.e. DID, TIE Lines, etc.).
2. Precautions
1. Prior to this command, program the monitored number by AMNOL and ACDPLT.
2. Assign the logical route number against each physical route number in ALRTL.
3. Do not program the Direct-inTermination service data against the route assigned by this command.
3. Parameters
LGRT:
UGN:
Logical Route Number 1-254 (Must be Ring Down Trunk)
User Group Number of Monitored Number (Fixed “1”)
L_MNO:
Telephone number of Local Monitored Number (as programmed in AMNOL)
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 362
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACNOL: Assignment of Conversion Number Data for LDM
Conversion Number Data (LDM) Programming Sheet
LOGICAL
ROUTE NUMBER
(LGRT)
USER GROUP
NUMBER
(UGN)
LOCAL MONITORED NUMBER
(L_MNO)
Max. 5 digits
1 ~ 254
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 7
Page 363
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACNON: Assignment of Conversion Number Data for NDM
ACNON: Assignment of Conversion Number Data for NDM
1. Function
ACNON is used to direct a specified ringdown type trunk route to a specific monitored number (monitored
number is the same as a pilot number) in Telephone number. The monitored number is available for all
nodes within Fusion network.
Note: This command does not apply to self-directing type trunks (i.e. DID, TIE Lines, etc.).
2. Precautions
1. Prior to this command, program the monitored number by AMNON and ACDPLT.
2. Assign the logical route number against each physical route number in ALRTN.
3. Do not program the Direct-inTermination service data against the route assigned by this command.
3. Parameters
LGRT:
UGN:
Logical Route Number 1-254 (Must be Ring Down Trunk)
User Group Number of Monitored Number (Fixed “1”)
N_MNO:
Telephone number of Network Monitored Number (as programmed in AMNON)
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 364
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACNON: Assignment of Conversion Number Data for NDM
Conversion Number Data (NDM) Programming Sheet
LOGICAL
ROUTE NUMBER
(LGRT)
USER GROUP
NUMBER
(UGN)
NETWORK MONITORED NUMBER
(N_MNO)
Max. 5 digits
1 ~ 254
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 7
Page 365
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AADT: Assignment of Announcement/Dictation Trunks
AADT: Assignment of Announcement/Dictation Trunks
1. Function
This command is used to assign, display and delete announcement trunks for delay announcements, night
announcements, etc. Also used to assign, display and delete Dictation Trunks for such purposes as
Emergency Recorder.
2. Precautions
Before LENS of announcement trunks or night announcement is changed inATRK, the AADT command
data should be deleted. In addition, if LENS data is deleted in ATRK by accident, this command data is also
deleted automatically.
3. Parameters
TYPE:
NO:
1 = ANT (Announcement Trunk)
2 = DCT (Dictation Trunk)
ANT/DCT Number
Announcement = 1 ~ 58
Dictation = 1 ~ 5
D:
Availability of Disconnect Timer (Available for TYPE = 1)
0 = Disconnect timer not available
1 = Disconnect timer available (normal) Note 1
Message Timer (2 ~ 120 sec. 2-sec. interval when shorter than 30 sec. 8-sec. interval
when longer than 30 sec.)
MSGT:
CP:
Connection Pattern Note 2
0 = Multiple Connection
1 = Single Connection
WAIT:
CNT:
RT:
Waiting Timer (0~30sec. 2sec. interval) Note 2
Number of Announcement/Dictation Trunks (1 ~ 8)
Route Number (1 ~ 255)
TK:
Trunk Number (1 ~ 255)
Note 1: When D=1, msg disconnect timer is set at 30 seconds.
Note 2: Available only when the system data is programmed that the DAT control function is available (ASYD,
SYS1, INDEX449, b2 = 1).
CHAPTER 7
Page 366
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AADT: Assignment of Announcement/Dictation Trunks
Announcement/Dictation Trunks Data Programming Sheet
DISCON-
NECT TIMER
AVAILABLE
(D)
MES-
SAGE
TIMER
(MSGT)
2 ~ 120
CONNEC-
TION
PATTERN
(CP)
NUMBER ROUTE
ANT/
DCT
ANT/DCT
NUMBER
WAITING
TIMER
(WAIT)
0 ~ 30
TRUNK
NUMBER
(TK)
OF
TRUNKS
(CNT)
1 ~ 8
NUM-
BER
(RT)
(TYPE) ANT = 1 ~ 58
1/2 DCT = 1 ~ 5
1 ~ 255
0/1
0/1
1 ~ 255
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 7
Page 367
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AADTN: Assignment of Announcement/Dictation Trunks for NDM
AADTN: Assignment of Announcement/Dictation Trunks for NDM
1. Function
This command is used to assign, display and delete announcement trunks for delay announcements, night
announcements, etc. Also used to assign, display and delete Dictation Trunks for such purposes as
Emergency Recorder. The announcement trunk or dictation trunk programmed in AADTN is allowed to
use from the remote ACD node within Fusion Network.
2. Precautions
Before LENS of assignment trunks or night announcement is changed in ATRK, the AADTN command
data should be deleted first. In addition, if LEN data is deleted inATRK by accident, this command data is
also deleted automatically.
3. Parameters
TYPE:
NO:
1 = ANT (Announcement Trunk)
2 = DCT (Dictation Trunk)
ANT/DCT Number
Announcement = 1 ~ 58
Dictation = 1 ~ 5
D:
Availability of Disconnect Timer (Available for TYPE = ANT)
0 = Disconnect timer not available
1 = Disconnect timer available (normal) Note 1
Message Timer (2 ~ 120 sec. 2-sec. interval when shorter than 30 sec. 8-sec. interval
when longer than 30 sec.)
MSGT:
CP:
Connection Pattern Note 2
0 = Multiple Connection
1 = Single Connection
WAIT:
CNT:
LGRT:
TK:
Waiting Timer (0~30sec. 2sec. interval) Note 2
Number of Announcement/Dictation Trunks (1 ~ 8)
LOGICAL Route Number (1 ~ 254)
Trunk Number (1 ~ 255)
Note 1: When D=1, msg disconnect timer is set at 30 seconds.
Note 2: Not available since the DAT control function is not available in Fusion network. Always assign “0”=ASYD,
SYS1, INDEX449, b2 for the announcement to beprovided in Fusion network.
Note 3: For Fusion network, DAT control function is not available.
CHAPTER 7
Page 368
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AADTN: Assignment of Announcement/Dictation Trunks for NDM
Announcement/Dictation Trunks Data (NDM) Programming Sheet
DISCONNECT
TIMER
AVAILABLE
(D)
LOGICAL
ROUTE
NUMBER
(LGRT)
ANT/DCT
NUMBER
ANT = 1 ~ 58
DCT = 1 ~ 5
MESSAGE
TIMER
(MSGT)
2 ~ 120
NUMBER
OF TRUNKS
(CNT)
TRUNK
NUMBER
(TK)
ANT/DCT
(TYPE)
1/2
1 ~ 8
1 ~ 255
0/1
1 ~ 254
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 7
Page 369
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALGNN: Assignment of Telephone Number Data for NDM
ALGNN: Assignment of Telephone Number Data for NDM
1. General
This command assigns the individual attendant identification number for Fusion service. The data assigned
by this command is written in Network Data Memory (NDM) of the Network Control Node (NCN),
updating the NDM at each Local Node (LN).
2. Precautions
1. The applicable tenant number (TN) range is designated by the ASYDN command, SYS 1, INDEX 8. If
the numbering plan is common for all tenants (ASYDN, SYS1, INDEX 800, bit0 = 1), assign TN
parameter as “1” for all tenants.
2. The system data assignment (ASYDN, SYS 1, INDEX 514, bit1 = 1) is needed to provide the Network
Data Memory (NDM).
3. Before assigning this command, ANPDN/ASPAN commands are required for the numbering plan of the
Telephone Number (TELN).
4. A unique Telephone Number (TELN) should be given within a User Group Number (UGN).
5. For more detail, see the NEAX2400 IMX Fusion Network System Manual.
3. Data Entry Instructions
TELN
UGN
Assign Telephone Number (Unique TELN should be
1 = User Group Number 1 (Fixed)
given within a UGN)
USER GROUP
NUMBER (UGN)
1
TELEPHONE STATION NUMBER (TELN)
MAX. 16 DIGITS
REMARKS
4
4
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
1
1
Note: All monitored (Pilot) numbers must be added here and in AMNON for Fusion Network.
CHAPTER 7
Page 370
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALGNN: Assignment of Telephone Number Data for NDM
4. Data Sheet
TELEPHONE STATION NUMBER
USER GROUP NUMBER
(UGN)
REMARKS
(TELN)
MAX. 16 DIGITS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 7
Page 371
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALGSN: Assignment of Telephone Station Data for NDM
ALGSN: Assignment of Telephone Station Data for NDM
1. General
This command assigns the related data of the Telephone Number (TELN) corresponding to the physical
station. The data assigned by this command is written in Network Data Memory (NDM) of the Network
Control Node (NCN), updating the NDM at each Local Node (LN).
2.
Precautions
1. The ALGSN command is used to assign the Telephone Number (TELN) for a Network Control Node
(NCN).
2. The TYPE parameter allows the user to choose the programming method of the physical station.
TYPE = 1 (LENS): Telephone number to be given to the LENS
TYPE = 2 (STN): Telephone number to be given to the station
3. The system data assignment (ASYDN, SYS 1, INDEX 514, bit1 = 1) is needed to provide the Network
Data Memory (NDM).
4. When the parameter TYPE is “1” (LENS is used to specify the physical station number), the assignment
of the Fusion Point Code (FPC) entered by the AFMU command is required.
5. For more details, see the NEAX2400 IMX Fusion Network System Manual.
6. All PBX and ACD Station Numbers must be added here for Fusion Network.
CHAPTER 7
Page 372
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALGSN: Assignment of Telephone Station Data for NDM
3. Data Entry Instructions
When assigning TYPE = 1 (LENS is used to specify the Telephone number)
TYPE
LENS
1 = LENS is used to specify the Telephone number
LENS of the physical station
2 = STN is used to specify the Telephone number
USER
GROUP
NUMBER
(UGN)
FUSION
POINT CODE
(FPC)
LINE EQUIPMENT
TYPE
1/2
TELEPHONE NUMBER (TELN)
MAX. 16 DIGITS
NUMBER
(LENS)
1-253
1
1
1
1
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
FPC
UGN
Fusion Point Code (FPC) of the designated
LENS. FPC is assigned by the AFMU com-
mand.
LSTN
1 = User Group Number 1 (Fixed)
Telephone number assigned by the ALGNN
command.
When assigning TYPE = 2 (STN is used to specify the Telephone number)
TYPE
STN
Station number of the physical station
1 = LENS is used to specify the Telephone number
2 = STN is used to specify the Telephone number
USER
TENANT
NUMBER
(TN)
STATION
NUMBER
(STN)
TYPE
1/2
GROUP
NUMBER
(UGN)
TELEPHONE NUMBER (TELN)
MAX. 16 DIGITS
2
5
6
4
5
2
2
1
1
11
4
0
0
0
0
TN
Tenant number of the physical station
LSTN
UGN
Telephone number assigned by the ALGNN
1 = User Group Number 1 (Fixed)
command.
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 7
Page 373
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALGSN: Assignment of Telephone Station Data for NDM
4. Data Sheet
a. LENS is used to specify the Telephone number (TYPE = 1)
TELEPHONE NUMBER
USER GROUP
LINE EQUIPMENT
NUMBER
FUSION POINT
CODE
TYPE
(TELN)
NUMBER (UGN)
MAX. 16 DIGITS
(LENS)
(FPC)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CHAPTER 7
Page 374
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALGSN: Assignment of Telephone Station Data for NDM
b. STN is used to specify the Telephone number (TYPE = 2)
TENANT
NUMBER
(TN)
STATION
NUMBER
(STN)
USER GROUP
NUMBER (UGN)
TELEPHONE NUMBER (TELN)
MAX. 16 DIGITS
TYPE
REMARKS
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 7
Page 375
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PBX AND ACD COMMAND PROGRAMMING
2.2.1 Command Relationships
Each command consists of a name (four to six alphanumeric characters) which suggests its function and the
commands. Each ACD command may involve the assignment or execution of PBX commands and/or other
ACD commands.
Each command description includes a section entitled “Assignment and Deletion Procedure” which describes
the correct sequence for applying related commands.
Table 7-3 Related Commands
Related PBX
(Non-Fusion)
Commands
Related PBX Fusion
Command Name
Related ACD Commands
Commands
ASYD, ANPDN, ASPAN,
ASYDL, AADTN, ASYDN
ACDCOM, ACDSPL,
ACDCCV
ACDTN
ASYD, ANPD, ASPA, AADT
ACDSPL
ACDLOG
ACDTN
ACDTN, ACDSPL, ACDPSN
AEFR, ASFC, ASDT, AKYD, AEFR, ASFC, ASDT, AKYD, ACDSPL, ACDHS, ACDWS,
ACDPSN
ACDCCV
ACDPLT
ARSC
ARSCN, ALGSN
ACDHC, ACDTN
ACDSPL, ACDHS, ACDWS,
ADCHC, ACDTN
AADT, ASDT
AADTN, ASDT, ALGSN
AMNON, ACNON, ALGNN,
ASATN
AMNO, ACNO, ASAT
ACDTN, ACDCCV, ACDWS
ACDTG
ACDANA
ACDIVR
ATRK, MBTK
AMNO
ALRTN
ACDTN
ACDPSN
ACDTN
ALGNN, AMNON
ASDT, ASHUN, ALGSN
ASDT, ASHU
ACDTN, ACDWS, ACDHS,
ACDCCV
ACDHS
ADCHC
ACDWS
ACDTN, ACDHS
ACDTN, ACDCCV, ACDPLT
ASYD (R), ASYDL (R),
ASDT (R), AOKC (R),
ARSCN (R), ASFC (R),
AKYD (R), AMNON (R),
ACNON (O), AEFR (R),
AADTN (O), ASHUN (O),
SPDL (R), ASATN (R),
ROAI (O), ALGNN (R)
ALRTN (R), ALGSN (R)
ASYD (R), ASDT (R),
AOKC (R), ARSC (R),
ASFC (R), AKYD (R),
AMNO (R), ACNO (O),
AEFR (R), AADT (O),
ASHU (O), SPDL (R),
ASAT (R), ROAI (O)
ACDTN (R), ACDSPL (R),
ACDLOG (O), ACDPSN (R),
ACDCCV (R), ACDPLT (R),
ACDTG (R), ACDANA (O),
ACDIVR (O), ACDHS (O),
ACDHC (O), ACDWS (O)
Total ACD
System
(R) = Required, (O) = Optional
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 377
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PBX AND ACD COMMAND PROGRAMMING
2.3 SETTING UP THE ACD
ACD parameters are set up in Windows 95 and Windows 98 using popup Windows. From the folder containing
the IMX installation/maintenance files, select the ACDMAT ACD MAT System option.
HouseSwitch - NECAM:IMXZ 1.5 -FPC 1
File View PBX Scan Help
MJ MN SUP TRF
ACDMAT ACD MAT System
System Control
System Backup
Make Busy Control
Traffic Data
Traffic Data for Fusion Network
Test
Station Data
Trunk Data
Numbering Plan
Service Feature Data
List Up Commands(1)
List Up Commands(2)
Signal Translation Data
Restriction Data
Installation
Local Data Memory
Event
Tool
Ready
CHAPTER 7
Page 378
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PBX AND ACD COMMAND PROGRAMMING
The IMX ACD MAT menu is displayed. Double-click the icon corresponding to the function you wish to set.
IMX ACD MAT
File View Options MAT Report Window Help
Ready
To identify the function, place the cursor on the icon. The name of the function is displayed.
Note: To use the ACD On-Line Help from any of theWindows, place the cursor in the box for the desired setting
and press F1.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 379
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDTN: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD TENANT DATA
ACDTN: Assignment of ACD Tenant Data
1. Function
This command is used to assign, list, and print the following data for an ACD tenant:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Tenant Number
Tenant Name (optional)
The number (maximum) of splits (per tenant)
Default Language
Operator Access Code
IVR Pilot Number
Outbound Answer Timer
Agent Personal Queue Parameters:
Announcement Number and Overflow/Forward Priority.
Tenant data gives the user an identity within the ACD system. It also allows the tenant to determine the
number of splits that will be needed for ACD operations.
Tenant Data
1
Tenant Number:
NameACD FPC40
Remove
List
Splits: 50
30
IVR Plot Number
Outbound Answer Timer:
English
Default Language:
0
Operator Access Code:
Close
I/O Port Assignment:
Agent Personal Queues
Announcement Number:
1
COM1
COM3
COM2
1
Overflow/Forward Priority:
Off
MIS
Infolink
Remove Tenant?
2. Precautions
1. The ACDTN data is one of the most important data for ACD system configuration. The user must
program the NSPL data carefully to lessen the need for future changes. If the NSPL data is changed,
all data concerned with ACD function must be changed also.
2. Since data related to MIS connection is assigned using TN 1, the following data must be set even when
TN 1 is not used for the ACD system.
TN=1, NSPL=1, PRI=1, LANG=0 *the data to be entered in other parameter is optional
4. Remove menu selection is not applicable for this command.
5. Assign the number of tenants for whole system including Business/Hotel features (SYS1, Index8).
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282
Page 380
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDTN: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD TENANT DATA
3. Parameters
TENANT NUMBER:
Tenant Number (1 to 10)
NAME:
Tenant Name (up to 20 characters)
SPLITS:
Maximum Split for Tenant (1 - 250)
DEFAULT LANGUAGE:
English
Japanese
Spanish
Italian
French
German
OPERATOR ACCESS CODE:
Enter the operator access code programmed in the PBX subsystem
(ASPA or ASPAN).
IVR PILOT NUMBER:
ANSWER TIMER:
Number to access IVR directory numbers used by ACD
Time (in seconds) after which an outbound call is assumed to have
been answered.
AGENT PERSONAL QUEUE:
Personal Announcement Number (0 - 58) or SPACE: feature not
used
OVERFLOW/FORWARD PRIORITY: Priority to use for split queuing after overflow or call forwarding
(1 to 250)
I/O PORT ASSIGNMENT:
MIS I/O Ports (1 to 6). Defines which of the MIS Ports are config-
ured for this tenant.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 381
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDTN: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD TENANT DATA
4. Assignment and Deletion Procedure
These flow diagrams show the procedure used to assign and change Tenant Data for the Integrated ACD.
DESCRIPTION
START
Assign the number of tenants (SYS1 index 8).
Assign the Tenant data.
ASYD
1
2
1
2
ACDTN
END
DESCRIPTION
START
1
Delete the Tenant data.
ACDTN
END
1
Figure 7-1 Assigning and RemovingTenant Data Information
CHAPTER 7
Page 382
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDTN: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD TENANT DATA
Number
Tenant
Number
(TN)
Tenant Name
(NAME)
Max. 20 characters
Default
Access Code
of
Split
1-250
Language for Operator
0-5
Call
1-10
Personal
Announcement
Number
Personal Queue
Overflow/For-
ward Priority
(PRI)
Outbound
Answer Timer
(ANSTM)
0-60
Access Code of IVR
(IVRNO)
(ANTNO)
0-58
1-255
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 383
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDSPL: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD SPLIT DATA
ACDSPL: Assignment of ACD Split Data
1. Function
This command is used to assign, list, print, and remove ACD split data. Each split is configured through
this command for its answer mode, after call status, conditional thresholds, and operationally-related
directory numbers and other split-related data.
Split Data
Split
Remove
List
Tenant Number
Split:
Name:
Hot Split:
Queue
Maximum Depth:
Dash
Upon PBX Call
Dir Numbers
Night
Recover Time:
Auto Work on Ring:
Auto Work on Answer:
Auto Work on Dial Out:
Agent Priority Queuing:
Close
Auto Answer:
Assist:
Queue When Vacant:
Auto Ready After Call:
Require Tally Per Call:
Work Mode
Auto Ready on Release:
Conditional Threshold
Emergency
Recorder #
Restricted:
Standard Calls CCV
TimeOut
Index:
Step:
While On PBX Call
Analog TimeOut
Agents Available
1
Call Waiting Thresholds
Agent
Light:
Flash:
Logoff Warning Criteria
Require Logon ID:
Jack Out Mode:
Multiple Break Types: Assist Key "Monitor
Chime:
Rem ove Split?
2. Precautions
1. Directory number for assist, emergency, and night should be assigned before assigning split data.
2. The dictation trunk for emergency calls should be assigned before assigning split data.
Table 7-4 COND (Conditional Thresholds)
METHODS
CONDITIONS
RESULTS
No Calls Accepted No Call Accepted. Note 1
No conditional calls will be
accepted by the split.
Agents Available Number of agents that must be available for conditional Conditional calls will or will not be
Value: 1 to 250
queue calls to be accepted. Note 2
accepted.
Calls in Queue
Value: 1 to 699
Will only accept conditional queue calls, depending on Conditional calls will or will not be
how many calls are already in queue to the split. Note 3 accepted.
Note 1: If COND= NO CALLS ACCEPTED is selected, this split will not accept conditional Queue call.
CHAPTER 7
Page 384
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDSPL: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD SPLIT DATA
Note 2: If COND= AGENTS AVAILABLE is selected, then this split will accept Conditional Queue calls, depending
on the number of agents available in the split.
Example: If “2” is entered as the number of agents that must be available in COND DETAIL, then there
will have to be at least 2 agents available in the split before it will accept any Conditional Queue calls.
Note 3: If COND= CALLS IN QUEUE is selected then the split will accept Conditional Queue calls depending on
how many calls are already in queue in this split.
Example: If “3” is entered as the number of calls in queue in COND DETAIL and there are more than 3
calls in queue, this split will not accept Conditional Queue Calls.
4. Handling of conditionally queued incoming ACD calls for a particular split. Refer to CCV steps (Call
Control Vector Programming) for programming conditional call handling.
5. Logon IDs can be set either as required or not used in REQUIRE LOGON ID. If a logon ID is required,
an agent must enter a logon ID before receiving access to the ACD system.
6. When the split is in the QUEUE WHEN VACANT mode (when no positions are logged on in the split),
either the Queue or Do Not Queue option may be programmed.
7. The Assist key can be programmed on a split-wide basis to function as an Assist key or a Monitor Me
key in ASSIST KEY IS “MONITOR ME”.
8. Work mode can be Allowed or Restricted on a split-wide basis.
9. Call Waiting lamp can be programmed with two queue thresholds. It can light steadily when a specific
number of calls are in queue, then flash when the second threshold of number of calls are in queue.
10. Never set the Call Waiting Threshold “LIGHT” and “FLASH” to the same value. Always set the
“LIGHT” value lower than the “FLASH” value.
11. Work mode can be programmed to timeout after a position has been in Work mode for a predetermined
time (on a split-wide basis).
12. Each split can be programmed to have one break mode type or nine break mode types in MULTIPLE
BREAK TYPES.
13. QUEUE:
The maximum number of calls that can be in queue at any given time. This field allows normal inputs
(“150”) as well as “percentage” inputs (“150%”), used for Variable Depth Queuing. A Variable Queue
Depth is one that changes based on the number of working agents (logged on and not in break mode).
Therefore, with four working agents, a maximum depth of 150% would equate to 150% × 4 = 6 calls
in queue. The seventh call would then not be allowed to queue until more working agents were added
to the split. Valid ranges for normal maximum depths are 1 to 700. Valid ranges for variable maximum
depths are 5% to 1000%, in increments of 5%.
14. Positions can be programmed to automatically go into Work mode if an outgoing call is made on the
PBX line, or if an incoming call is received on the PBX line.
Press SPACE BAR to change selection (No/Yes)
15. After-call work mode setting determines if an agent is available for the next call immediately, or if the
agent is placed in an after-call work mode at the completion of the current ACD call.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 385
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDSPL: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD SPLIT DATA
16. Answer mode setting determines if a call is automatically connected following a zip tone or if the agent
must manually answer the incoming call by pressing the ANSWER key.
17. A split can be set up so that agent priority queueing can be used if desired.
18. This split can be set up as a Hot Split if desired.
19. A CCV can be assigned for calls stranded in queue.
20. The split can be programmed so that a call which rings at an agent’s phone for a long time can be
recovered and requeued.
21. When assigning AUTO WORK ON RING or AUTO WORK ON DIAL OUT, do not set the WHILE
ON PBX CALL Time Out if theAUTO WORK MODE CANCEL Timer is to be restricted.
CHAPTER 7
Page 386
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDSPL: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD SPLIT DATA
3. Parameters
TENANT NUMBER:
Tenant Number (1 to 10)
SPLIT:
Split Number (1 to 250)
NAME:
REQUIRE LOGON ID:
Split Name (Optional) - Up to 20 characters
Required/Not Required
AUTO READY AFTER CALL: Work / Available
AUTO ANSWER:
QUEUE:
Automatic / Manual
Maximum Queue Depth
1 ~ 700
5 ~ 1000% (In increments of 5%).
No / Yes
Break / Vacant
0~9999 seconds (0=indefinite)
Assist / Monitor Me
1 Break Type / 9 Break Types
CALL WAITING CHIME:
JACK OUT MODE:
WORK MODE TIMEOUT:
ASSIST KEY:
MULTIPLE BREAK TYPES:
DIR NUMBERS
NIGHT:
ASIST:
EMGCY:
Night Pilot Number (SPACE: feature not used)
Assistance Number (SPACE: feature not used)
Emergency Number (SPACE: feature not used)
Recorder No. 1 ~ 5 or 0=feature not used
Queue / Do Not Queue
RECORDER NUMBER:
QUEUE WHEN VACANT:
WORK MODE RESTRICTED: Allow Restricted
UPON PBX CALL: Ring: Auto Work / No Auto Work
Answer: Auto Work / No Auto Work
Dial: Auto Work / No Auto Work
Release: Auto Work / No Auto Work
CONDITIONAL THRESHOLD: No Calls Accepted
Agent Available (1 ~ 250)
Calls in Queue (1 ~ 699)
CALL WAITING THRESHOLD:Light (0 ~ 700)
Flash (0 ~ 700)
STRANDED CALL CCV:
CALL RECOVER TIME:
Index number (1 ~ 900)
Step number (1 ~ 20)
(1 ~ 255 seconds or 0=Feature Not Used)
ANALOG WORK MODE TIMEOUT: 0 ~ 9999 seconds
0 = Indefinite
HOT SPLIT:
No / Yes
AGENT PRIORITY QUEUING: Agent Queuing Options * Available since the PBX software Series 7400
and ACD software R3.
Out of Service / In service
WORK MODE TIMEOUT:
Allowed / Rejected
REQUIRE TALLY PER CALL: Tally Required * * Available since the PBX software Series 7400 and
ACD software R3.
Not required / Required
LOGOFF WARNING CRITERIA:Logoff Warning * Available since the PBX software Series 7400 and
ACD software R3.
Disabled / Calls > Agents, number of calls in queue (1 ~ 9)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 387
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDSPL: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD SPLIT DATA
4. Assignment and Deletion Procedure
These flow diagrams show the procedure used to assign and delete ACD split data.
DESCRIPTION
START
Assign the Tenant data.
ACDTN
1
2
1
2
ACDSPL
Assign the Split data.
END
START
ACDSPL
END
DESCRIPTION
1
Remove the Split data.
1
Figure 7-2 Assigning and Removing ACD Split Data
CHAPTER 7
Page 388
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDLOG: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD RECEIVER ID CODE
ACDLOG: Assignment of ACD Receiver ID Code
1. Function
This command is used to assign, list, print, and remove logon data. Each agent logon identifies the user’s
tenant, name, language preference, and personal Pilot number information, as well as the splits (with the
associated priority level) the Logon ID is allowed to access, whether multisplit is allowed, and the personal
assist and emergency numbers.
Agent Logon
Logon
Tenant Number:
Logon ID:Language:
Abbr. Name
Remove
List
Agent Name:
Close
Personal Queuing
Pilot Number:
Any Split
# Split #/Name PreferenceAttrb.
1 1FPRC 40-1
Max Queue Depth:
1
Personal Forward CCV
Index:Step
:
????????
Personal Overflow CCV
Overflow Timeout:
Personal Numbers
Assist Request:
Index:Step
:
Emerg Request:
Remove Logon?
2. Precautions
1. Leading zeros are permitted in logon ID codes. A logon of 00127 is the same as 127.
3. An ID code may be used at only one position at any given time. Multiple logons with the same ID are
not permitted.
command) are used to specify the valid logon/position mode combinations. Valid modes are: ACDPSN
command for detailed information.
5. If using Abacus MIS, the logon ID cannot exceed four digits.
priority is used as the agent’s preference level. If not, the value is used as the priority for taking calls
terminated to multiple splits.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 389
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDLOG: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD RECEIVER ID CODE
3. Parameters
TENANT NUMBER:
LOGIN ID:
Tenant Number (1 to 10)
Consists of one to nine digits (1 to 999,999,999)
NAME:
(Optional) up to 14 characters
LANGUAGE:
English
Japanese
Spanish
Italian
French
German
SPLITS:
Available split to logon (1 - 250)
PRIORITY:
Priority for handling ACD calls in multiple splits/the agent’s preference
level (1 ~ 99)
Single/Multi
MULTI-SPLIT:
PERSONAL PILOT NUMBER: Valid personal pilot number (SPACE: feature not used)
Queue depth for personal pilot number (0 ~ 999)
PERSONAL FORWARD CCV: CCV index (1 - 900)
CCV step number (1 - 20)
PERSONAL OVERFLOW CCV: 0 ~ 9999 seconds; 0 = indefinite
CCV index (1 - 900)
CCV step number (1 - 20)
CHIME:
Off/First/All
PERSONALASSIST:
PERSONAL EMERG:
NAMES:
Individual assistance number or SPACE (SPACE: Functional not used)
Individual emergency number or SPACE (SPACE: Functional not used)
Abbreviated Name (Use all initials of the user.)
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282
Page 390
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDLOG: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD RECEIVER ID CODE
4. Assignment and Deletion Procedure
These flow diagrams show the procedure used to assign and delete ACD Agent Logon Data.
DESCRIPTION
START
Assign the agent logon ID code (range 1 to 999999999).
ACDLOG
END
1
1
DESCRIPTION
START
ACDLOG
END
1
1
Remove the ACD agent logon ID code.
Figure 7-3 Assigning and Removing ACD Agent Logon ID Code
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 391
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDPSN: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD POSITION DATA
ACDPSN: Assignment of ACD Position Data
1. Function
This command is used to assign, list, print, and remove ACD position data. Each position is identified by
the tenant it belongs to, the number of its ACD line and the PBX line it may have, and what split(s) the
position belongs to.
Position Data
ACD FPC40
Tenant Number:
Remove
List
Position Number:
Split Assignment:
Any Split
Line Numbers
ACD:
Close
PBX:
Allow Supervisor Tally-Ohs
Analog Agent Position
Remove Position?
2. Precautions
1. The terms supervisor and agent are used as a convention but are not differentiated by the ACD.
2. Any position may have a NIGHT key.
3. Removing positions removes them as ACD agents or supervisors. Positions still function as PBX lines
unless removed using ASDT (see NEAX2400 IMX Office Data Specifications).
4. If changing the Tenant Number, My Line number, or ACD line number with the ASDT/ASTN
commands (PBX), the position must first be deleted using theACDPSN command before changes using
the ASDT/ASTN commands may be made. See the procedure below:
STEP 1: Delete the ACDPSN data of ACD agent/supervisory position.
STEP 2: Change the number using ASDT or ALGSL/ALGSN
STEP 3: Assign the changed number and other data in the ACDPSN data.
the IMX System.
6. If an invalid PBX or ACD line number is programmed in ACDPSN, it may cause erroneous CW lamp
problems.
7. There should only be two lines on an ACD position (the My line and the ACD line). If other lines are
programmed on an ACD position, the MIS status may be incorrect.
8. Do not allow Call Pickup to ACD lines (may cause incorrect MIS status).
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282
Page 392
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDPSN: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD POSITION DATA
9. One of the following conditions must be met before using this command.
•
•
•
ACD line number and PBX line number are assigned using the ASDT command
ACD line number and PBX line number are assigned using the ALGSL command
ACD line number and PBX line number are assigned using the ALGSN command
Table 7-5 Programming Considerations
LOGON TO A SPECIFIC SPLIT
ACDLOG MULTI-SPLIT=NO
LOGON TO MULTIPLE SPLITS
MULTI-SPLIT=YES
(Multi logon)
Max. 16 split is
programmed in
ACDLOG
MULTI-SPLIT=NO
MULTI-SPLIT=YES
(Multi logon)
(Single logon)
Max. 16 split is
programmed in
ACDLOG
(Single logon)
Any is programmed
in ACDLOG
Any is programmed
in ACDLOG
ACDPSN
If Logon ID list
The Specified Split in If one of the splits on Not valid, WILL NOT
the list is allowed by ALLOW LOGON to
contains the Specified ACDPSN will be
Split in ACDPSN, the ALLOWED to Logon ACDPSN, ALL
SPLITS
the system.
Agent will be
ALLOWED to Logon
to the system.
to the system.
SPILITS ARE
SERVICED.
(SPECIFIED)
System prompts for a Not valid, WILL NOT Will Allow Logon to
Not valid, WILL NOT
ALLOW LOGON to
the system.
SPLIT
Split, from ACDLOG. ALLOW LOGON to
Agent must select one the system.
Split from the list.
the Splits allowed in
ACDLOG.
(ANY SPLITS)
3. Parameters
TENANT NUMBER:
Tenant Number (1 to 10)
Number of PBX Line (My Line)
Number of ACD Line [Virtual Line (maximum of five digits)]
Any or specified specific split
POSITION NUMBER:
ACD NUMBER:
SPLIT ASSIGNMENT:
Split Number (1 ~ 250)
(only used if SPLC=1)
ALLOW SUPERVISOR TALLY-OHS: Allow/Do Not Allow
ANALOG AGENT POSITION: No/Yes
Note: The List up program will scan both My-Line and ACD line positions within the range designated in the List
up command.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 393
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDPSN: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD POSITION DATA
4. Assignment and Deletion Procedure
These flow diagrams show the procedure used to assign and delete ACD Agent Position data.
DESCRIPTION
START
Assign the station numbers for the ACD line and the PBX
line.
ASDT
1
1
AKYD
2
3
2
3
Assign the key data for the ACD position.
Assign the position data.
ACDPSN
END
DESCRIPTION
START
ACDPSN
1
Delete the ACD position data.
1
AKYD
ASDT
END
2
3
2
3
Delete the key data.
Delete the PBX and ACD line from station data.
Figure 7-4 Assigning and Removing ACD Position Data
CHAPTER 7
Page 394
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDCCV: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD CCV DATA
ACDCCV: Assignment of ACD CCV Data
1. Function
This command is used to assign, list, print, and remove Call Control Vectors. A Call Control Vector is a list
of procedural instructions (or steps) for handling incoming ACD calls. The instructions defined by the Call
Control Vector are sentence-based and can be combined to form many different sequences. Call Control
Vectors provide the following functions for the ACD:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Queue a call to a particular split.
Pause for “n” seconds before continuing call processing.
Announcement made during call processing (PBX and IVR).
Hang up during call processing.
Transfer to a particular directory number.
Set a new priority or increase or decrease a call’s priority (new priority).
Conditionally queue an incoming call to a particular split.
Remove a call from a split’s queue (dequeuing).
Queue to another split if the queue depth is full.
Goto another CCV index step.
Change priority of call at given point in the CCV.
Skip a percentage of the calls going to the next step in the CCV.
Conditionally perform next CCV instruction based on Estimated Time to Answer (ETA) of a call.
Conditionally perform next CCV instruction basedon ETA of a call in another split.*
Individual IVR port number.*
Delay the time for ringing start.*
* Available since the PBX software Series 7400 and the ACD software R3.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 395
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDCCV: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD CCV DATA
Call Control Vectors
Tenant Number:
CCV Index:
Remove
List
Call Control Vectors:
Transfer Numbers
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
CCV Action
Argument
1
Close
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Remove Logon?
2. Precautions
1. GOTO steps should be used with caution to avoid programming an infinite loop.
2. When a call rings at an Agent’s position, the call will not continue through the CCV steps because the
call is considered complete.
3. Maximum number of splits which an incoming ACD call can be queued to (accomplished by any
combination of QUEUE TO and COND. QUEUE steps) is four/sixteen (before/after the PBX software
Series 7400 and ACD software R3).
4. A CCV can be used to define how an incoming call is handled at any time by programming the ACD
Week Schedule (ACDWS) and/or the ACD Holiday Schedule (ACDHS) commands.
5. It is recommended that the PAUSE step be programmed after an ANNOUNCEMENT step, and that
PAUSE be programmed at least as long as ANNOUNCEMENT.
6. The same CCV number cannot be assigned to multiple ACD tenant numbers.
7. The call is controlled by the CCV by programming multiple PAUSE steps. However, the total time of
multiple PAUSE steps should not exceed 999 seconds in a CCV.
CAUTION
Changing a CCV while calls are in progress creates unpredictable results. CCV changes should be
made during low traffic periods. Alternatively, a new CCV can be created first and the pilot number
can be changed to route to the new CCV.
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282
Page 396
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDCCV: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD CCV DATA
3. Parameters
ACDCCV
TENANT NUMBER:
1 ~ 10
CCV INDEX:
CCV STEP:
1 ~ 900
1 ~ 20
CCV ACTION:
ARGUMENT:
TRANSFER NUMBER: Each represents a PBX number with a maximum of 22 digits.
Table 7-6 CCV Parameters
ACTION
ARGUMENT
Remarks
Vacant for future use
0
1
Blank
Pause
–
1-999 sec.
Waiting time before the next step
Announcement
Announce No. (1-58)
Delay Announcement/Announcement
service in Night mode/Announcement
service on holidays, etc.
2
3
4
GoTo CCV
Hang up
CCV INDEX and STEP
–
For repeated use
Forced to release
Transfer to PBX
Transfer Index Number (1 ~ 10) Ex. Dialed number of destination station in
the night mode
5
6
7
8
New Priority
Queue number (1-250)
Change the calls Priority
Conditional Queue
Dequeue From
Split number (1-250)
Split number (1-250)
Split number of destination Note 1
Dequeued from the originally called split
Note 2
9
10 Queue to Split
11 End CCV
Split number (1-250)
–
Will connect if Agent is available
CCV is finished
If Not Queued
12
CCV Index and Step Number or When split queue is full, jump to the
Busy
designate CCV no. or 0=Busy
Skip
13
Percent to skip (1-99)
The next step is skipped at the rate of
designated percentage
14 IVR announcement
Announcement No. (1-99)
IVR announcement
ETA less
15
ETA threshold value (1-9999)
When ETA value is less than the
predetermined threshold value, shift to the
next step
ETA greater
16
ETA threshold value (1-9999)
When ETA value is over the predetermined
threshold value, shift to the next step
Ring Delay
17
Delayed time to ringing (0-15
sec.)
See “RING DELAY [R-145]”.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 397
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDCCV: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD CCV DATA
Table 7-6 CCV Parameters
ACTION
18 Tally Short
ARGUMENT
Remarks
Tally No. Up to four digits
Tally No. Up to eight digit
This step will sendTally to MIS.
This step will sendTally to MIS.
19 Tally Long
IVRDN
20
IVR Access number (maximum. * This step must be assigned before IVR
5 digits) announcement.
Split ETA less
21
“SPLIT” [Split number for ETA When ETA value is less than the
call processing (1 ~ 127)] and predetermined threshold value and in the
“ETA” [ETA threshold value in a predetermined split, shift to the next step.
specified split (1 ~ 511)] to be
programmed Split ETA less)
Split ETA greater
22
“SPLIT” [Split number for ETA When ETA value is greater than the
call processing (1 ~ 127)] and
predetermined threshold value and in the
“ETA” [ETA threshold value in a predetermined split, shift to the next step.
specified split (1 ~ 511)] to be
programmed Split ETA greater)
23 Up Priority
A variable number
Increase the Calls Priority by this amount.
Note 1: For details of each parameter’s meaning, see Call Control Vector - ACD [C-108A] in Chapter 5.
Note 2: Valid for Overflow service.
CHAPTER 7
Page 398
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDCCV: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD CCV DATA
4. Assignment and Deletion Procedure
These flow diagrams show the procedure used to assign and delete Call ControlVectors.
DESCRIPTION
START
Assign data for announcement trunks referenced by the CCV.
Assign station data for any station referenced by the CCV.
1
2
3
1
2
3
AADT/AADTN
ASDT
Assign a pilot number to go to the CCV or to a Week Schedule
that references the CCV.
ACDPLT
ACDSPL
Assign data for any splits referenced by the CCV.
Assign the CCV.
4
5
4
5
ACDCCV
END
Some of these may not need to be deleted if being
used by other Splits, CCV, etc.
WARNING:
START
Remove the CCV.
ACDCCV
1
2
3
1
Remove the split(s) referenced by the CCV.
ACDSPL
ACDPLT
2
3
Remove the pilot number(s) that go to the CCV or to a Week
Schedule that references the CCV.
Remove the station data for any station referenced by the CCV.
4
5
ASDT
4
5
Remove the data for any announcement trunks referenced
by the CCV.
AADT/AADTN
END
Figure 7-5 Assigning and Removing Call Control Vectors
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 399
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDPLT: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD MONITOR NUMBER
ACDPLT: Assignment of ACD Monitor Number
1. Function
This command is used to assign, list, print, and remove ACD pilot data. This consists of a pilot number that
designates the pilot to which ACD calls are routed and the Call Control Vector call processing path to be
taken. Internal and Transfer Priorities can be designated as well as an optional pilot name.
Pilot Data
Pilot
Remove
Tenant Number:
1 ACD FPC40
Route to
Pilot Num: Name:
4399
List
Alternate Night CCV
Close
Method:
Index Step
Index
0
Step
0
Call Control Vector
Priority
1
:
:
1
Internal:
15
Trunk:
Transfer: 15
15
Remove Pilot?
2. Precautions
1. A Call Control Vector is a list of instructions describing the procedure to be used in handling an
individual call. Call processing steps are determined by the pilot number. Pilot numbers associate the
call processing procedure with a Call ControlVector. Additional information about CCV programming
can be found under ACDCCV.
2. Pilot numbers should be assigned as monitored numbers (see AMNO or AMNON in this chapter).
3. Different pilot numbers can route to the same CCV or Week Schedule and use different priorities.
4. If an invalid pilot number is assigned, it may cause the Call Recover feature not to work.
5. For a maximum number of pilots in a ACD system, see Section 2.3.1, “System Capacity” in Chapter 2.
Note 1: Pilot Number is the same number programmed in AMNO or AMNON.
Note 2: Personal Pilot Numbers are not programmed in ADCPLT.
CHAPTER 7
Page 400
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDPLT: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD MONITOR NUMBER
3. Parameters
TENANT NUMBER:
Tenant Number (1 to 10)
PILOT NUMBER:
NAME:
ROUTE TO:
ROUTE TO:
The number used for the pilot in ACD call routing
Pilot Name, up to 20 characters.
Week Schedule (1-10)
CCV index number (1-900)
CCV step number (1-20)
ALTERNATE NIGHT CCV: Night CCV Index and Step Number
PRIORITY
TRUNK:
Priority at which ACD trunk calls are queued (1 to 250).
INTERNAL:
TRANSFERRED:
Priority with which internal calls are queued (1 to 250).
Priority at which transferred calls are queued (1 to 250).
4. Assignment and Deletion Procedure
These flow diagrams show the procedure used to assign and delete ACD pilot data.
DESCRIPTION
START
Assign the monitored number.
1
2
AMNO
ACDPLT
END
1
2
Assign the pilot number.
DESCRIPTION
START
Delete the pilot number.
1
1
2
ACDPLT
2
Delete the pilot number from the monitored number table.
AMNO
END
Figure 7-6 Assigning and Removing ACD Pilot Data
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 401
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDTG: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD TRUNK GROUP DATA
ACDTG: Assignment of ACD Trunk Group Data
1. Function
This command is used to assign, list, print, and remove ACD trunk group data. This data includes queue
priority, circuit quantity, and an optional trunk group name.
Trunk Group Data
Trunk Group
Tenant Number:
Update
1
1
1 ACD FPC40
Trunk Group:
Priority:
Name
List
1 - 70
<
2
>
10
Close
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
21
31
41
51
61
12
22
32
42
52
62
13
23
33
43
53
63
14
24
34
44
54
64
15
25
35
45
55
65
16
26
36
46
56
66
17
27
37
47
57
67
18
28
38
48
58
68
19
29
39
49
59
69
20
30
40
50
60
70
New Trunk Group
2. Precautions
1. If ACD circuits are not assigned, they will not report to the MIS.
2. Queue Priority for ACD trunk is programmed in ACDTG.
3. Parameters
TENANT NUMBER: Tenant Number (1 ~ 10) 0: indicates all tenants
TRUNK GROUP:
NAME:
Trunk Group Number (Rt. Number) (1 to 254)
Trunk Group (Rt.) Name (optional, up to 20 characters).
Only 12 will show on ACD position.
Priority (1 to 250)
PRIORITY:
TRK:
Trunk Numbers (1 ~ 255)
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282
Page 402
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDTG: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD TRUNK GROUP DATA
4. Assignment and Deletion Procedure
These flow diagrams show the procedure used to assign and delete ACD trunk group data.
DESCRIPTION
START
1
Assign the trunks as ACD circuits.
ACDTG
END
1
DESCRIPTION
START
1
1
ACDTG
END
Remove the trunk group data.
Figure 7-7 Assigning and Removing ACD Trunk Group Data
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 403
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDANA: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD ANALOG SPLIT ACCESS CODE
ACDANA: Assignment of ACD Analog Split Access Code
1. Function
This command is used to assign, list, print, and remove ACD Analog Agent access code data. These access
codes enable agents using analog phones to perform many ACD features including logging on (with or
without an ID), logging off, going into Ready,Work, and Break modes, entering tally codes, and reporting
trunk troubles.
Analog Agent Data
Access Code
Logon ID
Feature
Logon Without ID
Update
List
Tally Code
Announcement
Success
Close
Break Type
New Analog
Failure
2. Precautions
Analog access codes must be set up on the PBX as monitored numbers (see AMNO or AMNON in this
manual).
3. Parameters
ACCESS CODE: The dialed digit pattern used to invoke an ACD function.
FEATURE:
The ACD feature which this access code will provide. (1-13)
Logon With ID
Logon Without ID
Logoff
Ready Mode
Work Mode
Break Mode
Tally Code
Trunk Trouble
Day Mode Single
Day Mode All
Night Mode Single
Night Mode All
Permanent Work
LOGIN ID:
The logon ID associated with an analog access code
(only used for LOGON WITH ID).
The tally code associated with an analog access code
(only used for TALLY CODE).
TALLY CODE:
BREAK TYPE: The break type associated with an analog access code
(only used for BREAK MODE).
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282
Page 404
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDANA: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD ANALOG SPLIT ACCESS CODE
ANNOUNCEMENT
SUCCESS:
Success Announcement or Tone
0 = Service Set Tone*
1~58 = Announcement No. programmed in AADT. An agent will be connected to the
announcement upon successful operation.
FAILURE:
Failure Announcement or Tone
0 = Reorder Tone*
1~58 = Announcement No. programmed in AADT. An agent will be connected to the
announcement upon failed operation.
Note: Valid since PBX software Series 7400 and ACD software R3.
Note: * or # are not available for access codes.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 405
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDIVR: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD IVR DATA
ACDIVR: Assignment of ACD IVR Data
1. Function
This command is used to assign, list, print, and remove ACD Interactive Voice Response Unit (IVR) data.
This command sets up IVR ports which will be used to play customized announcements or obtain dialed
digit information from callers.
IVR Data
Directory
Number
Update
Close
List
Tenant
Port
2. Precautions
IVR should be set up on the PBX as members of a UCD hunt group whose pilot number is the same as the
IVR pilot number field of ACD tenant data (see ACDTN).
3. Parameters
TENANT:
Tenant number (1 to 10)
DIRECTORY NUMBER: The PBX directory number used to access an IVR port.
PORT:
The IVR port number associated with this directory number. (1-255)
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282
Page 406
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDIVR: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD IVR DATA
ACD IVR Integration Data Programming Sheet
IVR Port
Number
(PORT)
1 ~ 255
Tenant Number IVR Directory Number
(TN)
(IVR)
Remarks
1 ~ 10
Up to 5
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 407
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDHS: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD HOLIDAY SCHEDULE
ACDHS: Assignment of ACD Holiday Schedule
1. Function
This command is used to assign, list, print, and remove the CCVs for holiday schedules. Up to three
different holiday schedules per tenant can be programmed for handling incoming calls. When a holiday is
designated through the ACDHC command, calls are processed according to one of the three schedules for
that day. This only applies to Pilot Numbers that use time-of-week scheduling.
Holiday Schedules
Tenant Number
1 ACD FPC40
Update
Schedule
1
List
Start TimeCCV Index CCV Step
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
Close
New Holiday Schedule
2. Precautions
Holiday schedules are only valid for pilot numbers using week schedule route.
3. Parameters
TENANT NUMBER: Tenant Number (1 to 10)
SCHEDULE:
START TIME
HOUR:
MINUTE:
CCV INDEX:
CCV STEP:
Schedule Number (1 to 3)
CCV start hour (0-23)
CCV start minute (0-59)
CCV index (1 to 900)
CCV step (1 to 20)
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282
Page 408
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDHS: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD HOLIDAY SCHEDULE
4. Assignment and Deletion Procedure
These flow diagrams show the procedure used to assign and delete ACD Holiday Schedule data.
START
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
1
2
3
ACDWS
Assign the Week Schedule.
Assign the Holiday Schedule.
ACDHS
ACDHC
Assign the Holiday Calendar data (schedule plus holiday)
END
START
DESCRIPTION
ACDHS
END
1
1
Remove the Holiday Schedule data.
Figure 7-8 Assigning and Removing Holiday Schedule Information
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 409
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDHS: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD HOLIDAY SCHEDULE
ACD Tenant
(TN)
1 ~ 10
CCV Start time
Schedule Number
CCV Index
1 ~ 900
CCV Step
1 ~ 20
(HOUR)
0 ~ 23
(MINUTE)
0 ~ 59
1 ~ 3
1
2
3
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282
Page 410
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDHC: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD HOLIDAY CALENDAR
ACDHC: Assignment of ACD Holiday Calendar
1. Function
This command is used to assign, list, print, and remove Holiday Calendar information. The ACDHC
command specifies days that calls are processed differently than on normal workdays (provided a Holiday
Schedule is programmed). A Holiday Schedule only applies to pilot numbers that are using a Week
Schedule (ACDPLT). Holiday information includes a month and day entry and a number that refers to the
Holiday Schedule to be used on that day. An unlimited number of days may be scheduled as holidays, and
up to three different holiday schedules per tenant can be programmed. Holidays can be programmed up to
one calendar year in advance.
Holiday Schedules
Tenant Number
1 ACD FPC40
Update
Schedule
1
List
January 2000
<
>
Close
Sun
26
Mon
27
Tue
28
Wed
29
Thu
30
Fri Sat
31
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
17
24
31
11
18
25
1
12
19
26
2
13
20
27
3
14
21
28
4
15
22
29
5
16
23
30
Remove Holiday Calendar?
2. Precautions
1. Holidays can be entered for any day of the year.
2. A separate Holiday Calendar is available for each tenant.
3. Parameters
TENANT NUMBER: Tenant Number (1-10)
MONTH:
DAY:
Month (1-12)
Day (1-31)
SCHEDULE:
Schedule Number (1-3)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 411
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDHC: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD HOLIDAY CALENDAR
4. Assignment and Deletion Procedure
These flow diagrams show the procedure used to assign and delete ACD Holiday Calendar data.
DESCRIPTION
START
1
2
3
ACDWS
1
2
3
Assign the Week Schedule.
Assign the Holiday Schedule.
Assign the Holiday Calendar.
ACDHS
ACDHC
END
START
DESCRIPTION
Remove the Holiday Calendar.
1
1
ACDHC
END
Figure 7-9 Assigning and Removing Holiday Calendar Information
CHAPTER 7
Page 412
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDHC: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD HOLIDAY CALENDAR
ACD Holiday Calendar Data Programming Sheet
Month and Day
(MONTH)
ACD Tenant
(TN)
Schedule
1 ~ 3
DAY
1 ~ 10
1 ~ 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 413
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDWS: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD WEEK SCHEDULE
ACDWS: Assignment of ACD Week Schedule
1. Function
This command is used to assign, list, print and remove week schedule data. The ACDWS command is used
to program the CCV by which all incoming calls are handled on a 24-hour basis.
Week Schedules
Tenant Number
Schedule
ACD FPC40
Update
List
CCV
CCV
Day
Time
00.00 0
Index
Step
Close
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
00.00 0
00.00 0
00.00 0
00.00 0
00.00 0
00.00 0
00.00 0
00.00 0
00.00 0
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
New Week Schedule
2. Precautions
1. CCVs should be assigned prior to use in week schedules.
3. The same Schedule Number (SCH) can not be assigned to multiple tenant numbers.
3. Parameters
TENANT NUMBER: Tenant Number (1 to 10)
SCHEDULE:
DAY:
HOUR:
MINUTE:
CCV INDEX:
CCV STEP:
Schedule Number (1 to 250)
Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat
CCV start time: hour (0-23)
CCV start time: minute (0-59)
CCV index (1 to 900)
CCV step (1 to 20)
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282
Page 414
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDWS: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD WEEK SCHEDULE
4. Assignment and Deletion Procedure
These flow diagrams show the procedure used to assign and delete Week Schedule data.
START
DESCRIPTION
Assign the pilot number to be routed to a Week Schedule.
1
2
3
1
2
3
ACDPLT
ACDCCV
Assign the CCV data for call processing.
Access Week Schedule data for call processing.
ACDWS
END
START
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
1
Delete the Week Schedule data for call processing.
Delete the related CCVs.
ACDWS
2
3
ACDCCV
Delete the pilot number or change from routing to
Week Schedule to a CCV.
ACDPLT
END
Figure 7-10 Assigning and Removing Week Schedule Information
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 415
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDWS: ASSIGNMENT OF ACD WEEK SCHEDULE
ACD Week Schedule Data Programming Sheet
Tenant Number (TN) 1 ~ 10
Schedule Number (SCH) 1 ~ 10
Monday (MON)
Tuesday (TUE)
Wednesday (WED)
Thursday (THU)
Friday (FRI)
Day of week
(WEEK)
Saturday (SAT)
Sunday (SUN)
CCV start time (TIME)
CCV index 1 ~ 900
CCV step 1 ~ 20
CHAPTER 7
Page 416
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACDCOM: ACD COMMUNICATIONS DATA
ACDCOM: ACD Communications Data
1. Function
This command is used to set up the I/O ports that are to be used for the Management Information Service(s)
(MIS) and for Infolink.
Communication Data
Trace Parameters
Call Process-
I/O Ports
Type Speed
Update
Close
List
1
2
3
4
5
6
ing
MIS Errors
Trace Destination
Buffer I/O Port
Clock Adjustment
Update Communication?
2. Parameters
I/O Ports:
I/O Type:
I/O Speed:
1 to 6
MIS-1, MIS-2, MIS-3, MIS-4, MIS-5, Infolink, and OFF
4-64 ms (standard assignment = 64)
Trace Parameters:
Call Processing: On/Off
(Normally set to “OFF”)
MIS Errors: On/Off
X409 Messages: On/Off
Trace Destination: I/O Port Number (1 to 6) / Buffer (Normally set to “Buffer”)
Clock Adjustment: 1 to 9999 (default 1049)
3. Programming
The type of MIS will determine how the I/O ports are programmed.
•
•
•
•
MIS-1:
not supported
MIS-2:
Navigator and Abacus MIS
reserved for future use
MIS-3 ~ MIS-5:
Infolink:
for Infolink clients (ACD Release 3 and above)
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 417
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM INFORMATION
System Information
This screen sets the parameters for optimal functioning of the ACD in the IMX System. From the System Data
screen, User Settings, Tenant Settings and Time Out Settings are established. Using the system defaults for User
and Time Out Settings is highly recommended.
User Settings
1. Function
This command maintains the ACD’s system data for User Data. This data provides the ability to customize
the ACD for some specific features including Infolink and MIS message generation, debugging tools, and
phone set operation.
Note: Using the system defaults for User Settings is highly recommended. Information on this screen should only
be modified at the direction of a NEC Technical Support Associate.
System Data
Update
Time Out Settings
Dash
User Settings
CCV Tally DN:
Tenant Settings
List
Send AO (MIS) Msg:
Min Len:
Index 1:
Index 2:
Index 3:
Index 4:
Index 5:
7
5
8
11
0
Close
Display ’ANI NONE’:
Queue High Priority:
Display IVR Header:
ETA Includes Excess Work:
Infolink with Call ID:
Call Timeout Audit:
Orig Detail Codes:
0
IQ
Incoming Cell Msg:
IZ
Outbound Cell Disp:
Reclaim IVR Call to:
Music
Ready Mo
Work Key Press:
4
MIS Split Capacity:
Trim CP Trace Space:
Large CP Trace Buffer:
User Infolink Split Information:
Update System Data?
2. Parameters
CCV Tally DN:
1-5 digits
Send A0 (MIS) Msg:
Display ‘ANI NONE’:
Queue High Priority:
Display IVR Header:
ETA Includes Excess Work:
Infolink with Call ID:
Time Out Audit:
Yes/No
Yes/No
Yes/No
Yes/No
Yes/No
On/Off (Default = Off)
Yes/No
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282
Page 418
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM INFORMATION
Orig Detail Codes:
Trim CP Trace Space:
Large CP Trace Buffer:
Yes/No (Default = No)
Yes/No (Default = No)
Yes/No (Default = Off)
Dash
Min Len:
Index 1 ~ 5:
1 to 16 (Default = 7)
0 to 11
Incoming Call Msg:
Outbound Call Disp:
Reclaim IVR Call to:
Work Key Press:
MIS Split Capacity:
Use Infolink Split Information:
IQ or Iq
IZ or Iz
Music/Ring Back
Ready Mode/Disable Timer
4/16 (Default = 4)
No/Yes
Tenant Settings
1. Function
This command maintains the ACD’s system data tenant table. If the system is required to accept calls from
trunks/stations beyond the ACDTN range (1-10), this command allows the user to program these tenants.
Note that if this table is used, all tenants from which ACD calls might originate (including tenants 1-10)
must be programmed. As all ACD entities (splits, positions, etc.) must still reside in tenants 1-10, ACDTN
must still be programmed to provide the necessary tenant information.
System Data
User Settings Tenant Settings Time Out Settings
Update
List
System Tenants 1 ~ 60
<
>
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Close
11
21
31
41
51
12
22
32
42
52
13
23
33
43
53
14
24
34
44
54
15
25
35
45
55
16
26
36
46
56
17
27
37
47
57
18
28
38
48
58
19
29
39
49
59
20
30
40
50
60
Update System Data?
2. Parameters
System Tenants: Highlight the number of the tenant to be updated, and select the Update option.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 419
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM INFORMATION
Time Out Settings
1. Function
This command maintains the ACD’s system data for time out information. It allows custom programming
of some timers used by the ACD. This data is critical to the operation of the ACD and should be modified
with extreme caution.
Note: Using the system defaults for Time Out Settings is highly recommended. Information on this screen should
only be modified at the direction of a NEC Technical Support Associate.
System Data
Update
List
Time Out Settings
User Settings
Tenant Settings
Agent Busy Loop Time:
IVR Reclaim Retry Time:
10
5
Emergency Retry Time:
5
7
Call Complete Delay:
Close
IVR Maximum Ring Time:
Wait Time
20
Announcement:
Force Release:
Monitor:
4
7
7
Called Release:
Call Complete:
Call Monitor 1:
Call Monitor 2:
Connect Call:
10
7
OAI Release:
IVR Reclaim Call:
Call Recover:
Status Check:
7
4
7
7
7
7
7
Connect Error Audit:
10
Update System Data?
Agent Busy Loop Time:
IVR Reclaim Retry Time:
IVR Maximum Ring Time:
Emergency Retry Time:
Call Complete Delay:
5 to 15
3 to 10
5 to 40
3 to 10
3 to 15
Wait Time
Announcement:
Called Release:
Call Complete:
Call Monitor:
Call Monitor 1:
Call Monitor 2:
Connect Call:
Connect Error Audit:
Force Release:
2 to 10
3 to 15
3 to 15
2 to 10
3 to 15
3 to 15
3 to 15
5 to 15
3 to 15
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282
Page 420
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM INFORMATION
Monitor:
5 to 15
3 to 15
3 to 15
3 to 15
3 to 15
OAI Release:
IVR Reclaim Call:
Call Recover:
Status Check:
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 421
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD BACKUP
ACD Backup
1. Function
This function provides the ability to save/restore the entire ACD database. The ACD database should be
backed up frequently.
2. For External ACD
To back up the External ACD, use the Database Backup/Restore screen accessed using the ACD MAT
Screen.
Database Backup/Restore
Operation
List
08:54AM
BACKUP
RESTORE
EXAMINE
VERIFY
12/29/99
Close
Database File
Directory PathName
Browse...
ACD4LD2
\
.
Comments
Comparison
File
DATE
TIME
VERSION
SWITCH NAME
ACD
Note: This screen is used for External ACD only.For Internal ACD, use the IMX MEM_HDD screen.
Parameters
Disk Drive:
Extension:
Comment:
A to F. Normally the A drive is used for ACDBU.
File Extension (Normally LMF)
Comment (optional); 60 character maximum
Programming
None
When saving the ACD database using a floppy drive (A to F), the diskette must be previously formatted.
3. For Internal ACD
To back up the Internal ACD, use the MEM_HDD screen accessed from the IMX folder.
CHAPTER 7
NDA-24282
Page 422
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD BACKUP
MEM_HDD Houseswitch
File View Help
MEM_HDD (Data control between Memory and HDD)
Start
Direction Select
Memory to Hard Disk
Data Type Select
Data Memory
Hard Disk to Memory
Name Display
Verify HDD against MEM
Wireless Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
LP Select
Auto Verify Afterward
Speed Calling
LP Select
Close
User Assign Key
LP Select
Number Sharing
LP Select
ACD Data Memory
●
Call Back
LP Select
Processing Status Log
A c tion / In form a tion
IN IT S E S S IO N
D ire ction
D ata T y pe
Note: This screen is used for Internal ACD only.For External ACD, use the Database Backup/Restore screen.
Parameters
Select the following parameters and choose the Start option.
Memory to Hard Disk
ACD Data Memory
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 7
Page 423
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is for your notes.
CHAPTER 7
Page 424
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 8
1. GENERAL
SYSTEM OPERATIONS
This chapter explains the operating methods of the NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System.
term
•
Operation of D
Log On/Log Off
Answer Mode
Work Mode
agent position/supervisory position
Break Mode
Tally Count
Trunk Trouble Report
Call Transfer
Night Service
Assistance
Emergency/Recorder
Monitoring/Supervisory Override
•
ACD system restart processing
For operation management, refer to the NEAX2400 IMX System Operations and Maintenance Manual.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 8
Page 425
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM OPERATIONS
2. OPERATION OF D
TERM
AGENT POSITION/SUPERVISORY POSITION
2.1 LOG ON/LOG OFF
Use the following procedures to start or end work by logging on or off.
(a) When ID Code is Required
START
Log On (Start of work)
When VACANT is displayed, press the LOG ON/OFF key.
The lamp illuminates and LOG ON ID? is displayed.
Enter the ID code of the agent and press the # key.
The dialed digits are displayed.
HELLO XXXX (Agent Name) is displayed.
The split name is displayed, then AUTO ANSWER or MAN ANSWER is displayed according
to the program mode of the split to which the agent belongs, and WORK MODE is displayed.
Press the WORK key.
READY is displayed.
Log Off (End of work)
Press the LOG ON/OFF key.
The lamp goes out, the previous display disappears, and the following messages are displayed.
(a) GOOD BYE XXXX (Agent Name: NAME in ACDLOG)
(b) SHIFT 08:02:37 (The time since Log on in hours, minutes and seconds)
(c) ACD CALLS 209 (The number of incoming calls handled)
(d) AVG TALK 01:42.6 (The average time spent with each call in minutes, seconds and tenths
of a second)
(e) T-WORK 01:23:45 (The cumulative amount of time spent in Work Mode during the shift in
hours, minutes and seconds)
(f) T-BREAK 01:02:03 (The cumulative amount of time spent in Break Mode during the shift
in hours, minutes and seconds)
The display returns to VACANT.
END
CHAPTER 8
Page 426
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM OPERATIONS
(b) When ID Code is not Required
START
Log On (Start of work)
When VACANT is displayed, press the LOG ON/OFF key.
The lamp illuminates and HELLO is displayed.
The split name is displayed, then, AUTO ANSWER or MAN ANSWER is displayed according
to the program mode of the split to which the agent belongs, and WORK MODE is displayed.
Press the WORK key.
READY is displayed.
Log Off (End of work)
Press the LOG ON/OFF key.
The lamp goes out, the previous display disappears, and the following messages are displayed.
(a) GOOD BYE
(b) SHIFT 08:02:37 (The time since Log on in hours, minutes and seconds)
(c) ACD CALLS 209 (The number of incoming calls handled)
(d) AVG TALK 01:42.6 (The average time spent with each call in minutes, seconds and tenths
of a second)
(e) T-WORK 01:23:45 (The cumulative amount of time spent in Work Mode during the shift in
hours, minutes and seconds)
(f) T-BREAK 01:02:03 (The cumulative amount of time spent in Break Mode during the shift
in hours, minutes and seconds)
The display returns to VACANT.
END
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 8
Page 427
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM OPERATIONS
2.2 ANSWER MODE
The following procedures are used to set the ACD call answering mode of each agent position to automatic or
manual.
(a) ACD Call Automatic Answer Mode
START
From the manual answer mode, press the AUTO/MAN key.
The lamp lights and AUTO ANSWER is displayed.
The agent enters the ACD call automatic answer mode.
When an ACD call comes in, a zip tone is received.
Monitor number name/Split name/Trunk group name, waiting time in the queue, and calling
party’s number, etc. is displayed and the time to be spent for the conversation is indicated.
When the call is over, press the RELEASE key.
END
(b) ACD Call Manual Answer Mode
START
From the automatic answer mode, press the AUTO/MAN key.
The lamp goes out and MANUAL ANSWER is displayed.
The agent enters the ACD call manual answer mode.
When an incoming ACD call is terminated, press the ACD CALL key to answer it.
Monitor number name/Split name/Trunk Group name, waiting time in the queue, and calling
party’s number, etc. is displayed and the time to be spent for the conversation is displayed.
When the call is over, press the RELEASE key.
END
CHAPTER 8
Page 428
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM OPERATIONS
2.3 WORK MODE
(a) Work mode manual setting
Use the following procedure to enterWork mode when the contents of the ACD call requires it.
START
Press the WORK key during communication with an ACD call.
The lamp lights up and WORK PENDING is displayed.
Press the RELEASE key.
WORK MODE is displayed, indicating the Work mode.
(End of work)
Press the WORK key.
The lamp goes off and READY is displayed.
Work mode ends, and the position becomes available for receiving the next ACD call.
END
(b) Work mode automatic setting
Use the following procedure if it is required to activate theWork mode automatically after everyACD
call.
START
Press the RELEASE key during communication with an ACD call.
An incoming ACD call is completed.
WORK MODE is displayed, indicating the Work mode.
(End of work)
Press the WORK key.
The lamp goes off and READY is displayed.
Work mode ends, and the position becomes available for receiving the next ACD call.
END
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 8
Page 429
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM OPERATIONS
2.4 BREAK MODE
When it is required to leave the position unattended for a lunch or similar break, use the following procedure to
activate the Break mode in which the ACD call handling services can be interrupted temporarily.
(a) Set/reset during Communication with ACD Call
START
On handling an ACD call, press the BREAK key.
The lamp lights and BREAK PENDING is displayed.
Press the RELEASE key.
ON BREAK is displayed, indicating Break mode.
(Break)
Press the BREAK key.
The lamp goes off, and ON BREAK OVER XX:XX (time spent on break in minutes and seconds)
is displayed. Note 1
Break mode ends, and the position becomes idle and available for receiving the next ACD call
(READY is displayed).
END
(b) Set/Reset when idle
START
Press the BREAK key.
The lamp lights and ON BREAK is displayed
(Break)
Press the BREAK key.
The lamp goes off, and BREAK OVER XX:XX (time spent on break in minutes and seconds) is
displayed. Note 1
Break mode ends, and the position becomes idle and available for receiving the next ACD call
(READY is displayed).
END
Note 1: The period of time in break mode is displayed for 99 minutes and 59 seconds. When 99 min. and 59 sec.
passes, the part of indicating “Minute” is displayed as “**”.
CHAPTER 8
Page 430
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM OPERATIONS
(c) Set/reset in Work Mode
START
Press the BREAK key.
The lamp lights and ON BREAK is displayed.
(Break)
Press the BREAK key.
The lamp goes off, and BREAK OVER XX:XX (time spent on break in minutes and second) is
displayed. Note 1
Break mode ends, and the position returns to theWork mode
(WORK MODE is displayed).
END
Note 1: The period of time in break mode is displayed for 99 minutes and 59 seconds. When 99 min. and 59 sec.
passes, the part of indicating “Minute” is displayed as “**”.
2.5 TALLY COUNT
Use the following procedure to collect data on the communication contents according to the types.
START
Press the TALLY key.
The lamp lights and TALLY NUMBER? is displayed.
Dial the code number (1 to 9) of the subject, and press the# key.
TALLY ENTERED is displayed.
The lamp goes off, and the data is stored in the MIS.
END
2.6 TRUNK TROUBLE REPORT
Use the following procedure to report trunk troubles, such as noise or low level, in the NEAX2400 IMX.
START
During communication with an ACD call, press the TRK TRBL key.
TROUBLE REPORTED is displayed.
The Trunk Trouble Report is automatically reported to the MIS and MAT.
END
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 8
Page 431
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM OPERATIONS
2.7 CALL TRANSFER
Use the following procedure to transfer an ACD call to another split.
START
Press the XFER key.
Special Dial Tone (SPDT) is heard.
term
term
XFR (D
Series III) or XFR OPE (D
Series E) is displayed.
Dial the ACD monitoring number of the transfer destination split.
The call is immediately connected to one of the idle stations in the transfer destination split.
If all stations in the transfer destination split are busy, the transfer originator hears the Ring Back
Tone (RBT) and should wait for an answering agent or release the call to complete the transfer.
END
2.8 NIGHT SERVICE
When the shift is over, the supervisory position can perform the following procedure to switch the entire split
into the Night mode.
(a) From Day mode to Night mode
START
The supervisor presses the NIGHT key.
The lamp blinks, and ENTER NIGHT/FWD? is displayed.
Dial 1 followed by the # key.
The lamp lights, and the split is switched to Night mode.
New incoming calls are no longer queued, and calls which have already been queuing are
connected as soon as an agent position becomes idle.
END
(b) From Night mode to Day mode
START
The supervisor presses the NIGHT key.
The lamp blinks, and EXIT NIGHT? is displayed.
Dial 1 followed by the # key.
The lamp goes out, and the split is switched to Day mode.
END
CHAPTER 8
Page 432
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM OPERATIONS
2.9 ASSISTANCE
The agent position can request assistance from a supervisor during an ACD call.
START
The agent position presses the ASSIST key.
ASSIST XXXX (Supervisory position name for the position with ID code or the ACD line
number for the position without ID code) is displayed.
The supervisor answers the assistance call.
ASSIST XXXX (Agent position name for the position with ID code or the ACD line number for
the position without ID code) is displayed.
The supervisor and agent can confer while the ACD call is held with Consultation Hold.
END
2.10 EMERGENCY/RECORDER
The agent can notify the supervisory position of abnormal calls such as harassment and request monitoring. If
a recorder is provided, the conversation can also be recorded.
START
The agent presses the EMER key.
EMER XXXX (Supervisory name for the position with ID code or the ACD line number for the
position without ID code) is displayed.
If a recorder is provided, recording of the call starts at the same time.
The ACD CALL lamp and the MONITOR lamp on the supervisory position blink. When ringing
starts, the supervisory confirms the display of EMER XXXX (Agent name or ACD line number),
Trunk kind, Trunk number, and presses the LINEkey. Note
The monitoring can be terminated when the supervisor presses the RELEASE key.
The call between the ACD call and agent position continues.
The recording ends.
(When activating three-way conference, see 2.11 Monitoring/Supervisory Override)
END
Note: When the supervisor presses MON key while the agent is being monitored, “BARGE?” is displayed. At that
time, the supervisor may enter the conversation by pressing 1 + #.
NDA-24282
CHAPTER 8
Page 433
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM OPERATIONS
2.11 MONITORING/SUPERVISORY OVERRIDE
With the following procedure, the supervisory position can monitor a conversation between an agent position
and ACD caller at any time, and can join the call by overriding if required.
START
Monitoring
Place Supervisor into the “Work” mode.
Supervisory presses the MON/BARGE key.
The lamp blinks.
MONITOR NUMBER? is displayed.
Dial the ID code of the agent to be monitored, or dial 0 followed by the non-ACD call station
number of the agent position, and #.
(Monitoring)
Press MON/BARGE key again.
BARGE? is displayed.
Supervisory Override
Dial 1 and #.
The MON/BARGE lamp blinks.
(Three-way conference call between the ACD call, agent position and supervisory position).
Press the RELEASE or MON/BARGE key to end overriding.
“CONF” lamp goes off and Return to Monitoring.
END
3. ACD SYSTEM RESTART PROCESSING
Since the ACDP is incorporated in the NEAX2400 IMX, perform the restart procedure of the NEAX2400 IMX
referring to the “Installation Manual” or “System Operations and Maintenance Manual”.
CHAPTER 8
Page 434
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 9
1. GENERAL
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
This chapter explains the maintenance, diagnostics from system messages and fault recovery procedure
respectively of the NEAX2400 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise ACD System. If any fault has been discovered in
the course or as a result of maintenance operations, it should be diagnosed and repaired by referring to system
messages concerned and the fault recovery procedure.
2. MAINTENANCE
Daily Maintenance
System Messages for
ACDP and MIS
Routine Maintenance
3. SYSTEM MESSAGES
Message Detail Data
4. FAULT DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics from System Messages
5. FAULT RECOVERY PROCEDURE
MIS
(1) MIS Restart Processing
Figure 9-1 Flow of Maintenance Work
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 9
Page 435
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
2. MAINTENANCE
2.1 DAILY MAINTENANCE
The daily maintenance of the ACD System consists of the following checking.
Checking if the following system messages related to ACD system is displayed.
2.1.1 THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN SYSTEM MESSAGES AND LAMP INDICATIONS
When the system has detected a fault, the corresponding system message is given and simultaneously, the
related lamp on the TOPU illuminates.
Table 9-1 shows the relationship between system messages and lamp indications.
Table 9-1 System Messages and Lamp Indications on the TOPU
SYSTEM MESSAGE
NAME
LAMP ON THE TOPU
REMARKS
NO.
MJ
MN
SUP
NON
4-R TCP/IP Link Failure
5-Q ACD-MIS LOCK UP
6-H Bad Call Notification
26-V LAN Interface Error Report
×
×
×
×
CHAPTER 9
Page 436
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
3. SYSTEM MESSAGES
3.1 SYSTEM MESSAGES AND THEIR MEANINGS
The system messages shown in Table 9-2 is displayed when faults occur with the ACD within the IMX system.
This table shows the system messages and their meaning.
Table 9-2 System Messages for MIS
SYSTEM
MESSAGE
MEANING
FAULT CONTENTS
A fault has occurred to the UAP or to the line connected with the
external computer.
4-R
TCP/IP Link Failure
Abnormal occurrence, and the communication between ACDP and
MIS has locked up. (To be displayed when ASYD command, SYS 1,
INDEX 42, b2 = “1”.)
5-Q
ACD-MIS LOCK UP
Bad Call Notification
6-H
This message is issued to indicate the result of Bad Call Notification.
LAN Interface Error
Report
A fault, related to the TCP/IP connection between the PBX and MIS/
HOST, occurred.
26-V
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 9
Page 437
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
3.2 MESSAGE DETAIL DATA
This section describes the detailed information on the faults indicated by system messages (message detail data).
3.2.1 MESSAGE DETAIL DATA OF SYSTEM MESSAGE “4-R”
TCP/IP Link
re
System Message 4-R: TCP/IP Link Failure
1. Print-out Format
SYSTEM MESSAGE 4 - R
NEC - ESD
TCP/IP Link Failure
DEC 22 21:32
1: xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
2: xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
13
4
11
12
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
14
15
16
7
2. Print-out information (typical)
When the PBX software Series 7300 and the ACD software R1 or earlier software are installed
1
Fault port number:
0-5
2
3
Communication Protocol:
Error Code (ERR):
03 = ETHER + TCP/IP
Refer to the table below
CONTENT OF FAULT
2
3
PROTOCOL
ERROR CODE
01
TCP Connection disconnected (Normal) Note 1
Reception of a text which cannot be analyzed Note 2
Not used
02
03~09
10 (0A)
11 (0B)
12 (0C)
13 (0D)
14 (0E)
TCP Connection disconnected (on the way) Note 2
Transmission to PZ-PC19 (LANI) is disabled (Permanent) Note 2
Abnormal UAP is detected by Heart Beat function
Not used
03
(ETHER + TCP/IP)
TCP/IP Connection Error (B-level Infinite Loop, etc.)
15 (0F) ~ 255 (FF) Not used
Note 1: This error code shows that the Host (UAP) is down manually. The option not to output this detail message
at some offices can be programmed using SYS1, INDEX864, b1 in ASYDL (Messages other than ERR = 01
are output when TCP connection disconnected is not output).
Note 2: This data is output when using PBX software Series 7300 or earlier. If installing PBX software Series 7300
or later, this information is output in the system message “26-V”.
CHAPTER 9
Page 438
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
4
Fault logical channel number (LCID): 01~10H (00 means the data is invalid)
Relation between LCID and PBX TCP port number
LCID
TCP port number of the PBX
01
60030
When the PBX software Series 7300 and the ACD software R2 or the later software are installed
1
Fault port number:
0-5
2
3
Communication Protocol:
Error Code (ERR):
03 = ETHER + TCP/IP
Refer to the table below
2
3
PROTOCOL
ERROR CODE
01
CONTENT OF FAULT
03
TCP Connection disconnected (Normal) Note 1
12 (0C)
Abnormal UAP is detected by Heart Beat function
(ETHER + TCP/IP)
13 (0D) ~ 255 (FF) Not used
Note 1: This error code shows that the Host (UAP) is down manually. The option not to output this detail message at some
offices can be programmed using SYS1, INDEX864, b1 in ASYDL (Messages other than ERRK = 01 are output when
TCP connection disconnected is not output).
4
Fault logical channel number (LCID): 01~10H (00 means the data is invalid)
Relation between LCID and PBX TCP port number
LCID
TCP port number of the PBX
01
60030
5
8
~
IP address
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 9
Page 439
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
3.2.2 MESSAGE DETAIL DATA OF SYSTEM MESSAGE “5-Q”
:
ACD-MIS
K UP
System Message 5-Q: ACD-MIS LOCK UP
This message is output when the PBX software release 5 and the ACD software release 1 or the later software
are installed.
(1) Print-out Format
SYSTEM MESSAGE 5 - Q
NEC - ESD
ACD-MIS LOCK UP
MAY 11 22:30
1: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
(2) Print-out information (typical)
Each data is always displayed as “0”.
CHAPTER 9
NDA-24282 (E)
Page 440
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
3.2.3 MESSAGE DETAIL DATA OF SYSTEM MESSAGE “6-H”
Bad Call
fication
D)
System Message 6-H: Bad Call Notification (ACD)
1. Print-out Format
SYSTEM MESSAGE 6 - H
NEC - ESD
BAD CALL NOTIFICATION
AUG 14 17:00
1: xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
2: xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
12
4
10
13
16
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
11
14
15
7
2. Print-out information (typical)
1
Bad Call Notification
20=ACD trunk connection
ACD Trouble Kind
2
01=ACD trunk trouble key
14=ACD reset start
15=Insufficient ACD memory
16=Insufficient ACD call record
17=Excessive business station on ACD calls
18=Excessive calls queued
21=Unknown Pilot No. called
24=Illegal execution of ACD timeout procedure
30=ACD pointer error detection and recovery
33=ACDP reset completion
34=Call recovery failure on unknown Pilot No.
37=ACD Traffic (incoming) Capacity Over Note
99=Illegal ACD processing - trace stored
Note: Since the PBX software Series 7300 and the ACD software release 2.
2
[When
= 01 (Hex)]
Information on Calling Party
3
6
~
:
– Station
– Trunk
00 00
3
6
5
~
:
:
My Line No. (Station)
00
3
5
4
6
~
~
:
:
Route No.
Trunk No.
7
9
8
~
~
:
:
12
Information on Calling Party
– Station
11
9
~
:
:
Station No.
00
12
– Trunk
10
12
9
~
~
:
:
Route No.
Trunk No.
11
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 9
Page 441
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
13
16
~
:
Information on Held Party or 3rd Station/Trunk in 3-party connection
– Station
13
15
~
:
:
Station No.
00
16
– Trunk
13
15
14
16
~
~
:
:
Route No.
Trunk No.
2
2
[When
= 14 (Hex)]
3
:
:
Issue of ACDP (First digit of decimal place)
Issue of ACDP (Second digit of decimal place)
4
[When
=21 (Hex)]
3
6
~
:
Information on Calling Party
– Station
3
5
~
:
:
My Line No. (Station)
00
6
– Trunk
00 00
3
5
4
6
~
~
:
:
Route No.
Trunk No.
7
9
8
~
~
:
:
12
Information on Unknown Pilot No.
– Station:
11
9
~
:
:
Unknown Pilot No. called
00
12
2
2
[When
= 24 or 99 (Hex)]
00 00 00 00
Error Counter
3
6
~
~
:
:
7
8
[When
= 30 (Hex)]
3
7
8
6
~
:
:
:
Pointer Address
00
Error Kind
2
[When
= 33 (Hex)]
ACDP Data Memory:
3
:
00=Used
01=Not used
ACDP System Capacity: 02=50
4
:
Agent Positions
Agent Positions
Agent Positions
Agent Positions
04=200
07=500
12=900
15=2,000 Agent Positions
2
[When
= 34 (Hex)]
3
6
~
:
Information on Unknown Pilot No.
3
5
~
:
:
Unknown Pilot No. called
00
6
CHAPTER 9
Page 442
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
3. Bad Call Notification Codes.
Print code Tally-Oh Ref. No.
Description
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2099
Auto-print
Trunk Trouble key
(Removed)
03
Caller abandon during agent ringing
Direct call to agent’s ACD line
Call connect failed, requeued
04
05
06
Call connect failed, dropped after multiple attempts (Bad calling party)
Call re-connect attempt
07
08
Call connect error audit loop
09
Agent force logoff (viaTally-Oh code)
Supervisor forced agent to logoff (via Tally-Oh code)
Supervisor forced agent to Break (viaTally-Oh code)
Supervisor forced agent to Ready (via Tally-Oh code)
Supervisor forced agent toWork mode (viaTally-Oh code)
ACD initialization started
10
11
12
13
Auto-print
Auto-print
Auto-print
Auto-print
Auto-print
Insufficient ACD memory
Insufficient ACD call records
Excessive business stations, agent PBX lines, and Att’s. on ACD calls
Excessive calls queued
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
Auto-print
Unknown pilot number called
22
Count free call records (once per hour if enabled)
Invalid tenant specified for agent
23
Auto-print
Illegal execution of ACD time-out procedure
Pilot number illegally removed (not by MAT)
Attendant called pilot without held party
Position audit corrected locked agent (enabling turns on audit)
Call record audit corrected locked call record (enabling turns on audit)
Call recovered
25
26
27
28
29
Auto-print
31
Pointer corruption detected and corrected
Call abandoned while on hold
32
Count total number of incoming messages (once per hour if enabled)
ACD initialization complete
Auto-print
Auto-print
Auto-print
Recover call failure due to bad pilot number
Illegal ACD process, trace stored
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 9
Page 443
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
4. Auto-Print and Tally-Oh Codes
Some Bad Call Notifications are always printed on the MAT because of their importance. These codes are
marked as Auto-print in the above table. All codes not marked Auto-print are turned off when ACD is ini-
tialized, but can be manually turned on using the Tally-Oh code 075. To use, press the Tally key on any agent
or supervisor phone and enter:
•
•
•
•
075;
the two-digit reference number listed in the above table;
either 0 (Off) or 1 (On);
the # key.
For example, to turn on the Bad Call Notification print-out for “Call Recovered,” pressTALLY 075291#.
To change all Bad Call Notifications, use the reference number 00. For example, pressing TALLY 075000
turns off all codes.
5. Examples
Agent 4031 reported trunk trouble while connected to route 134, trunk 10, with the held station 4302.
•
1: 20 01 4A 31 00 00 00 00
2: 01 34 00 1A 43 A2 00 00
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Route 5 trunk 14 abandoned after ringing 72 seconds at agent position 5432.
1: 20 03 54 32 00 00 00 72
2: 00 05 00 14 00 00 00 00
Station 4003 has placed a direct call to the ACD line on station 5144.
1: 20 04 51 44 00 00 00 00
2: 4A A3 00 00 00 00 00 00
An attempt to connect route 7 trunk 3 to agent 6640 has failed. Caller is being re-queued.
1: 20 05 66 4A 00 00 00 00
2: 00 07 00 03 00 00 00 00
Successive attempts to connect route 3 trunk 15 have failed. Caller was dropped.
1: 20 06 00 00 00 00 00 00
2: 00 03 00 15 00 00 00 00
A second attempt is being made to connect route 3 trunk 15 to agent 5677.
1: 20 07 56 77 00 00 00 00
2: 00 03 00 15 00 00 00 00
A connection attempt to agent 2002 has failed. Checking agent for valid status.
1: 20 08 2A A2 00 00 00 00
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Agent 78300 usedTally-Oh code to forcibly logoff.
1: 20 09 78 3A A0 00 00 00
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Supervisor 3888 used Tally-Oh code to force logoff of agent 3005.
1: 20 10 3A A5 00 00 00 00
2: 38 88 00 00 00 00 00 00
Supervisor 3888 used Tally-Oh code to force agent 3005 into break mode.
1: 20 11 3A A5 00 00 00 00
2: 38 88 00 00 00 00 00 00
Supervisor 3888 used Tally-Oh code to force agent 3005 into ready mode.
1: 20 12 3A A5 00 00 00 00
2: 38 88 00 00 00 00 00 00
CHAPTER 9
Page 444
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
•
•
Supervisor 3888 used Tally-Oh code to force agent 3005 into work mode.
1: 20 13 3A A5 00 00 00 00
2: 38 88 00 00 00 00 00 00
The ACD has started the initialization process of release 2.12. Last initialization (prior to this one) was
on September 25 at 7:15 pm. This msg will be followed by the number 33 ACD Initialization Complete
msg.
1: 20 14 02 12 00 00 00 00
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
•
•
•
The ACD has exhausted available memory, new trunks will not be accepted.
1: 20 15 00 00 00 00 00 00
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
The ACD has exhausted available call records, new calls will receive ring-back tone.
1: 20 16 00 00 00 00 00 00
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
The ACD has exhausted available station records, additional ACD calls from business stations, agent
PBX lines, or attendants will not be accepted.
1: 20 17 00 00 00 00 00 00
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
•
•
•
The ACD has exhausted available queue records, additional queueing of ACD calls will not be pro-
cessed.
1: 20 18 00 00 00 00 00 00
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Route 9 trunk 2 called the monitored number 4359, which is not listed as a pilot number in the ACD
database.
1: 20 21 00 09 00 02 00 00
2: 43 59 00 00 00 00 00 00
This is a count of available call records. The ACD could accept 293 more calls. Printed once per hour,
on the hour.
1: 20 22 00 00 00 00 02 93
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
•
•
•
•
•
Invalid ACD tenant. Agent 3211 has a different tenant between ACD and PBX.
1: 20 23 32 11 00 00 00 00
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Internal ACD sequence error. This error has now been reported 7 times.
1: 20 24 00 00 00 00 00 07
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
The pilot number 4350 was illegally removed by the ACD. (Does not include removal from the MAT)
1: 20 25 43 5A 00 00 00 00
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Attendant 2 called pilot number 4350 without a held party.
1: 20 26 20 00 00 00 00 00
2: 43 5A 00 00 00 00 00 00
Position audit found agent 4301 in a bad state and corrected it. The position’s state was #14 and it was
pointing to a call record containing route 9 trunk 2, and 4302. The position audit is turned on by enabling
this printout. The audit does not run otherwise.
1: 20 27 43 A1 00 00 00 14
2: 00 09 00 02 00 00 43 A2
•
Call record audit found a call record in a bad state and corrected it. The three parties in the call record
were 4301, 4350, and route 52 trunk 7. The call record audit is turned on by enabling this printout. The
audit does not run otherwise.
1: 20 28 43 A1 00 00 00 00
2: 43 5A 00 00 00 52 00 07
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 9
Page 445
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
•
Call was recovered after ringing too long at an agent’s ACD line. The ringing time can be set with the
ACDSPL MAT command. The agent was 4301, the ringing time was 45 seconds, the split number was
2, the calling party was station 5800, and the held party was route 17 trunk 4.
1: 20 29 43 A1 00 00 45 02
2: 58 AA 00 00 00 17 00 04
•
•
•
The ACD detected corruption in the list of critical pointers. The pointer was 8000:1234 and the corrup-
tion type was #2. The corruption has been corrected and should not cause future problems.
1: 20 30 80 00 12 34 00 02
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
An ACD call released from an agent while on hold. The agent was 4301, three minutes and 20 seconds
have elapsed since the caller was put on hold, and the caller was route 15 trunk 7.
1: 20 31 43 A1 00 00 03 20
2: 00 15 00 07 00 00 00 00
Count of incoming messages from the PBX to the ACD. This printout will be done once an hour, on the
hour. There are 10 counters, each of which count messages for 6 minute blocks. In the first 6 minutes
of the hour, there were (hex) 482B messages. There were (hex) A655 messages in the second 6 minutes,
etc. This is used primarily for determining a relative traffic count.
1: 20 32 2B 48 55 A6 1C 56
2: 3F 62 98 B0 26 4D EF 78
•
•
ACD initialization completed. This message will follow the #14 ACD Initialization Started msg.
1: 20 33 00 00 00 00 00 00
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Recover Call failed due to a bad pilot number. When a call is recovered from an agent position after
ringing the specified amount of time, the caller is reconnected to the first pilot number in the ACD da-
tabase until another agent becomes available. If this pilot number is bad (doesn’t exist in the PBX data-
base, etc.), the recover will fail and this message will be printed. In this case, the pilot number 4350 is
being reported. The pilot number should be removed or reprogrammed correctly.
1: 20 34 43 5A 00 00 00 00
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
•
Internal ACD error. Trace snapshot saved in buffer. 27th occurrence of this error.
1: 20 99 00 00 00 00 00 27
2: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
CHAPTER 9
Page 446
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
3.2.4 MESSAGE DETAIL DATA OF SYSTEM MESSAGE “26-V”
:
LAN
Error
face
ort
System Message 26-V: LAN Interface Error Report (OAI/MIS)
This message is output when the PBX software Series 7300 and the ACD software release 2 or the later software
are installed.
1. Print-out Format
SYSTEM MESSAGE 26 - V
NEC - ESD
LAN INTERFACE ERROR REPORT
JULY 25 19:30
TCP/IP Part
Application Part
1: xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
2: xx xx xx 00 00 00 00 00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2. Print-out information (typical)
- TCP/IP Part -
1
5
7
8
4
~
~
IP address of the error-detected OAI/MIS terminal
Port No.
Used socket No.
6
Error Code (TCP/IP part)
- Application Part -
9
Application Type
05=OAI
07=MIS
Faulty Logical Port No.
Error Kind (ERR)
10
11
01=SEND Execution Error
02=RECEIVE Execution Error
03=TCP/IP Connection Error
04=Connection Error (B-level Infinite Loop, etc.)
05=TCP/IP Port Capacity Over
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 9
Page 447
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
4. FAULT DIAGNOSTICS
4.1 FAULT INFORMATION AND FAULT DIAGNOSTICS
Alarms are indicated or system messages are displayed if errors occur within the NEAX2400 IMX CallCenter
WorX-Enterprise (ACD) system. By collecting fault information promptly, the fault can be diagnosed and
recovery operations can be started quickly. Figure 9-2 shows the flow from the occurrence of a fault to its
diagnostics.
Fault Occurrence
Fault Information Collection
•
•
•
Alarm
System Message
Fault detected during routine
maintenance
Figure 9-2 Flow from Fault Occurrence to Fault Diagnostics
CHAPTER 9
Page 448
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
4.2 DIAGNOSTICS FROM SYSTEM MESSAGES
Figure 9-3 shows the operations from the diagnostics based on system messages to the identification of the cause
of fault.
Diagnostics from System Message
Determination of Faulty Circuit Card or Equipment
Identifies the cause of fault by analyzing the displayed system message
5-Q “ACD MIS LOCK UP”
6-H “Bad Call Notification” – See the “NEAX2400 IMX System Operations and
Maintenance Manual”.
For other messages, refer to the “NEAX2400 IMX System Operations and Maintenance
Manual”.
When an alarm, such as circuit card initialization, is displayed during diagnostics, press
the ALM RST button to reset the alarm indication.
When the result of diagnostics shows that the fault is temporary, execute the “RALM”
command to reset all alarms and system messages and supervise the system operation.
shown inside
of the diagnostics procedures.
Figure 9-3 Flow of Diagnostics from System Message
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 9
Page 449
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
4.2.1 TCP/IP LINK FAILURE
For details of System Massage “4-R” and “26-V”, see Section 3.2.1 and Section 3.2.3 in this Chapter.
START
According to each fault situation, perform the repairing procedure referring to the table below.
1. When the PBX software Series 7300 and the ACD software R1 or the earlier software are in-
stalled.
Table 9-3 Repairing Procedure for TCP/IP Link Failure (Message “4-R”) (1/2)
ERR
Detail information of ERR
Check Item
Restart the Host
TCP/IP connection is down for the TCP connection
disconnection ordered from Host.
01
According to Heart Beat function of Host, abnormal status of Check system operation of the Host
the Host system operation is detected.
0C
0D
Not used
TCP port is released due to the detection of abnormal state in Re-check the operation status of Host.
the TCP/IP part (such as B-level Infinite Loop. etc.)
0E
0F~FF
Not used
2. When the PBX software Series 7300 and the ACD software R2 or the later software are in-
stalled.
Table 9-3 Repairing Procedure for TCP/IP Link Failure (Message “4-R”) (2/2)
ERR
Detail information of ERR
Check Item
TCP/IP connection is down for the TCP connection
disconnection ordered from MIS or IVR/Host.
Restart the MIS or IVR/Host
01
According to Heart Beat function of MIS or IVR/Host, abnor- Check system operation of the MIS or
mal status of the MIS or IVR/Host system operation is detected. IVR/Host
0C
0D~FF
Not used
3. When Message, “26-V” is displayed:
Table 9-4 Repairing Procedure for TCP/IP Link Failure (Message “26-V”)
Error Situation Check Item
TCP/IP connection is down because the text is not transmitted [1] Check the TCP/IP Transmission
ERR
continuously.
capacity on the UAP side is proper or
not.
01
[2] Check on the operation status on the
UAP side is normal.
Incorrect text format is received.
[1] Check the software operation on the
Host side.
02
[2] Check the LAN cable connection
status.
TCP/IP connection is released due to the TCP port
disconnection order from the Host.
Re-start the Host computer.
03
04
TCP port is released due to the detection of abnormal state in Re-check the operation status of Host.
the Host operation.
TCP/IP connection cannot be established due to the connection The number of allowed ports for
port capacity over.
application use via TCP/IP must be 16 or
less. Adjust the total port number within
this range.
05
Host is still in abnormal status?
If yes,
Host is out of order. Repair the Host computer.
PZ-PC19 (LANI) card is out of order. For the replacement procedure, see the “NEAX2400 IMX
System Operations and Maintenance Manual”.
If no,
CHAPTER 9
Page 450
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
4.2.2 BAD CALL NOTIFICATION
Perform the diagnostic work followed by “System Operations and Maintenance Manual”.
5. FAULT RECOVERY PROCEDURE
5.1 BEFORE STARTING FAULT RECOVERY
After the fault diagnostics based on fault information such as the alarm and system messages, the next procedure
to be done is the fault recovery. Before proceeding to this, it is required to examine when it should be started by
comparing the emergency of repair and its influences. Particularly, when the fault is determined in the ST-BY
system, the work should be done at night when the ACD system is operated less frequently. The fault recovery
procedures can be divided into those on the ACD system and those on the MIS, as shown below.
Fault information Collection
See Section 5.3
MIS Fault Recovery –
Figure 9-4 Flow of Fault Recovery Procedures
5.2 ACD SYSTEM FAULT RECOVERY PROCEDURES
See the “NEAX2400 IMX System Operations and Maintenance Manual” for the fault recovery procedure
related to the ACD system shown below.
1. ACDP of Fault - Fault occurs intermittently at ACT side
2. ACDP of Fault - ST-BY side is faulty
NDA-24282 (E)
CHAPTER 9
Page 451
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
5.3 MIS FAULT RECOVERY PROCEDURES
This paragraph describes the fault recovery procedures related to the MIS in the order shown below.
1. MIS Restart Processing
Step 1: By selecting MIS System Stop, cause the MIS to cease operating.
Step 2: Turn off the power supply to the MIS. After 5 ~ 6 seconds, turn on the power supply again.
Step 3: The MIS starts up.
Step 4: Perform operation tests of the MIS.
2. Check on Connection Cables
Check to see if the cable is connected between the MIS and the NEAX2400 IMX.
CHAPTER 9
Page 452
NDA-24282 (E)
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A GLOSSARY
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution.
ACDP
Automatic Call Distribution Processor. (For the NEAX2400 IMX, the ACDP is
built in the CPU of the PBX)
ACD line
Virtual line of an ACD position.
ACD MAT
Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) on which the ACD commands are
loaded.
After call mode
Selection of ACD position availability after ACD call completion. In Work mode,
an ACD position becomes unavailable to receive ACD calls upon release from the
previous ACD call. In Available mode, an ACD position becomes available to
receive ACD calls upon release from the previous call.
Agent Personal Queue
Answer mode
Queues for calls that are directed to a specific ACD position.
Answer mode for ACD positions: either Auto or Manual. In Manual mode,
incoming calls ring at the position and are required to be answered manually. In
Auto mode, calls are connected using the headset or handset, and are introduced by
a Zip Tone.
Auto Work mode
Call Control Vector (CCV)
Circuits
Occurs when the ACD position receives or places a call on the PBX line.
A list of instructions or steps for handling incoming ACD calls.
The number of trunks in a trunk group that are designated as ACD trunks.
Conditional threshold
Threshold values set for call acceptance of conditional queue calls into the queue
of a target split.
Default language
The language that will be shown on the display of an ACD position that is logged
onto the ACD system.
Directory number
Do Not Disturb
Hardware type
Holiday
Night, Assist and Emergency destination programmed in split data (ACDSPL).
Occurs when none of the ACD positions of an ACD split are logged on.
term
Specifies if the position is a D
or analog agent.
A date designated as a holiday within the ACD system, subject to holiday call
handling procedures (see ACDHC and ACDHS).
I-ACD
Integrated ACD.
I/O type
Infolink
Defines which type of MIS or Infolink will be used on the input/output port.
A data communications link between the ACD system and external computer
equipment such as host and IVRs.
Internal priority
IVR
Priority at which an internal call will be handled.
Interactive Voice Response unit. A voice prompting unit that can be guided
through menus via DTMF signalling.
term
Language
Logon ID
Language to be used for ACD terminal display (D
ID code used to logon to the ACD system.
).
NDA-24282
APPENDIX A
Page 453
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLOSSARY
Logon required
Specifies whether ID entry is required for an ACD position to gain access to the
ACD system.
MAT
Maintenance Administration Terminal.
Maximum queue depth
MIS
The number of calls that can be placed in queue.
Management Information System.
MIS I/O port
PBX line
Designates the I/O port(s) used for MIS.
The My Line of an ACD position.
Pilot number
Queue priority
Route To
A number used for routing calls to a CCV or a Week Schedule.
Priority at which a trunk call is placed in queue to a split.
Defines the routing method for pilot number, such as CCV or Week Schedule. (See
ACDCCV and ACDWS.)
Split
A hunt group of ACD positions.
Splits Allowed
Tenant
Specifies which splits a position can take calls from.
A software delineation between multiple groups that share a PBX or ACD system,
e.g., multiple companies which share the same switch, or separate divisions of one
company that share an ACD systems.
Tenant name
Name associated with the occupant or user of an ACD system.
Number associated with the occupant or user of an ACD system.
Priority at which a transferred call will be handled.
Route number associated with ACD.
Tenant number
Transfer priority
Trunk group
Week schedule
A schedule consisting of a list of CCVs to be used in routing calls when the Week
Schedule method of routing has been designated. (See ACDWS, ACDPLT, and
ACDCCV commands.)
APPENDIX A
Page 454
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX B FIELD VALUES FOR ACD SCREENS
Table B-1 Field Values for ACD Screens (1/8)
DESCRIPTION VALUES
DEFAULT REQUIRED
SETTING /OPTIONAL
FIELD NAME
ACD Line
Line that receives all of the ACD calls for this position (via
pilot numbers). (Virtual line)
Up to 5
digits
none
required
After call
mode
The state the position will be in after finishing a call from this
split. If available mode is selected, the position will become
available immediately upon disconnect from the previous
call. If work mode is selected, the position will go into work
mode.
available/
work
available
required
Agentpriority Determines whether to use priorities when queueing available Priorities/
No
Priorities
queueing
agents.
No
required
optional
Priorities
Alternate
night
destination
CCV
Specifies the CCV to use for the pilot number’s alternate night
destination.
Index:
0 ~ 900
(0 = not
used)
0
Step:
1 ~ 20
Analog agent Number that invokes an ACD feature for an analog agent.
access code
up to 5
digits
none
none
required
optional
Analog agent Break type to be associated with an analog agent access code.
break type
1 ~ 9
Analog agent The feature associated with an analog agent access code.
feature
Possible values are: Logon with ID, Logon without ID,
Logoff, Ready Mode, Work Mode, Break Mode, Tally Code,
Trunk Trouble.
(see list at
left)
none
required
Analog agent Logon ID of agent or supervisor.
logon ID
up to 9
digits
none
none
optional
optional
Analog agent Tally code associate with the dialed analog agent access code. up to 9
tally code
digits
Analog agent The maximum time (in seconds) that an analog agent can stay
work mode
timeout
in Work mode. (0 = indefinite.)
0 ~ 9999
0
optional
optional
Analog
position
Specifies whether this position is analog or not.
Yes/No
No
NDA-24282
APPENDIX B
Page 455
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FIELD VALUES FOR ACD SCREENS
Table B-1 Field Values for ACD Screens (2/8)
DEFAULT REQUIRED
SETTING /OPTIONAL
FIELD NAME
DESCRIPTION
VALUES
Answer mode Determines how the position can answer ACD calls for this
split. If Manual is selected, the position must answer calls
manually by pressing the Answer button or the ACD Line key.
If Auto is selected, calls are connected automatically; the
position will hear Zip Tone when a new call is connected.
manual/
auto
manual
required
Assist
directory
number
The directory number that will be dialed when an agent
presses the Assist button while on an ACD call.
Up to 5
digits
none
Assist
No
optional
required
required
Assist key is: Defines the function of the Assist key.
Assist/
Monitor
Auto work
Automatic work mode, which removes the position from
mode for IC receiving ACD queued calls while receiving an incoming call Yes/No
PBX
on the PBX line.
Auto work
Automatic work mode, which removes the position from
mode for OG receiving ACD queued calls while placing an outgoing call on Yes/No
No
1
required
required
optional
required
optional
PBX
the PBX line.
Break type
Specifies whether agents should be prompted for break type
when entering Break mode.
1 (no
prompt)/
9
(prompt)
Call recover Sets the amount of time (in seconds) an ACD call can ring at
time
an agent position before being recovered. (0 = feature not
used)
0 ~ 255
0
Call waiting Defines how the call waiting chime will function for personal
chime queue calls. Off = no chime. First = chime will sound for the
(ACDLOG) first call placed in queue. All = chime will sound for each call
placed in queue.
Off/
First/
All
Off
0
Call waiting The minimum number of calls in queue to this split before the
0 ~ 999
(0 = off)
light
call waiting lamp will light steadily.
threshold
Call waiting The minimum number of calls in queue to this split before the
0 ~ 999
(0 = off)
flash
call waiting lamp will flash.
0
optional
required
threshold
CCV index
The index (reference number) to a specific CCV.
1 ~ 900
none
APPENDIX B
Page 456
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FIELD VALUES FOR ACD SCREENS
Table B-1 Field Values for ACD Screens (3/8)
DEFAULT REQUIRED
SETTING /OPTIONAL
FIELD NAME
DESCRIPTION
VALUES
CCV step
One of up to 20 steps in a Call Control Vector. (See ACDCCV
command for details.) Possible steps are listed below.
See below
none
required
ACTION
Queue To
ARGUMENT
split number
split number
split number
DESCRIPTION
Offer the call to the split
Stop offering the call to the split
Offer the call to the split if it meets a conditional threshold
If the split queue is full, go to Busy or specified CCV index and
step
Dequeue From
Conditional Queue
If Not Queued Go To CCV index and step
Go To
CCV index and step
1 ~ 10
priority (1 ~ 250)
amount (1 ~ 250)
number (1 ~ 58)
—
Go to the specified CCV index and step
Route the call to a number (up to 22 digits)
Change the call’s priority to the specified value
Change the call’s priority by the specified amount
Route the call to an announcement
Transfer To
New Priority
Up Priority
Announcement
Hang Up
Disconnect the call
Pause
End
seconds (1 ~ 999)
—
Pause before performing the next step
End of CCV
Skip
percentage (1 ~ 99)
number (1 ~ 99)
IVR access number
seconds (1 ~ 9999)
Skip percentage to next step
IVR Announcement
Individual IVR
ETA Less
Connect call to IVR for customized announcement
Individual IVR port number in a CCV step basis
Do next step if estimated time to answer is less than specified
time
ETA Greater
seconds (1 ~ 9999)
Do next step if estimated time to answer is greater than specified
time
ETA Less in a
specified split
ETA Greater in a
specified split
Ring Delay
split (1 ~127)/
seconds (1 ~ 511)
split (1 ~127)/
seconds (1 ~ 511)
seconds (1 ~ 15)
Do next step if estimated time to answer is less than specified
time in a specified split
Do next step if estimated time to answer is greater than specified
time in a specified split
Delay time to start ringing for the next incoming call
Chime
(ACDSPL)
Call Waiting chime that sounds when the call waiting
threshold is met.
On/Off
Off
required
required
Conditional Method for accepting calls into the split:
threshold
method
No Calls/
Agents
Available/
Calls in
Queue
• No Calls Accepted: no calls are accepted into the queue.
• Agents Available: calls are accepted depending on the
number of available positions.
• Calls in Queue: calls are accepted depending on the num-
ber of unanswered calls in queue.
No Calls
Accepted
Conditional Value used in conjunction with the method (described above): 1 ~ 250
threshold
value
• Agents Available: the number of positions that must be (Agents
available before calls will be accepted. Available)
• Calls in Queue: the least amount of unanswered calls in the 1 - 699
none
optional
queue before calls will be accepted.
(Calls in
Queue)
NDA-24282
APPENDIX B
Page 457
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FIELD VALUES FOR ACD SCREENS
Table B-1 Field Values for ACD Screens (4/8)
DEFAULT REQUIRED
SETTING /OPTIONAL
FIELD NAME
DESCRIPTION
VALUES
Default
language
The language used on a logged-off ACD position.
English/
Japanese/
Spanish/
Italian/
English
required
French/
German
Do Not
Disturb
Specifies how ACD calls will be handled when there are no
positions logged onto the split.
Queue/
Do Not
Queue
Queue
none
required
optional
Emergency
directory
number
The directory number that will be dialed when the agent
presses the EMERGENCY button while on an ACD call.
up to 5
digits
Emergency
recorder
number
Number of the recorder that will be connected to the call in
progress when an agent requires and emergency recording to
be made.
0 ~ 5
(0 = none)
0 (none)
none
optional
optional
File comment Any supplementary remarks you wish to be associated with
(remark)
up to 60
characters
the file.
Go to CCV
Defines action (CCV index and step) to be taken if the
CCV
index
(1 ~ 900)
and step
(1 ~ 20)
(forward/full) referenced logon ID is not logged on the system (forward), or
if the personal queue is full (full).
none
none
none
optional
optional
optional
Go to CCV
(overflow)
Defines action (CCV index and step) to be taken when there
is an overflow timeout.
CCV
index
(1 ~ 900)
and step
(1 ~ 20)
Holiday CCV A list of entries to be followed when a Holiday Schedule is
list
Time
used. Each entry consists of a start time and a CCV index and (HH:MM)
step.
CCV
index and
step
Holiday date The month and day that is defined as a holiday.
Date
MM/DD
none
none
optional
optional
Holiday
schedule
number
Reference number for a holiday schedule.
1 ~ 3
Hot split
Specifies whether this split is to be used for hot positions.
Yes/No
No
15
optional
required
Internal
priority
Priority that a station call will receive when queued within the 1 (high) ~
local system, when presented to the pilot number.
250 (low)
APPENDIX B
Page 458
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FIELD VALUES FOR ACD SCREENS
Table B-1 Field Values for ACD Screens (5/8)
DESCRIPTION VALUES
IVR directory The PBX directory number that allows ACD to access a port up to 5
DEFAULT REQUIRED
SETTING /OPTIONAL
FIELD NAME
none
none
required
required
required
number
on an Interactive Voice Response (IVR) unit.
digits
IVR pilot
number
The PBX directory number used by ACD to access ports on
an Interactive Voice Response (IVR) unit.
up to 5
digits
IVR port
number
Associates a port on the IVR unit with the IVR directory
number.
Language
The language a position’s messages will be displayed in when English/
a position is logged on.
Japanese/
Spanish/
Italian/
English
required
French/
German
Logon ID
The agent’s ID code used when logging on to the ACD
system.
up to 9
digits
none
Required
blank
99
required
required
optional
required
optional
Logon ID is ? Used to control access to the split.
Required/
Not Used
Logon Name The name to be displayed when logging on with a logon ID. up to 20
Displayed on ACD position’s display.)
characters
Max. queue The maximum number of calls that can be queued to this split
depth
1 ~ 999
or personal pilot number.
Multi-split
Defines whether this logon ID has access to multiple splits
simultaneously.
Yes/No
No
Night
directory
number
The directory number to which calls will be routed when the
split is in Night mode. (Must be a valid pilot number.)
up to 5
digits
none
optional
Operator
access code
Defines the access code programmed for the operator in the
PBX database.
up to 5
digits
0
required
required
required
required
Outbound call Time allowed for outbound calls to be considered
answer timer successfully completed
0 ~ 60 sec-
onds
30
Overflow
timeout
Defines how long a call will stay in queue to the personal pilot
number before it overflows. (0 = Indefinite.)
0 ~ 9999
Yes/No
none
No
PBX
incoming
Specifies whether agents should be forced into Work mode
upon receiving an incoming call on their PBX line.
PBX outgoing Specifies whether agents should be forced into Work mode
upon receiving dial tone for an outgoing call on their PBX
line.
Yes/No
No
required
optional
Personal
Overrides the assist request number programmed in
assist request ACDSPL.
number
up to 5
digits
none
NDA-24282
APPENDIX B
Page 459
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FIELD VALUES FOR ACD SCREENS
Table B-1 Field Values for ACD Screens (6/8)
DEFAULT REQUIRED
SETTING /OPTIONAL
FIELD NAME
DESCRIPTION
VALUES
Personal
emergency
request
Overrides the emergency request number programmed in
ACDSPL.
up to 5
digits
none
none
none
optional
optional
optional
number
Personal pilot Defines the number programmed in AMNO/AMNOL/
number
up to 5
digits
AMNON. (Not programmed in ACDPLT.)
Personal
queue
announcemen
t number
Defines the announcement used for calls directed to personal
queue (for the entire tenant).
1 ~ 58
Personal
queue
Defines the priority for calls that overflow from a personal
queue.
overflow/
forward
priority
1 ~ 250
1
optional
Pilot name
Name displayed when a call is answered at positions.
up to 20
characters
blank
none
none
1
optional
required
required
required
Pilot number A directory number that calls can be presented to. (Personal
(ACDPLT)
up to 5
digits
pilot numbers are not programmed here.)
Position
The My Line of the ACD position.
up to 5
digits
Queue
priority
Priority at which a call from this trunk group (route) is placed 1 (high) ~
in the queue.
250 (low)
Route to:
Method used to route a call when presented to this pilot
number. Options are:
CCV
index
• CCV: index and step number
• Week Schedule: reference number
(1 ~ 900)
and step
(1 ~ 20)/
week
CCV
index 1,
step 1
required
optional
schedule
(1 ~ 10)
Split name
Name displayed at positions at logon time.
up to 20
characters
blank
Split number Number that references a split.
1 ~ 250
1 ~ 250
1
1
required
required
Split priority Used when assigning calls to agents in multi-split mode.
Splits
(ACDTN)
Maximum number of splits assigned to this tenant.
1 ~ 250
1
required
APPENDIX B
Page 460
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FIELD VALUES FOR ACD SCREENS
Table B-1 Field Values for ACD Screens (7/8)
DEFAULT REQUIRED
SETTING /OPTIONAL
FIELD NAME
DESCRIPTION
VALUES
Splits
(ACDLOG)
Designates what splits are allowed.
All, or up
to 4
All
required
different
splits
Splitsallowed Number of splits allowed to position.
(ACDPSN)
1 ~ 250 or
Any
1
0
required
optional
Stranded calls Designates the CCV index to use when recovering stranded
0 ~ 900
CCV index
calls. (0 = not used.)
Successful
feature
activation
announcemen
t
Specifies the announcement to be connected to an analog
agent notifying that a feature activation was successful. (0 =
none.)
0 ~ 58
0
optional
optional
Supervisor
Specifies whether this position is allowed to use supervisor
Allow/
Do Not
Allow
Do Not
Allow
tally-oh codes Tally-Oh codes.
Tenant name Name printed at the top of reports.
up to 20
characters
blank
none
15
optional
required
required
Tenant
Reference number for the tenant.
1 ~ 10
number
Transfer
priority
Priority of a transferred call when presented to a pilot number. 1 (high) ~
250 (low)
Transfer
numbers
Digits to be dialed for each “TransferTo” CCV step that
references this number. Only digits 0 ~ 9 are allowed. This is up to 22
only required when there is a “TransferTo” step referencing
it.
blank
optional
digits
Trunk group Name to be displayed when a call is answered at an ACD
name position.
up to 20
characters
blank
1
optional
required
required
required
Trunk group Number that references a trunk group (route).
number
1 ~ 254
1 ~ 255
Trunk circuits Used for activating/deactivating the trunk’s circuits as ACD
circuits (trunks).
1 to 1
1
Trunk priority The priority used when queueing ACD trunk calls to a pilot 1 (high) ~
number.
250 (low)
Week
A list of entries to be followed when a week schedule is used.
Time
schedule
CCV list
Each entry consists of a start time and the CCV index and step (HH:MM)
to be followed.
CCV
index and
step
none
optional
number
NDA-24282
APPENDIX B
Page 461
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FIELD VALUES FOR ACD SCREENS
Table B-1 Field Values for ACD Screens (8/8)
DEFAULT REQUIRED
SETTING /OPTIONAL
FIELD NAME
DESCRIPTION
VALUES
Week
Number that reference a week schedule.
schedule
number
1 ~ 10
1
required
Work mode
A mode that exempts the agent/position from receiving ACD
calls in queue without logging out. Restricted or allowed on a
per-split basis.
Allow/
Restrict
Allow
0
required
optional
Work mode
timeout
Total time that an ACD position will be allowed to stay in
Work mode. (0 = indefinite.)
0 ~ 9999
seconds
APPENDIX B
Page 462
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX C ACD SERVICE IN FUSION NETWORK
The table below shows Available or Not Available for each ACD feature described in Chapter 5 when those services
are activated between two fusion nodes within a Fusion Network.
Table C-1 ACD Service List in Fusion Network
: Available, × : Not available, – : Not applicable
FCCS
Series
Series
7300
(Release 5)
or earlier
FEATURE
CODE
7300
(Release 7)
or later
SERVICE NAME
–
×
–
–
–
×
×
–
–
×
×
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
×
Note: When the “AGENT ANYWHERE” data is programmed.
NDA-24282
APPENDIX C
Page 463
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE IN FUSION NETWORK
Table C-1 ACD Service List in Fusion Network (Continued)
: Available, × : Not available, – : Not applicable
FCCS
Series
7300
(Release 7)
or later
Series
7300
(Release 5)
or earlier
FEATURE
CODE
SERVICE NAME
(Note)
×
–
–
–
–
×
–
×
–
–
–
×
×
×
×
×
×
–
×
×
–
–
×
–
×
×
–
×
–
×
–
Note: When the “AGENT ANYWHERE” data is programmed.
APPENDIX C
Page 464
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACD SERVICE IN FUSION NETWORK
Table C-1 ACD Service List in Fusion Network (Continued)
: Available, × : Not available, – : Not applicable
FCCS
Series
7300
(Release 7)
or later
Series
7300
(Release 5)
or earlier
FEATURE
CODE
SERVICE NAME
(Note)
–
–
–
×
–
–
–
–
×
Note: When the “AGENT ANYWHERE” data is programmed.
NDA-24282
APPENDIX C
Page 465
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is for your notes.
APPENDIX C
Page 466
NDA-24282
Revision 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Milwaukee Stove 1500HT User Manual
Musical Fidelity Stereo Amplifier KW 500 User Manual
NEC Power Supply EU1V0UM00 User Manual
Newcon Optik Binoculars BN5 User Manual
Nortel Networks Telephone C4012 User Manual
Novatel Home Theater System GM 14915105 User Manual
Panasonic CRT Television CT 31XF43 User Manual
Panasonic Electric Shaver EH2511 User Manual
Panasonic Music Mixer DA7 User Manual
Paradyne Network Card SAM2000G 12 User Manual